sl - mercedes-benz usa · convenience ..... 127 instrument cluster ..... 122 lighting ... race...

SLOperator’s Manual

230_AKB; 6; 22, en-USd2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 1

SymbolsTrademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG Inc.RESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of

Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks

of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc.The following symbols are found in thisOperator’s Manual:

G Warning!Warning notices draw your attention tohazards that may endanger your health or life,or the health or life of others.

! Highlights hazards that may result indamage to your vehicle.

i Helpful hints or further information youmay find useful.

X This symbol points to instructionsfor you to follow.

X A number of these symbolsappearing in succession indicatesa multiple-step procedure.

Y page This symbol tells you where to lookfor further information on a topic.

YY This continuation symbol marks awarning or procedure which iscontinued on the next page.

Display Text in displays, such as the controlsystem, are printed in the typeshown here.


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 2

Our company and staff congratulate you onthe purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.Your selection of our product is ademonstration of your trust in our companyname. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desireto own an automobile that will be as easy aspossible to operate and will provide years ofservice.Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts ofmany skilled engineers and craftsmen. Tohelp assure your driving pleasure, and alsothe safety of you and your passengers, we askyou to make a small investment of time:RPlease read this manual carefully, then

return it to your vehicle where it will behandy for your reference.RPlease follow the recommendations

contained in this manual. They aredesigned to acquaint you with theoperation of your Mercedes-Benz.RPlease pay attention to the warnings and

cautions contained in this manual. They aredesigned to help improve the safety of thevehicle operator and occupants.

We extend our best wishes for many miles ofsafe, pleasurable driving.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCA Daimler Company

2305849396 É2305849396dËÍ


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 1


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 2

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 19

At a glance ........................................... 25

Safety and security ............................. 37

Controls in detail ................................. 67

Operation ........................................... 177

Practical hints ................................... 223

Technical data ................................... 293

Contents 3


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 3

AABC (Active Body Control) ................ 142

Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 231

ABS (Antilock Brake System) ............. 55Indicator lamp ................................ 255Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 227

Accessory weight .............................. 205Accidents ........................................... 101

Air bags ........................................... 39Distance warning function ............. 140Emergency calls (Tele Aid) ............. 168

Active Bi-Xenon headlampssee Headlamps

Active Body Controlsee ABC

Additives Engine oil ....................................... 306Gasoline ......................................... 307

Address change ................................... 20Advanced Tire PressureMonitoring System (AdvancedTPMS) ................................................. 190

Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ................................... 234, 253

Air bags ................................................ 39Emergency call upon deployment . . 168Front, driver and passenger ............. 41Head-thorax ..................................... 42Knee bag .......................................... 42Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 229OCS (Occupant ClassificationSystem) ........................................... 43Passenger front air bag offindicator lamp ................... 33, 43, 266Safety guidelines ............................. 40

Air conditioning refrigerant andlubricant ............................................. 306Air distribution .................................. 153Air pressure

see Tire inflation pressure Air pressure (tires) ............................ 205Air pump (electric) ............................ 280Air recirculation mode ...................... 154AIRSCARF neck-level heating ............. 84

Air vents ............................................. 151Air volume .......................................... 153Alarm system

see Anti-theft systems Alignment bolt (vehicle toolkit) .............................................. 224, 279Alternator


Alternator (Technical data)see Vehicle specification

AMG menu ......................................... 116Anticorrosion/antifreeze .................. 308Antilock Brake System

see ABS Anti-theft systems ............................... 63

Anti-theft alarm system ................... 63Immobilizer ...................................... 63Tow-away alarm ............................... 64

Aquaplaningsee Hydroplaning

Armrest Storage compartment .................... 162

Ashtray ............................................... 166Aspect ratio (tires) ............................ 205Audio/DVD menu .............................. 119Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ........ 86Automatic central locking .......... 73, 126Automatic headlamp mode ................ 90Automatic interior lighting control .... 94Automatic locking when driving ...... 126Automatic shift program .................. 106Automatic transmission ................... 103

Automatic shift program ................ 106Gear range indicator ...................... 106Gear ranges ................................... 106Gear selector lever ........................ 103Hill-start assist system .................. 142Kickdown ....................................... 105Kickdown (manual shift program) . . 111Manual shift program ..................... 109One-touch gearshifting .................. 108Program mode indicator ................ 107Program mode selector dial(SL 63 AMG) .......................... 107, 109

4 Index


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 4

Program mode selector switch(automatic shiftprogram) ................................ 106, 107Program mode selector switch(manual shift program) .................. 109Shifting procedure ......................... 104Steering wheel gearshift control .... 108Transmission position indicator ..... 104Transmission positions .................. 104

AUX socket ........................................ 161Axle oils .............................................. 304

BBackrest

see Seats Backup lamps

Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 249Replacing bulbs ............................. 272

Bar (air pressure unit) ....................... 205BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 56Batteries, SmartKey

Checking condition .......................... 71Replacing ....................................... 269

Battery, Vehicle ................................. 283Charging ........................................ 285Jump starting ................................. 285Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 247

Bead (tire) .......................................... 205Beverage holders

see Cup holders Brake Assist System

see BAS Brake fluid

Checking level ............................... 185Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 239

Brake lamps Cleaning lenses ............................. 218

Brake pads Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 238

Brakes ................................................ 210High-performance brake system .... 211Parking brake ................................ 102Warning lamp ................................. 255

Break-in period .................................. 178Bulbs

see Replacing bulbs

CCAC (Customer Assistance Center) ... 22California retail buyers andlessees, important notice for ............. 20Calls (phone) ...................................... 129Can holders

see Cup holders Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants .................................. 303Carpets, cleaning .............................. 220Central locking

Automatic ................................ 73, 126KEYLESS-GO .................................... 69Locking/unlocking from inside ........ 73SmartKey ......................................... 68

Central locking/unlocking switch ..... 73Certification label .............................. 294Children in the vehicle

Air bags ........................................... 39Indicator lamp, passenger frontair bag off ........................................ 43Infant and child restraint systems .... 52OCS (Occupant ClassificationSystem) ........................................... 43Safety notes ..................................... 51

Child safetysee Children in the vehicle

Chrome-plated exhaust tip,cleaning .............................................. 221Cigarette lighter ................................ 166Climate control system

Air conditioning ............................. 150Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 306Air distribution ............................... 153Air recirculation mode ................... 154Air vents ........................................ 151Air volume ..................................... 153Automatic mode ............................ 150Deactivating system ...................... 149Front defroster .............................. 153Maximum cooling MAX COOL ........ 153Residual heat and ventilation ......... 154Temperature .................................. 151

Index 5


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 5

Clock ..................................................... 28Cockpit ................................................. 28Cold tire inflation pressure .............. 205Collapsible tire (spare wheel) .......... 303COMAND system

see separate COMAND systemoperating instructions

Combination switch ............................ 92Control system .................................. 113

Multifunction display ..................... 114Multifunction steering wheel ......... 113Resetting to factory settings .......... 121

Control system menus ...................... 115AMG ............................................... 116Audio/DVD .................................... 119Distronic ........................................ 120Navigation ..................................... 120Settings ......................................... 121Standard display ............................ 116Telephone ...................................... 129Trip computer ................................ 128Vehicle status message memory . . . 120

Control system submenus Convenience .................................. 127Instrument cluster ......................... 122Lighting .......................................... 124Vehicle ........................................... 126

Convenience submenu Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 127Fold-in function for exterior rearview mirrors ................................... 127

Coolant Anticorrosion/antifreeze ............... 308Capacities ...................................... 304Checking level ............................... 184Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 244Temperature gauge ........................ 112Warning lamp ................................. 263

Corner-illuminating lamps .................. 93Replacing bulbs ............................. 272

Cruise control .................................... 130Activating ....................................... 131Canceling ....................................... 132Changing the set speed ................. 132Last stored speed .......................... 132Lever .............................................. 131

Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 232Resume function ............................ 132Setting current speed .................... 131

Cup holders ........................................ 164Curb weight ....................................... 205Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 22Customer Relations Department ....... 22

DDashboard

see Instrument cluster Data recording ..................................... 22Daytime running lamp mode .............. 90

Switching on or off ......................... 124Deep water

see Standing water Defogging (windshield) ..................... 153Defroster

Front (Climate control system) ...... 153Rear window .................................. 155

Delayed shut-off Exterior lamps ................................ 125Interior lighting .............................. 126

Department of Transportationsee DOT

Difficulties While driving .................................. 101With starting .................................... 99

Digital clocksee Clock

Digital speedometer ......................... 116Dimensions (vehicle)

see Vehicle specification Direction of rotation (tires) .............. 197Displays

Digital speedometer ...................... 116Distronic ........................................ 135Maintenance service indicator ....... 214Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 226Multifunction display ..................... 114Outside temperature ...................... 116Symbol messages .......................... 237Text messages ............................... 227Trip computer ................................ 128

6 Index


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 6

Vehicle status message memory . . . 120Vehicle system settings ................. 121

Distronic ............................................ 133Cleaning system sensor cover ....... 218Control system .............................. 120Distance warning function ............. 140Driving with .................................... 139Menu ............................................. 135Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 232Resume function ............................ 138Sensor cover .................................. 218Speed settings ............................... 137Warning and indicatorlamps ..................................... 135, 262

Door control panel .............................. 35Doors

Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ... 69Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 68Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 241Opening from inside ......................... 72Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 171Unlocking (Mechanical key) ........... 267

DOT (Department ofTransportation) .................................. 205Drinking and driving ......................... 209Driving

Abroad ........................................... 212Hydroplaning ................................. 212Instructions ............................. 98, 209In winter ........................................ 208Problems ....................................... 101RACE START (SL 63 AMG) ............. 141Safety systems ................................ 54Systems ......................................... 130Through standing water ................. 212With Distronic ................................ 139

Driving and parking Safety notes ..................................... 98

Driving off .................................. 100, 212Driving safety systems ....................... 54

ABS .................................................. 55BAS .................................................. 56ESP® ................................................ 56ETS .................................................. 57

Driving systems Active Body Control (ABC) ............. 142Cruise control ................................ 130Distronic ........................................ 133Hill-start assist system .................. 142Parktronic system .......................... 144RACE START (SL 63 AMG) ............. 141

Driving tips, automatictransmission ...................................... 105

EEasy-entry/exit feature .............. 85, 127


Electrical system Improper work on ormodifications ................................... 21Power outlet .................................. 166

Electrical system (Technical data)see Vehicle specification

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP®

Emergency, in case of First aid kit ..................................... 224Flat tire .......................................... 276Hazard warning flasher .................... 92Roadside Assistance ................ 20, 169Towing the vehicle ......................... 287

Emergency calls Tele Aid .......................................... 168

Emergency engine shutdown ........... 292Emergency operations

Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 171Trunk lid, emergency release ........... 77

Emergency Tensioning Devicesee ETD

Emission control ............................... 213Information label ............................ 295System warranties ........................... 19

Engine Break-in recommendations ............ 178Cleaning ......................................... 217Compartment ................................ 180Malfunction indicatorlamp .................................. 31, 32, 263Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 244

Index 7


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 7

Number .......................................... 295Starting ............................................ 98Turning off ..................................... 102

Engine (Technical data)see Vehicle specification

Engine coolantsee Coolant

Engine oil Adding ........................................... 183Additives ........................................ 306Checking level ............................... 181Consumption ................................. 181Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 247Oil dipstick ..................................... 182Recommended engine oils and oilfilter ............................................... 305

ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram) .............................................. 56

ETS .................................................. 57Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 228Warning lamp ........................ 259, 260

ETD (Emergency TensioningDevice) ................................................. 49

Safety guidelines ............................. 40ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 57Express operation

Power windows ................................ 96Exterior lamp switch ........................... 89Exterior rear view mirrors .................. 86

Fold-in function ................................ 88Parking position ............................... 87Power-folding ................................... 88Switching fold-in function on oroff .................................................. 127

Exterior view of vehicle ...................... 26

FFastening the seat belts ..................... 48First aid kit ......................................... 224Flat tire ............................................... 276

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 282Mounting the spare wheel ............. 277Preparing the vehicle ..................... 277Spare wheel ........................... 276, 303

Floormats ........................................... 175

Fluids ABC fluid ................................ 184, 304Automatic transmission fluid ......... 304Brake fluid ..................................... 304Capacities ...................................... 303Engine coolant ............................... 304Engine oil ....................................... 304Hydraulic fluid ................................ 305Power steering fluid ....................... 304Washer and headlamp cleaningsystem ........................................... 305

Fog lamps ............................................. 91Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ................................... 250, 252

Fold-in function for exterior rearview mirrors ........................................ 88Front air bags

see Air bags Front lamps

see Headlamps Fuel ..................................................... 178

Additives ........................................ 307Capacity, fuel tank ......................... 305Drive sensibly–safe fuel ................. 209Fuel consumption statistics ........... 128Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 179Fuel tank reserve warninglamp .................................. 31, 32, 262Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 306Refueling ........................................ 178Requirements ................................ 307

Fuel filler flap ..................................... 179Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ........ 303Fuel tank

Capacity ........................................ 305Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 179Refueling ........................................ 178

Fuses .................................................. 291

GGarage door opener .................... 35, 172Gasoline

see Fuel GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ... 206Gear range ......................................... 106

Indicator ........................................ 106

8 Index


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 8

Limiting .......................................... 108Shifting into optimal ...................... 109

Gear selector lever ............................ 103Cleaning ......................................... 220Gearshift pattern ........................... 103Lock ......................................... 99, 103Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 234Shifting procedure ......................... 104Transmission position indicator ..... 104Transmission positions .................. 104

Generatorsee Alternator

Global locking/unlockingsee Key, SmartKey

Glove box ........................................... 161Gross Axle Weight Rating

see GAWR Gross Vehicle Weight

see GVW Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

see GVWR GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ............ 206GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) ................................................ 206

HHard plastic trim items, cleaning .... 220Hazard warning flasher ....................... 92Headlamp cleaning system ................ 93Headlamps

Active Bi-Xenon headlamps ............. 89Automatic headlamp mode .............. 90Bi-Xenon .................................. 89, 272Cleaning lenses ............................. 218Cleaning system .............................. 93Daytime running lamp mode ............ 90Delayed shut-off ............................ 125High-beam flasher ............................ 92High-beam headlamps ..................... 92Low-beam headlamps ...................... 90Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 249Replacing bulbs ............................. 271Switch .............................................. 89

Headliner, cleaning and care of ....... 220

Head restraints .................................... 80Adjustment ...................................... 80

Head-thorax air bags ........................... 42Height adjustment

Seats ............................................... 80High-beam flasher ............................... 92High-beam headlamps ................ 92, 272

Indicator lamp ............................ 31, 32Replacing bulbs ............................. 272

High-performance brake system ..... 211Hill-start assist system ..................... 142Hood ................................................... 180


Horn ...................................................... 28Hydroplaning ..................................... 212

IIdentification labels .......................... 294Identification number, vehicle(VIN) ................................................... 295Ignition ..................................... 78, 79, 99Immobilizer .......................................... 63Indicator lamps

see Lamps, indicator and warning Infant and child restraint systems

see Children in the vehicle Inflation pressure

see Tires, Inflation pressure Inside door handle ........................ 35, 72Instrument cluster ...................... 30, 111

Illumination .................................... 112Lamps ............................................ 254Multifunction display ..................... 114

Instrument lightingsee Instrument cluster, Illumination

Instrument panelsee Instrument cluster

Instruments and controlssee Cockpit

Interior lighting ................................... 94Delayed shut-off ............................ 126Reading lamps ................................. 94

Interior rear view mirror ..................... 86Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 86

Interior storage spacessee Storage compartments

Index 9


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 9

Intermittent wiping ............................. 95Rain sensor ...................................... 95

JJack ..................................................... 225Jump starting ..................................... 285

KKey, Mechanical

Loss of ............................................. 72Replacing ......................................... 72Unlocking/locking manually .......... 267Valet locking .................................... 77

Key, SmartKey Battery check lamp .......................... 71Checking batteries ........................... 71Factory setting ........................... 69, 71Global locking (KEYLESS-GO) .................................................. 71Global locking (SmartKey) ................ 69Global unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) .................................................. 71Global unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 69Important notes on KEYLESS-GO ..... 70Locking/unlocking ........................... 68Loss of ............................................. 72Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 242Opening, trunk ................................. 73Remote control ................................ 68Replacing ......................................... 72Replacing batteries ........................ 269Restoring to factory setting ....... 69, 71Selective setting ........................ 69, 71Starter switch positions ................... 78

KEYLESS-GO Starter switch positions ................... 79

Kickdown ........................................... 105Kickdown (manual shift program) ... 111Kilopascal (air pressure unit) ........... 206Knee bag .............................................. 42

LLabels

Certification ................................... 294Emission control information ......... 295Tire and Loading Informationplacard ........................................... 193Tire inflation pressure .................... 188

Lamps, exterior Exterior lamp switch ........................ 89Front .............................................. 272Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 249Rear ............................................... 272Switching on/off .............................. 89

Lamps, indicator and warning ABS ................................... 31, 32, 255Brakes ..................................... 30, 255Coolant .......................................... 263Distance warninglamp .............................. 135, 140, 262Enginemalfunction .......................................... 31, 32, 263ESP® ................................ 30, 259, 260ESP®

OFF ........................... 31, 32, 259, 261Fog lamps ........................................ 91Fuel tankreserve .............................. 31, 32, 262High-beamheadlamps ............................................ 31, 32, 92Instrument cluster ................... 30, 254Low tire pressure/TPMSmalfunction telltale ........................ 265Passenger front air bagoff ...................................... 33, 43, 266Roll bar .......................................... 258Seat belttelltale .................................... 31, 32, 48, 256SPORT handling mode ..................... 31SRS ............................. 31, 32, 38, 257Turn signals ..................................... 30

Language, selecting .......................... 123

10 Index


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 10

License plate lamps Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 251Replacing bulbs ............................. 272

Light alloy wheels, cleaning ............. 220Lighter

see Cigarette lighter Lighting ................................................ 89

Daytime running lamp mode ............ 90Exterior ............................................ 89Interior ............................................. 94

Limp-home mode .............................. 111Load assist ......................................... 164Load index (tires) ...................... 201, 206Locator lighting ................................. 125Lock button

Outside door handle (KEYLESS-GO) .................................................. 71

Locking the vehicle KEYLESS-GO .................................... 69Manually ........................................ 269SmartKey ......................................... 68

Loss of Key .................................................. 72Service and Warranty Informationbooklet .......................................... 294

Low-beam headlamps ......................... 90Exterior lamp switch ........................ 89Switching on .................................... 90

Lubricants .......................................... 303Luggage cover ................................... 158Lumbar support ................................... 81

MMaintenance ........................................ 20Maintenance System

Service indicator display ................ 214Service indicator message ............. 214Service term exceeded .................. 214

Manual headlamp mode (Low-beam headlamps) ................................ 90Manual shift program ....................... 109Maximum engine speed

see Vehicle specification Maximum loaded vehicle weight ..... 206Maximum load rating (tires) ............. 206

Maximum permissible tireinflation pressure .............................. 206Mechanical key

see Key, Mechanical Media interface ................................. 162Memory function ................................. 88Menus

see Control system menus Mirrors .................................................. 86

Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 86Exterior rear view mirror parkingposition ............................................ 87Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 86Interior rear view mirror ................... 86Memory function .............................. 88Power-folding exterior rear viewmirrors ............................................. 88Vanity mirror .................................. 165

MOExtended system ......................... 283MOExtended tires ..................... 283, 300MON (Motor Octane Number) .......... 307Motor Octane Number

see MON Multicontour seat ................................ 82Multifunction display ........................ 114

Symbol messages .......................... 237Text messages ............................... 227Vehicle status messages ............... 226

Multifunction display messages ABC (Active Body Control) ............. 231ABS ................................................ 227Active headlamps .......................... 249Advanced TPMS ..................... 234, 253Air bags ......................................... 229Alternator ...................................... 247Automatic transmission ................. 234Battery ........................................... 247Brake fluid ..................................... 239Brake pads ..................................... 238Check engine ................................. 244Coolant .......................................... 244Corner-illuminating lamps .............. 252Cruise control ................................ 232Distronic ........................................ 232Doors ............................................. 241Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 243Engine oil ....................................... 247Engine service ............................... 244

Index 11


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 11

ESP® .............................................. 228Fog lamps .............................. 250, 252Gas cap .......................................... 249Gear selector lever ........................ 234High-beam lamps ........................... 251Hood .............................................. 241License plate lamps ....................... 251Light sensor ................................... 251Low-beam lamps ............................ 251Parking brake ................................ 239Parking lamps ................................ 251Passenger front air bag .................. 229Reserve fuel ................................... 249Retractable hardtop ....................... 241Reverse lamp ................................. 249Roll bar .................................... 51, 240Side marker lamps ......................... 250SmartKey ....................................... 242SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO .......... 242SRS ................................................ 240Tail lamps ...................................... 252Tele Aid .......................................... 240Tire inflation pressure ............ 234, 253Tire pressure monitor .................... 234Tires ...................................... 234, 253Trunk ............................................. 241Turn signals ................................... 253Washer fluid ................................... 243

Multifunction steering wheel Adjustment ...................................... 84Buttons .......................................... 113Cleaning ......................................... 220Easy-entry/exit feature ........... 85, 127Gearshift control ............................ 108Memory function .............................. 88Overview .......................................... 27

NNavigation menu ............................... 120Navigation system

see Separate operating instructions Nets, parcel ....................................... 161Night security illumination .............. 125Normal occupant weight .................. 206Number, vehicle identification(VIN) ................................................... 295

OOccupant Classification System

see OCS (Occupant ClassificationSystem)

Occupant distribution ....................... 206Occupant safety

Air bags ........................................... 39Children and air bags ....................... 39Children in the vehicle ..................... 51Fastening the seat belts ................... 48Infant and child restraint systems .... 52Introduction ..................................... 38OCS (Occupant ClassificationSystem) ........................................... 43Passenger front air bag offindicator lamp .......................... 43, 266Roll bar ............................................ 51Seat belts .................................. 40, 46

OCS (Occupant ClassificationSystem) ................................................ 43

Self-test ........................................... 45Odometer ........................................... 115Oil, oil level

see Engine oil On-board computer

see Control system One-touch gearshifting ..................... 108Operating safety .................................. 21Ornamental moldings, cleaning ....... 218Overhead control panel ...................... 35

PPaintwork, cleaning .......................... 216Paintwork code ................................. 295Panic alarm .......................................... 54Panorama roof

Sunshade ....................................... 160Parcel nets ......................................... 161Parking ............................................... 101

Parktronic system .......................... 144Parking and standing lamp

Replacing bulbs ............................. 272Parking brake .................................... 102


12 Index


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 12

Parking position Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 87Transmission position .................... 104

Parktronic system Cleaning system sensors ............... 218Malfunction .................................... 147Minimum distance ......................... 146Sensor range ................................. 145Switching on/off ........................... 147System sensors ............................. 145Warning indicators ................... 28, 146

Parts service ...................................... 294PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

see Passenger front air bag offindicator lamp

Passenger front air bag ...................... 41Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 229

Passenger front air bag offindicator lamp ....................... 33, 43, 266Passenger safety

see Occupant safety Pedals ................................................. 209Phone

see Telephone Plastic parts, cleaning ...................... 220Power assistance .............................. 210Power closing assist for trunk lid ...... 78Power outlet ...................................... 166Power seats

see Seats Power washer .................................... 216Power windows ................................... 96

Cleaning ......................................... 219Door windows .................................. 97Operation ......................................... 96Rear side windows ........................... 97Synchronizing .................................. 98

Practical hints ................................... 224Problems

While driving .................................. 101With vehicle ..................................... 22With wipers ...................................... 96

Product information ............................ 19Production options weight ............... 206

Program mode selector dial(SL 63 AMG)

Automatic shift program ................ 107Manual shift program ..................... 109

Program mode selector switch Automatic shiftprogram ................................. 106, 107Manual shift program ..................... 109

Proximity keysee Key, SmartKey

PSI (air pressure unit) ....................... 206

RRACE START (SL 63 AMG) ................. 141RACETIMER ........................................ 117Radio

Selecting stations .......................... 119Radio transmitters ............................ 213Rain sensor

see Intermittent wiping Rear axle oil ....................................... 304Rear fog lamp

see Fog lamps Rear lamps

see Tail lamps Rear window defroster ..................... 155Recommended tire inflationpressure ..................................... 187, 206Refrigerant, air conditioning ............ 306Refueling ............................................ 178Regular checks .................................. 180Reminder, Seat belt

see Seat belts, Telltale Remote control

see Key, SmartKey Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ......... 171Replacing

Key .................................................. 72Replacing bulbs ................................. 271Reporting safety defects .................... 22Research Octane Number

see RON Reserve fuel

Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 249Warninglamp .................................. 31, 32, 262

Index 13


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 13

Reset button ................................ 30, 112Restraint systems

see Occupant safety Retractable hardtop .......................... 155

Locking .......................................... 157Luggage cover ............................... 158Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 241Sunshade ....................................... 160Wind screen ................................... 157

Rims ........................................... 206, 299Roadside Assistance ................... 20, 169Roll bar ................................................. 51

Lowering .......................................... 51Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 240Raising ............................................. 51Warning lamp ................................. 258

RON (Research Octane Number) ..... 307Roof

see Retractable hardtop Rubber parts, cleaning ...................... 220Run-flat tires

see MOExtended tires

SSafety

Driving safety systems ..................... 54Occupant safety ............................... 38Reporting defects ............................ 22

Safety beltssee Seat belts

Seat belt force limiter ......................... 49Seat belts ............................................. 46

Automatic comfort-fit feature .......... 49Children in the vehicle ..................... 51Cleaning ......................................... 220Fastening ......................................... 48Proper use of ................................... 47Safety guidelines ............................. 40Safety notes ..................................... 46Telltale .................................... 31, 32, 48, 256

Seat heating ......................................... 83Seating capacity ................................ 194Seats ..................................................... 80

Adjustment ...................................... 80

Easy-entry/exit feature .................... 85Heating ............................................ 83Memory function .............................. 88Multicontour seat ............................ 82Ventilation ....................................... 82

Selective settingsee Key, SmartKey

Selector leversee Gear selector lever

Self-test OCS (Occupant ClassificationSystem) ........................................... 45Tele Aid .......................................... 167

Servicesee Maintenance

Service, parts .................................... 294Service and warranty information ..... 19Service intervals

see Maintenance System, Serviceindicator message

Service life (tires) .............................. 198Settings

Factory setting (KEYLESS-GO) ......... 71Factory setting (SmartKey) .............. 69Memory function .............................. 88Menu ............................................. 121Selective setting (KEYLESS-GO) ....... 71Selective setting (SmartKey) ............ 69

Side marker lamps Cleaning lenses ............................. 218Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 250

Sidewall (tires) .................................. 207Side windows

see Power windows SmartKey

see Key, SmartKey SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO

see Key, SmartKey Snow chains ...................................... 208Snow tires

see Winter tires Spare wheel ....................................... 299

Mounting ....................................... 277Storage location ............................ 225

Speedometer ..................................... 135

14 Index


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 14

Speed settings Cruise control ................................ 131Distronic ........................................ 137Resume function ................... 132, 138

SRS Indicator lamp ............................ 31, 32

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Indicator lamp ......................... 38, 257Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 240

Standing water, driving through ...... 212Starter switch positions

KEYLESS-GO .................................... 79SmartKey ......................................... 78

Starting difficulties (engine) .............. 99Starting the engine ............................. 98Steering column

see Multifunction steering wheel,Adjustment

Steering wheelsee Multifunction steering wheel

Steering wheel gearshift control ..... 108Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services . . . 172Storage compartments ..................... 161Storing tires ....................................... 198Sunshade ........................................... 160Sun visors .......................................... 165

TTachometer ........................................ 113

Overspeed range ........................... 113Tail lamps

Cleaning lenses ............................. 218Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 252

Tar stains ........................................... 216Technical data

Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 306Brake fluid ..................................... 306Capacities fuels, coolants,lubricants etc. ................................ 303Coolant .......................................... 307Engine oil additives ........................ 306Engine oils ..................................... 305Fuel requirements .......................... 307Gasoline additives .......................... 307Identification labels ....................... 294

Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 306Rims and tires ................................ 299Spare wheel ................................... 303Vehicle specification SL 550 ......... 296Vehicle specification SL 600 ......... 296Vehicle specification SL 63 AMG ... 297Vehicle specification SL 65 AMG ... 298Washer and headlamp cleaningsystem ................................... 305, 309

Technical data (dimensions)see Vehicle specification

Technical data (electrical system)see Vehicle specification

Technical data (engine)see Vehicle specification

Technical data (weights)see Vehicle specification

Tele Aid ............................................... 167Emergency calls ............................. 168Information button ......................... 170Initiating an emergency callmanually ........................................ 168Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 240Remote door unlock ...................... 171Roadside Assistance button .......... 169Search & Send ............................... 171SOS button .................................... 168Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services . . 172System self-test ............................. 167

Telephone ............................................. 27Answering/ending a call ................ 129Hands-free microphone ................... 35Menu ............................................. 129Operation ....................................... 129Phone book .................................... 130Redialing ........................................ 130

Temperature Coolant .......................................... 112Interior temperature ...................... 151Outside .......................................... 116

Tightening torque Wheels ........................................... 282

TIN (Tire Identification Number) ...... 207Tire and Loading Informationplacard ............................................... 193Tire and loading terminology ........... 205

Index 15


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 15

Tire Identification Numbersee TIN

Tire inflation pressure Checking ........................................ 189Important notes on ........................ 188Label on the inside of fuel fillerflap ................................................ 188Placard on driver’s door B-pillar ..... 193

Tire labeling ....................................... 200Tire load rating .................................. 206Tire ply composition and materialused .................................................... 207Tires ........................................... 186, 299

Advanced Tire PressureMonitoring System (AdvancedTPMS) ............................................ 190Air pressure ................................... 187Care and maintenance ................... 197Cleaning ......................................... 198Direction of rotation, spinning ....... 197Important notes on tire inflationpressure ........................................ 188Inflation pressure ........................... 189Information placard ....................... 193Inspection ...................................... 198Labeling ......................................... 200Load index ............................. 201, 206Load rating .................................... 206Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ................................... 234, 253MOExtended .................................. 300Ply composition and materialused ............................................... 207Problems under-/overinflation ...... 189Retreads ........................................ 186Rims and tires (technical data) ...... 299Rotation ......................................... 200Service life ..................................... 198Sizes .............................................. 299Snow chains .................................. 208Speed rating .......................... 202, 207Storing ........................................... 198Temperature .......................... 188, 200Terminology ................................... 205Tire Identification Number ............. 207TPMS low tire pressure/malfunction

telltale .......................................... 31, 32, 265Traction ................................. 199, 207Tread ............................................. 207Tread depth ........................... 198, 207Treadwear ...................................... 199Treadwear indicators ............. 198, 207Vehicle maximum load on .............. 207Wear pattern .................................. 200Winter tires ............................ 207, 299

Tire speed rating ....................... 202, 207Total load limit ................................... 207Tow-away alarm .................................. 64Towing

Towing eye bolt .............................. 288Vehicle ........................................... 287

Towing eye bolt ................................. 288Traction ...................................... 199, 207Transmission

see Automatic transmission Transmission fluid level .................... 184Transmission gear selector lever

see Gear selector lever Transmission positions .................... 104Traveling abroad ............................... 212Tread (tires) ....................................... 207Tread depth (tires) .................... 198, 207Treadwear .......................................... 199Treadwear indicators (tires) . . . . 198, 207Trip computer menu ......................... 128Trip odometer, resetting ................... 113Trunk

Closing ............................................. 75Load assist .................................... 164Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 241Opening ........................................... 73Opening/closing system ........... 74, 76Trunk lid emergency release ............ 77Unlocking manually ....................... 268Valet locking .................................... 77

Turning off the engine ...................... 102Turn signals ......................................... 92

Cleaning lenses ............................. 218Indicator lamps ................................ 30

16 Index


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 16

Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 253Replacing bulbs ............................. 272

UUniform Tire Quality GradingStandards .................................. 199, 207Units

Selecting digital speedometerdisplay mode ................................. 123Selecting speedometer/odometer display mode ................. 123

Unleaded gasoline, premium ........... 306Unlocking the vehicle

KEYLESS-GO .................................... 69Manually ........................................ 267SmartKey ......................................... 68

Upholstery, cleaning ......................... 221Useful features .................................. 164

VValet locking ........................................ 77Vehicle

Battery ........................................... 283Care ............................................... 215Control system .............................. 113Identification Number (VIN) ........... 294Locking/unlocking ........................... 68Lowering (wheel change) ............... 282Modifications and alterations,Operating safety .............................. 21Towing ........................................... 287Unlocking/locking manually .......... 267

Vehicle dimensionssee Vehicle specification

Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) ................................................... 294Vehicle jack

see Jack Vehicle lighting .................................... 89Vehicle loading

Load limit ....................................... 195Terminology ................................... 205

Vehicle maximum load on the tire ... 207

Vehicle specification SL 550 ........................................... 296SL 600 ........................................... 296SL 63 AMG .................................... 297SL 65 AMG .................................... 298

Vehicle status message memory . . . . 120Vehicle tool kit .................................. 224Vehicle washing

see Vehicle care Vehicle weights

see Vehicle specification

WWarning lamps

see Lamps, Indicator and warning Warning sounds

Distance warning function ............. 140Distronic ........................................ 135Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt ..... 48Parking brake ................................ 239Parktronic system .......................... 147Seat belt telltale ............................ 256

Warranty coverage ............................ 294Washer and headlamp cleaningsystem ................................................ 309Washer fluid

Messages in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 243Mixing ratio .................................... 309Refilling .......................................... 185

Washing the vehicle .......................... 215Wear pattern (tires) .......................... 200Weights (vehicle)

see Vehicle specification Wheel

Changing ....................................... 276Removing ....................................... 279Spare ............................................. 276Tightening torque ........................... 282

Wheels, sizes ..................................... 299Wheels, Tires and .............................. 186Windows

see Power windows Windows, cleaning ............................ 219Wind screen ....................................... 157

Index 17


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 17

Windshield Cleaning wiper blades .................... 219Defogging ...................................... 153Washer fluid ................................... 309Wipers ............................................. 95

Windshield wipers Replacing wiper blades .................. 275

Winter driving Instructions .................................... 208Snow chains .................................. 208Tires ............................................... 207

Winter tires ................................ 207, 299Wood trims, cleaning ........................ 221

18 Index


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 18

Product Information

Please observe the following in your own bestinterest:We recommend using Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion parts andaccessories explicitly approved by us for yourvehicle model.We have tested these parts to determine theirreliability, safety and special suitability forMercedes-Benz vehicles.We are unable to make an assessment forother products and therefore cannot be heldresponsible for them, even if in individualcases an official approval or authorization bygovernmental or other agencies should exist.Use of such parts and accessories couldadversely affect the safety, performance orreliability of your vehicle. Please do not usethem.Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre-approved conversion parts and accessoriesare available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. In addition, you will receivecomprehensive information on permissibletechnical modifications and expertinstallations.

Operator’s Manual

NotesThis Operator’s Manual contains a great dealof useful information. We urge you to read itcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving.For your own safety and longer service life ofthe vehicle, we urge you to follow theinstructions and warnings contained in thisOperator’s Manual. Ignoring them couldresult in damage to the vehicle or personalinjury to you or others. Vehicle damagecaused by failure to follow instructions is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

We continuously strive to improve ourproduct and ask for your understanding thatwe reserve the right to make changes indesign and equipment. Therefore,information, illustrations, and descriptions inthis Operator’s Manual might differ from yourvehicle.

Vehicle equipmentYour vehicle may have some or all of theequipment described in this manual.Therefore, you may find explanations foroptional equipment not installed in yourvehicle. If you have any questions aboutoperating particular equipment, anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be gladto demonstrate the proper procedures.Optional equipment is also described in thismanual, including operating instructionswherever necessary. Since they are special-order items, the descriptions and illustrationsherein may vary slightly from the actualequipment of your vehicle.If there are any equipment details that are notshown or described in this Operator’sManual, any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter will be glad to inform you of correctcare and operating procedures. TheOperator’s Manual and Maintenance Bookletare important documents and should be keptwith the vehicle.

Service and warranty informationThe Service and Warranty Informationbooklet contains detailed information aboutthe warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,including:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,

Introduction 19


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 19

Z

Rhode Island, and Vermont EmissionControl System WarrantyRState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon

Laws)

Important notice for California retail buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobiles

Under California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after areasonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or itsauthorized repair or service facilities fail to fixone or more substantial defects ormalfunctions in the vehicle that are coveredby its express warranty. During the period of18 months from original delivery of thevehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometerof the vehicle, whichever occurs first, areasonable number of repair attempts ispresumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one ormore of the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or

malfunction results in a condition that islikely to cause death or serious bodilyinjury if the vehicle is driven, that defector malfunction has been subject to repairtwo or more times, and you have directlynotified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC inwriting of the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect ormalfunction of a less serious nature thancategory (1) has been subject to repairfour or more times and you have directlynotified us in writing of the need for itsrepair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Written notification should not be sent to adealer, it should be addressed to

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Maintenance Booklet describes all thenecessary maintenance work which shouldbe performed at regular intervals.Always have the Maintenance Booklet withyou when you take the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center forservice. The service advisor will record eachservice in the booklet for you.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram provides factory-trained technicalhelp in the event of a breakdown. Calls to thetoll-free Roadside Assistance number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (in the USA) 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)will be answered by Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Representatives24 hours a day, 365 days a year.For additional information refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram brochure (in the USA) or theRoadside Assistance section of the Serviceand Warranty Information Booklet (inCanada) in your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or ownershipIf you change your address, be sure to sendin the “Change of Address Notice” found inthe Service and Warranty InformationBooklet, or simply call the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center (in the USA) at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372), orCustomer Service (in Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in

20 Introduction


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 20

contacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave allliterature with the vehicle to make it availableto the next operator.If you bought this vehicle used, be sure tosend in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car”found in the Service and WarrantyInformation Booklet, or call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in theUSA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (inCanada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Operating your vehicle outside the USA or Canada

If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:RService facilities or replacement parts may

not be readily available.RUnleaded gasoline for vehicles with

catalytic converters may not be available;the use of leaded fuels will damage thecatalysts.RGasoline may have a considerably lower

octane rating, and improper fuel can causeengine damage.

Certain Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe under our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to:In the USA:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In Canada:Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

G Warning!Work improperly carried out on electroniccomponents and associated software couldcause them to cease functioning. Because thevehicle’s electronic components areinterconnected, any modifications made mayproduce an undesired effect on othersystems. Electronic malfunctions couldseriously impair the operating safety of yourvehicle.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor repairs or modifications to electroniccomponents.Other improper work or modifications on thevehicle could also have a negative impact onthe operating safety of the vehicle.Some safety systems only function while theengine is running. You should therefore neverturn off the engine while driving.

G Warning!Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody ortires/wheels may cause serious damage andimpair the operating safety of your vehicle.Such blows can be caused, for example, byrunning over an obstacle, road debris or apothole. If you feel a sudden significantvibration or ride disturbance, or you suspectthat damage to your vehicle as occurred:Rturn on your hazard warning flashersRslow down carefullyRdrive with caution to an area which is a safe

distance from the road

Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicleappears unsafe, have it towed to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or otherqualified maintenance or repair facility forfurther inspection or repairs.

Introduction 21


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 21

Z

Proper use of the vehicleProper use of the vehicle requires that you arefamiliar with the following information andrules:Rthe safety precautions in this manualRthe “Technical data” section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRmotor vehicle laws and safety standards

G Warning!Various warning labels are attached to yourvehicle. These warning labels are intended tomake you and others aware of various risks.Do not remove any of these warning labelsunless explicitly instructed to do so byinformation on the label itself. Removingwarning labels may cause you and others tobe unaware of certain risks which may resultin an accident and/or personal injury.

Problems with your vehicle

If you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you tocontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand corrected if required. If the matter is nothandled to your satisfaction, please discussthe problem with the Mercedes-Benz Centermanagement or, if necessary, contact us atone of the following addresses:In the USA:Customer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In Canada:Customer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defects

For the USA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966”.

Reporting safety defectsIf you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go towww.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromwww.safercar.gov.

Vehicle data recording

Information regarding electronic recording devices

(Including notice pursuant to California Code§ 9951)Please note that your vehicle is equipped withdevices that can record vehicle systems dataand, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, maytransmit some data in certain accidents.

22 Introduction


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 22

This information helps, for example, todiagnose vehicle systems after a collision andto continuously improve vehicle safety.Daimler may access the information andshare it with othersRfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis

purposesRwith the consent of the vehicle owner or

lesseeRin response to an official request by law

enforcement or other government agencyRfor use in dispute resolution involving

Daimler, its affiliates or sales/serviceorganization and/orRas otherwise required or permitted by lawPlease check the Tele Aid subscriptionservice agreement for details regarding theinformation that may be recorded ortransmitted via that system.

Introduction 23


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 23

Z

24


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 24

Exterior view ....................................... 26Multifunction steering wheel ............. 27Cockpit ................................................. 28Instrument cluster .............................. 30Center console .................................... 33Overhead control panel ...................... 35Door control panel .............................. 35

25

At a

gla

nce


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 25

Exterior view

i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially availablefor your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle might not beequipped with all features described in this manual.

Function Page

: Trunk:Locking and unlocking 68Opening and closing 73,

75Valet locking 77

; Rear window defroster 155

= Fuel filler flap 178

? Doors:Locking and unlocking 68,

267

A Exterior rear view mirrors 86

B Retractable hardtop 155

C Windshield:Wiping with washer fluid 96Cleaning 219

D Wipers 95

Function PageWiper blades, replacing 275Wiper blades, cleaning 219

E Hood 180

F Front lamps 271

G Headlamp cleaning system 93

H Front towing eye 288

I Tires and wheels 186Rims and tires 299

J Rear lamps 271

K Rear towing eye 288

26 Exterior viewAt

a g

lanc

e


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 26

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Left multifunction display 114

; Right multifunction display 114

= Press button ~:to end a call 129to reject an incoming call 129Press button 6:to answer a call 129to dial1 129to redial1 129Press button W or X:to select submenus in theSettings menu 122to set valuesto operate the RACETIMER2 117to set the volume

? Press button V or Uto select next/previousmenu. 113

Function PagePress button & or *briefly:to move within a menuto select previous or nexttrack, scene or storedstation within Audio/DVDmenu 119to switch to the phone bookand select a name ornumber within Telephonemenu 129Press and hold button& or *:to select previous or nexttrack with quick search orto select previous or nextstation in station list orwave band within Audio/DVD menu 119to start the quick search inthe phone book withinTelephone menu 129

1 Function only available in telephone menu.2 AMG vehicles only.

Multifunction steering wheel 27

At a

gla

nce


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 27

Z

Cockpit

Function Page

: Exterior lamp switch 89

; Headlamp cleaning button 93

= Cruise control lever:Cruise control 131Distronic 136

? Left steering wheelgearshift control 108

A Instrument cluster 30,111

B Multifunction steeringwheel

27,113

C Right steering wheelgearshift control 108

D Lever for Voice ControlSystem3

E Front Parktronic warningindicators 146

F Digital clock

Function Page

G Storage compartments(locking/unlocking) 161

H Overhead control panel 35

I Glove box 161

J Center console 33

K Starter switch 78

L Horn

M Steering wheel adjustment 85

N Combination switch:Turn signals 92Wipers 95High beam 92

O Parking brake pedal 102

P On-board diagnostics(OBD) socket

Q Hood lock release 180

3 See separate operating instructions.

28 CockpitAt

a g

lanc

e


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 28

Function Page

R Parking brake release 102

S Door control panel 35

Cockpit 29

At a

gla

nce


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 29

Z

Instrument cluster

Function Page

: Coolant temperature gauge 112? Coolant temperaturewarning lamp 263

; Speedometer with:# Left turn signalindicator lamp J Brake warning lamp,Canada only 255÷ ABS/ESP® warninglamp (Version 1)4 258d ABS/ESP® warninglamp (Version 2)4 260Ò Distronic indicatorlamp (white) or distancewarning lamp (red)5

135,262

$ Brake warning lamp,USA only 255! Right turn signalindicator lamp

Function Page

= Left multifunction displaywith:Outside temperatureindicator or digitalspeedometer (dependingon selected setting in thecontrol system)

116,122

Main odometer 114Set speed for cruise controlor Distronic

130,136

? Reset button for: Trip odometer 113Settings 121Adjusting instrumentcluster illumination 112

4 Depending on vehicle production date.5 Vehicles without Distronic: Warning/indicator lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is

switched on. It should go out when the engine is running.

30 Instrument clusterAt

a g

lanc

e


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 30

Version 1 (depending on vehicle production date)

Function Page

A Tachometer with:K High-beam headlampindicator lamp 92; Engine malfunctionindicator lamp 2637 Seat belt telltale 48,

256I Roll bar warning lamp 258! Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) indicatorlamp

55,255

+ SupplementalRestraint System (SRS)indicator lamp

38,257

å ESP® OFF warninglamp 258h Combination low tirepressure/TPMSmalfunction telltale, USAonly

190,265

Function Pageh Low tire pressuretelltale, Canada only

190,265

SPORT handlingmode warning lamp,SL 63 AMG only

58,258

B Right multifunction displaywith:Trip odometer 113Transmission positionindicator 104Gear range indicator 106Transmission programmode indicator 106

C Fuel gauge with:8 Fuel tank reservewarning lamp (the arrowindicates that the fuel fillerflap is on the right-handside) 262

Instrument cluster 31

At a

gla

nce


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 31

Z

Version 2 (depending on vehicle production date)

Function Page

A Tachometer with:K High-beam headlampindicator lamp 92; Engine malfunctionindicator lamp, Canada only 2637 Seat belt telltale 48,

256I Roll bar warning lamp 258! Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) indicatorlamp

55,255

+ SupplementalRestraint System (SRS)indicator lamp

38,257

= Engine malfunctionindicator lamp, USA only 263h Combination low tirepressure/TPMSmalfunction telltale, USAonly

190,265

h Low tire pressuretelltale, Canada only

190,265

Function Page% ESP® OFF warninglamp, SL 63 AMG only

58,261

B Right multifunction displaywith:Trip odometer 113Transmission positionindicator 104Gear range indicator 106Transmission programmode indicator 106

C Fuel gauge with:8 Fuel tank reservewarning lamp (the arrowindicates that the fuel fillerflap is on the right-handside) 262

32 Instrument clusterAt

a g

lanc

e


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 32

Center console

Upper part

Function Page

: Central locking switch 73Alarm system indicatorlamp 63

; Hazard warning flasherswitch 92

= Central unlocking switch 73

? Passenger front air bag offindicator lamp

43,266

A Center and side air ventadjustment 151

B COMAND system, seeseparate operatinginstructions

C Cup holder 164

D KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton 79

E Automatic climate controlpanel 148

Function Page

F Ashtray 166Cigarette lighter 166

G Cup holder 164

Center console 33

At a

gla

nce


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 33

Z

Lower part

Function Page

: Gear selector lever 103

; Parktronic systemdeactivation switch 147

= Exterior rear view mirroradjustment 86

? ABC suspension tuningbutton 143

A Tow-away alarm switch 64

B Power-folding exterior rearview mirrors, Canada only 88

C Retractable hardtop switch 155Roll bar buttons 51

D ABC vehicle level controlbutton 142

E Electronic StabilityProgram (ESP®) switch6 56

Function Page

F Thumbwheel for settingfollowing distance forDistronic6

133,138

G Distance warning functionswitch6

133,141

H Program mode selectorswitch6 106

6 Layout in SL 63 AMG differs.

34 Center consoleAt

a g

lanc

e


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 34

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: Left reading lamp switch 94

; Temperature sensor forautomatic climate control

= Right reading lamp switch 94

? Automatic interior lightingcontrol 94

A Interior rear view mirror 86

B Reading lamp 94

C Garage door opener 172

D SOS button (Tele Aidsystem) 168

E Hands-free microphone forTele Aid (emergency callsystem) and telephone 167

Door control panel

Function Page

: Inside door handle 72

; Power window switch 96

= Memory function 88

? AIRSCARF switch 84

A Seat heating switch 83Seat ventilation switch 82

B Seat adjustment switch 81

C Remote trunk openingswitch 74Remote trunk opening/closing switch

74,75

Door control panel 35

At a

gla

nce


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 35

Z

36


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 36

Vehicle equipment .............................. 38Occupant safety .................................. 38Panic alarm .......................................... 54Driving safety systems ....................... 54Anti-theft systems .............................. 63

37

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 37

Vehicle equipment

i This Operator’s Manual describes allfeatures, standard or optional, potentiallyavailable for your vehicle at the time ofpurchase. Please be aware that yourvehicle might not be equipped with allfeatures described in this manual.

Occupant safety

IntroductionIn this section you will learn the mostimportant facts about the restraint systemcomponents of the vehicle.The restraint systems are:RSeat beltsRChild restraintsAdditional protection potential is provided by:RSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with

- Air bags- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors)- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for

seat belts- Seat belt force limiter

RRoll barRAir bag system components with

- Passenger front air bag off indicator lamp- Passenger seat with Occupant

Classification System (OCS)

Although the systems are independent, theirprotective functions work in conjunction witheach other.

G Warning!Modifications to or work improperlyconducted on restraint system componentsor their wiring, as well as tampering withinterconnected electronic systems, can leadto the restraint systems no longer functioningas intended.

Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs), for example, could deployinadvertently or fail to deploy in accidentsalthough the deceleration threshold for airbag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,never modify the restraint systems. Do nottamper with electronic components or theirsoftware.

i See “Children in the vehicle”(Y page 51) for information onRinfants and children traveling with you in

the vehicleRrestraint systems for infants and children

SRS indicator lampThe SRS system conducts a self-test whenthe ignition is switched on and in regularintervals while the engine is running. Thisfacilitates detection of system malfunctions.The SRS indicator lamp + in theinstrument cluster comes on when theignition is switched on. It goes out no laterthan a few seconds after the engine has beenstarted.The SRS components are in operationalreadiness when the SRS indicator lamp+ is not lit while the engine is running.

G Warning!The SRS self-check has detected amalfunction when the SRS indicator lamp+

Rdoes not come on at allRfails to go out after approximately

4 seconds after the engine was startedRcomes on after the engine was started or

while driving

For your safety, we strongly recommend thatyou contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter immediately to have the systemchecked. Otherwise the SRS may not beactivated when needed in an accident, which

38 Occupant safetySa

fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 38

could result in serious or fatal injury. The SRSmight also deploy unexpectedly andunnecessarily which could also result in injuryas well.In addition, improper work on the SRS createsa risk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment. Workon the SRS must therefore only be performedby qualified technicians. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If it is necessary to modify an air bag systemto accommodate a person with disabilities,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.USA only: Call our Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) for details.

Air bags

G Warning!Air bags are designed to reduce the potentialof injury and fatality in certainRfrontal impacts (front air bags and driver’s

side knee bag)Rside impacts (head-thorax air bags)

However, no system available today cancompletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.Deployment of the air bags temporarilyreleases a small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust, however, is neither harmfulto your health, nor does it indicate a fire in thevehicle. The dust might cause sometemporary breathing difficulty for people withasthma or other breathing trouble. To avoidthis, you may wish to get out of the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so. If you have anybreathing difficulty but cannot get out of thevehicle after the air bag inflates, then get freshair by opening a window or door.

G Warning!To reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags inflate, it is very important for the driver

and passenger to always be in a properlyseated position and to wear their seat belts.For maximum protection in the event of acollision always be in normal seated positionwith your back against the seat backrest.Fasten your seat belt and make sure it isproperly positioned on your body.Since the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag as itinflates with great force instantaneously:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a

position that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RMove the driver’s seat as far back as

possible, still permitting proper operationof vehicle controls. The distance from thecenter of the driver’s chest to the center ofthe air bag cover on the steering wheelmust be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.You should be able to accomplish this byadjusting the seat and steering wheel. Ifyou have any difficulties, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.RDo not lean your head or chest close to the

steering wheel or dashboard.RKeep hands on the outside of the steering

wheel rim. Placing hands and arms insidethe rim can increase the risk and potentialseverity of hand/arm injury when the driverfront air bag inflates.RAdjust the passenger seat as far as possible

rearward from the dashboard when theseat is occupied.ROccupants, especially children, should

never place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door where the head-thorax air bag inflates. This could result inserious injuries or death should the head-

Occupant safety 39

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 39

Z

thorax air bag be deployed. Always sit asupright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sizedinfant restraint, toddler restraint, orbooster seat recommended for the size andweight of the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safetyinformation. Be sure to give the buyer thisOperator’s Manual.

G Warning!There is a possibility of a head-thorax air bag-related injury if occupants, especiallychildren, are not properly seated or restrainedwhen next to a head-thorax air bag whichneeds to deploy rapidly in a side impact inorder to do its job.To help avoid the possibility of injury, pleasefollow these guidelines:

(1) Occupants, especially children,should never place their bodies orlean their heads in the area of thedoor where the head-thorax airbag inflates. This could result inserious injuries or death shouldthe head-thorax air bag bedeployed.

(2) Always sit as upright as possible,wear the seat belt properly, and forchildren 12 years old and under,use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, orbooster seat recommended for thesize and weight of the child.

(3) Always wear seat belts properly.

If you believe that, even with the use of theseguidelines, it would be safer for yourpassenger seat occupants to have thepassenger side head-thorax air bagdeactivated, then deactivation can be carriedout upon your written request at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at anadditional cost.Please contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call the Customer AssistanceCenter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (inCanada) at 1-800-387-0100 for details.

Air bags are designed to deploy only in certainfrontal impacts (front air bags and driver’sside knee bag) and in side impacts (head-thorax air bags) if the system determines theneed for air bag deployment. Only in the eventof such a situation will they provide theirsupplemental protection.The driver and passenger should always weartheir seat belts. Otherwise it is not possiblefor the air bags to provide their supplementalprotection.In case of other types of impacts and impactsbelow air bag deployment thresholds, airbags will not deploy. The driver and passengerwill then be protected to the extent possibleby a properly fastened seat belt. A properlyfastened seat belt is also needed to providethe best possible protection in a rollover.Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.Always wear your seat belt, regardless ofwhether or not your vehicle is equipped withair bags.It is important to your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags will continue to provide supplementalcrash protection for occupants.

Safety guidelines for the seat belt, Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) and air bag

G Warning!RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have

been subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat belts


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 40

installed or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency

Tensioning Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material, which may requirespecial handling and regard for theenvironment. Check with your localgovernment’s disposal guidelines.California residents, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function

on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.

They could tear.RDo not make any modification that could

change the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may

severely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.RNo modifications of any kind may be made

to any components or wiring of the SRS.RDo no change or remove any component or

part of the SRS.RDo not install additional trim material, seat

covers, badges, etc. over the steeringwheel hub, passenger front air bag cover,outboard sides of the seat backrests, doortrim panels, or door frame trims.RDo not install additional electrical/

electronic equipment on or near SRScomponents and wiring.RKeep area between air bags and occupants

free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,umbrellas, etc.).RAir bag system components will be hot after

an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.

RImproper repair work on the SRS creates arisk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only beperformed by qualified technicians.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RFor your protection and the protection of

others, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must befollowed. These instructions are availablefrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,

required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentially more seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, we stronglyrecommend that you inform the subsequentowner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS.Also refer them to the applicable section inthe Operator’s Manual.

Front air bags

G Observe Safety notes, see page 39.

Driver’s front air bag : and passenger frontair bag ; are designed to provide increasedprotection for the driver and passengeragainst the risk of injuries to the head andthorax.

Occupant safety 41

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 41

Z

Driver and passenger front air bag anddriver’s side knee bag are deployedRin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the system determines that air bag

deployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRdepending on whether the respective seat

belt is in useRindependently of the head-thorax air bagsThe front air bags in this vehicle have beendesigned to inflate in two stages. This allowsthe air bags to have different rates of inflation.The rate of inflation is based on the vehicledeceleration rate as assessed by the air bagcontrol unit.The passenger front air bag deployment isadditionally influenced by the passenger’sweight category as identified by the OccupantClassification System (OCS) (Y page 43).The lighter the passenger-side occupant, thehigher the vehicle deceleration rate requiredfor second stage inflation of the passengerfront air bag.The air bags will not deploy in impacts whichdo not exceed the system’s presetdeployment thresholds. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belts.The front air bags will not deploy in the eventof a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate oflongitudinal deceleration or accelerationexceeds the preset deployment threshold forthe front air bags.The passenger air bag will only be deployed ifRthe system, based on OCS weight sensor

readings, detects that the passenger seatis occupiedRthe 45 indicator lamp in the center

console is not lit (Y page 43)Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment

threshold

Knee bag Knee bag = is designed to provide increasedprotection for the driver against the risk ofinjuries to the knees, thighs and lower legs.Knee bag = is located on the driver sidelower instrument panel. It is designed tooperate together with the driver front air bagin certain frontal impacts if the systemdetermines that air bag deployment can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt. Knee bag = operates best inconjunction with a properly positioned andfastened seat belt.

Head-thorax air bags


Head-thorax air bags : are designed toprovide increased protection for the head andthorax but not for the arms.Head-thorax air bags : are deployedRon the impacted side of the vehicleRin instances with a high rate of lateral

vehicle deceleration or accelerationRif the system determines that air bag

deployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRdepending on whether the seat belt is in

useRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsThe passenger head-thorax air bag : willonly deploy if the OCS senses that the


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 42

passenger seat is occupied and the impactexceeds a preset deployment threshold.Head-thorax air bags : are not deployed inside impacts which do not exceed thesystem’s deployment threshold.

Occupant Classification SystemThe Occupant Classification System (OCS)activates or deactivates the passenger frontair bag automatically. The respective statusis based on the classified occupant weightcategory determined by weight sensorreadings from the passenger seat.The system does not deactivate thepassenger head-thorax air bag and theEmergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs).To be classified correctly, the passenger mustsitRwith the seat belt properly fastenedRin a position that is as upright as possible

with the back against the seat backrestRwith the feet on the floorIf the occupant’s weight is transferred toanother object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaningon armrests), the OCS may not be able toproperly approximate the occupant’s weightcategory.If your seat, including the trim cover andcushion, needs to be serviced in any way, takethe vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.Only seat accessories approved byMercedes-Benz may be used.Both the driver and the passenger shouldalways use the 45 indicator lamp asan indication of whether or not the passengeris properly positioned.

G Warning!If the 45 indicator lamp illuminateswhen an adult or someone larger than a smallindividual is in the passenger seat, have thepassenger reposition himself or herself in the

seat until the 45 indicator lamp goesout.In the event of a collision, the air bag controlunit will not allow passenger front air bagdeployment when the OCS has classified thepassenger seat occupant as weighting asmuch as or less than a typical 12-month-oldchild in a standard child restraint or if thepassenger seat is classified as being empty.When the OCS senses that the passenger seatoccupant is classified as being up to or lessthan the weight of a typical 12-month-oldchild in a standard child restraint, the45 indicator lamp will illuminate whenthe engine is started and remain illuminated,indicating that the passenger front air bag isdeactivated.When the OCS senses that the passenger seatis classified as being empty, the 45indicator lamp will illuminate when the engineis started and remain illuminated, indicatingthat the passenger front air bag isdeactivated.When the OCS senses that the passenger seatoccupant is classified as being heavier thanthe weight of a typical 12-month-old childseated in a standard child restraint or as beinga small individual (such as a young teenageror a small adult), the 45 indicator lampwill illuminate for approximately 6 secondswhen the engine is started and then,depending on occupant weight sensorreadings from the seat, remain illuminated orgo out. With the 45 indicator lampilluminated, the passenger front air bag isdeactivated. With the 45 indicatorlamp out, the passenger front air bag isactivated.When the OCS senses that the passenger seatoccupant is classified as an adult or someonelarger than a small individual, the 45indicator lamp will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds when the engine isstarted and then goes out, indicating that thepassenger front air bag is activated.

Occupant safety 43

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 43

Z

If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,the passenger front air bag is deactivated andwill not be deployed.If the 45 indicator lamp is notilluminated, the passenger front air bag isactivated and will be deployedRin the event of certain frontal impactsRif impact exceeds a preset deployment

thresholdRindependently of the head-thorax air bag

If the passenger front air bag is deployed, therate of inflation will be influenced byRthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as

assessed by the air bag control unitRthe passenger’s weight category as

identified by the OCS

For more information on air bag displaymessages in the multifunction display, see(Y page 229).

G Warning!Children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle’s seat belt fully inaccordance with the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag

technology designed to deactivate thepassenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of a

typical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

passenger seat will be seriously injured oreven killed if the passenger front air baginflates in a collision which could occurunder some circumstances, even with theair bag technology installed in your vehicle.RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on

the passenger seat, make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the passenger front air bagis deactivated. Should the 45indicator lamp not illuminate or go out whilethe restraint is installed, please checkinstallation. Periodically check the45 indicator lamp while driving tomake sure the 45 indicator lamp isilluminated. If the 45 indicator lampgoes out or remains out, do not transport achild on the passenger seat until thesystem has been repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thepassenger seat will be seriously injured oreven killed if the passenger front air baginflates.RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child

restraint on the passenger seat, move theseat as far back as possible, use the properchild restraint recommended for the age,size and weight of the child, and securechild restraint with the vehicle’s seat beltaccording to the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions. For children larger than thetypical 12-month-old child, the passengerfront air bag may or may not be activated.

Deployment of the driver front air bag doesnot mean that the passenger front air bag alsoshould have deployed.The OCS may have determinedRthat the seat was empty or occupied by the

weight up to or less than that of a typical12-month-old child seated in a standard


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 44

child restraint – both of which are instanceswhere the system suppresses deploymentof the passenger front air bag even thoughthe impact met the criteria and was ofsufficient severity to deploy the driver frontair bagRthat the seat was occupied by a small

individual (such as a young teenager or asmall adult) or a child who weighs morethan the weight of a typical 12-month-oldchild in a standard child restraint – both ofwhich are instances where the system maysuppress deployment of the passengerfront air bag even though the impact metthe criteria and was of sufficient severity todeploy the driver front air bag

45 indicator lamp : will beilluminated, except with the SmartKeyremoved from the starter switch or with thestarter switch in position 0.

G Warning!If the red SRS indicator lamp + in theinstrument cluster and the 45indicator lamp are lit at the same time, thereis a malfunction in the OCS. The passengerfront air bag will be deactivated in this case.Have the system checked by qualifiedtechnicians as soon as possible. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Only have the seat repaired or replaced at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

In order to ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a

position that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RWhile seated, an occupant should not

position him/herself in such a way as tocause the occupant’s weight to be liftedfrom the seat bottom as this may result inthe OCS being unable to correctlyapproximate the occupant’s weightcategory.RRead and observe all warnings in this

chapter.

OCS Self-test After turning the SmartKey in the starterswitch to position 1 or 2 or pressing theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button once ortwice, the 45 indicator lampilluminates. If an adult occupant is properlysitting on the passenger seat and the systemclassifies the occupant as an adult, the45 indicator lamp will illuminate andgo out after approximately 6 seconds.If the seat is not occupied and the systemclassifies the passenger seat as being empty,the 45 indicator lamp will illuminateand not go out.

G Warning!If the 45 indicator lamp does notilluminate, the system is not functioning. Youmust contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter before seating any child on thepassenger seat.

For more information, see the “Practicalhints” section (Y page 266).

G Warning!Never place anything between seat cushionand child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reducesthe effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom andback of the child seat must make full contact

Occupant safety 45

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 45

Z

with the passenger seat cushion andbackrest.If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passengerseat backrest.An incorrectly mounted child seat could causeinjuries to the child in case of an accident,instead of increasing protection for the child.Follow the manufacturer’s instructions forinstallation of child seats.

Seat belts

Safety notesThe use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in all 50states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.territories and all Canadian provinces.Even where this is not the case, all vehicleoccupants should have their seat beltsfastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.

i See “Children in the vehicle”(Y page 51) for information onRinfants and children traveling with you in

the vehicleRrestraint systems for infants and children

G Warning!Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.Always make sure your passenger is properlyrestrained. You and your passenger shouldalways wear seat belts.Failure to wear and properly fasten andposition your seat belt greatly increases yourrisk of injuries and their likely severity in anaccident.If you are ever in an accident, your injuries canbe considerably more severe without yourseat belt properly buckled. Without your seatbelt buckled, you are much more likely to hitthe interior of the vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can be seriously injured or killed.In the same crash, the possibility of injury ordeath is lessened if you are properly wearing

your seat belt. The air bags can only protectas intended if the occupants are properlywearing their seat belts.

G Warning!Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide underit, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. That could cause seriousor even fatal injuries. The seat backrest andseat belt provide the best restraint when thewearer is in a position that is as upright aspossible and the seat belt is properlypositioned on the body.

G Warning!Never let more people ride in the vehicle thanthere are seat belts available. Make sureeveryone riding in the vehicle is correctlyrestrained with a separate seat belt. Neveruse a seat belt for more than one person at atime.

G Warning!Keep the door storage compartments closedwhile vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so maycause the seat belt to catch at the rear andprevent proper positioning of the seat belt.

G Warning!Damaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accident mustbe replaced. Also, the seat belt anchoringpoints must be checked.Only use seat belts which have been approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Do not make any modifications to the seatbelts. This can lead to unintended activationof the ETDs or to their failure to activate whennecessary.Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 46

Have all work carried out only by qualifiedtechnicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Proper use of seat belts

G Warning!USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only protect when used

properly. Never wear seat belts in any otherway than as described in this section, asthat could result in serious injuries in caseof an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat belt

at all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includesSRS (driver front air bag, driver side kneebag, passenger front air bag, head-thoraxair bags), Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs) and seat belt force limiters.The system is designed to enhance theprotection offered to properly beltedoccupants in certain frontal (front air bags,driver’s side knee bag and ETDs) and side(head-thorax air bags and ETDs) impactswhich exceed preset deploymentthresholds.RNever wear the shoulder belt under your

arm, against your neck or off your shoulder.In a frontal crash, your body would movetoo far forward. That would increase thechance of head and neck injuries. The seatbelt would also apply too much force to theribs or abdomen, which could severelyinjure internal organs such as your liver orspleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder. It should nottouch the neck. Never pass the shoulderportion of the seat belt under your arm.RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on

your hips and not across the abdomen. If

the lap belt is positioned across yourabdomen, it could cause serious injuries ina crash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid or

breakable objects in or on your clothing,such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., asthese might cause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted

snugly. Take special care of this whenwearing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than one

person at a time. Do not fasten a seat beltaround a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a

crash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use a

lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is

as upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to make

sure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant

restraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions.

G Warning!Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. Theycould tear.Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in thedoor or in the seat adjustment mechanism.This could damage the seat belt.

Occupant safety 47

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 47

Z

Never attempt to make modifications to seatbelts. This could impair the effectiveness ofthe seat belts.

Fastening the seat belts

G Warning!Children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in anappropriately sized infant restraint, toddlerrestraint, or booster seat recommended forthe size and weight of the child. For additionalinformation, see section “Children in thevehicle”.A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt outof seat belt housing :.

X Place the shoulder portion of the seat beltacross the top of your shoulder and the lapportion across your hips.

X Push latch plate ; into buckle = until itclicks.

X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to asnug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.

The passenger lap/shoulder belt has aspecial seat belt retractor to secure childrestraints properly. For more information onspecial seat belt retractors, see “Infant andchild restraint systems” (Y page 52).To release the seat belt with seat belt releasebutton ?, see (Y page 48).

Releasing the seat beltsX Press seat belt release button ?

(Y page 48).Allow the retractor to completely rewindthe seat belt by guiding latch plate ;(Y page 48).

! Make sure the seat belt retractscompletely. Otherwise the seat belt and/orlatch plate could get caught or pinched inthe door or in the seat mechanism. This candamage the seat belt and impair itseffectiveness, and/or cause damage to thedoor and/or door trim panel. Such damageis not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.Damaged seat belts must be replaced.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Enhanced seat belt reminder systemWhen the engine is started, the seat belttelltale 7 will always illuminate for6 seconds to remind you and your passengerto fasten your seat belts.If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened whenthe engine is started, an additional warningchime will sound. The warning chime goes outafter approximately 6 seconds or once thedriver’s seat belt is fastened.


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 48

If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or thepassenger’s seat belt (with the passengerseat occupied) is not fastened with bothdoors closed,Rthe seat belt telltale 7 remains

illuminated for as long as either the driver’sor passenger’s seat belt is not fastened.Rand if the vehicle speed once exceeds

15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale7 starts flashing and a warning chimesounds with increasing intensity for amaximum of 60 seconds or until thedriver’s and passenger’s seat belt arefastened.If you and/or your passenger release theseat belt during driving, the seat belttelltale 7 starts flashing and thewarning chime sounds as described before.If the driver’s or the passenger’s seat beltremains unfastened after 60 seconds, thewarning chime stops sounding, the seatbelt telltale 7 stops flashing butcontinues to be illuminated.After a vehicle standstill, the warning chimeis reactivated and the seat belt telltale7 is flashing again if the vehicle speedonce exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).

The seat belt telltale 7 will only go out ifboth the driver’s and the passenger’s seatbelt (with the passenger seat occupied) arefastened, or the vehicle is standing still and adoor is opened.For more information, see “Practical hints”(Y page 256).

Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD), seat belt force limiterThe seat belts are equipped with ETDs andseat belt force limiters.

The ETDs are designed to activate in thefollowing cases:Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding

the system’s preset deployment thresholdRif the restraint systems are operational and

functioning correctly, see “SRS indicatorlamp” (Y page 38)Rin certain vehicle rollovers if the system

determines an additional degree ofprotection

The ETDs will only activate if the seat belts arefastened (latch plate properly inserted intobuckle).In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from theseat belts in such a way that the seat belts fitmore snugly against the body. Seat belt forcelimiters, when activated, are employed tohelp reduce the peak force exerted by theseat belts on occupants during a crash.

i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seatposition or incorrectly worn seat belts.The ETDs do not pull occupants backtoward the seat backrest.

G Warning!Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must bereplaced.For your safety, when disposing of thepyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safetyinstructions. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Automatic comfort-fit feature seat beltThe automatic comfort-fit feature reduces theretracting force of the seat belts when theyare in normal use.

Occupant safety 49

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 49

Z

Correct driver seat adjustment

G Warning!In order to avoid possible loss of vehiclecontrol the following must be done before thevehicle is put into motion:Rseat adjustmentRhead restraint adjustmentRsteering wheel adjustmentRrear view mirror adjustmentRfastening of seat belts

Steering wheel

G Observe Safety notes, see page 84.X Position steering wheel : properly

(Y page 85).Make sure:RYou can reach the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent at the elbows.RYou can move your legs freely.RAll displays (including malfunction and

indicator lamps) on the instrument clusterare clearly visible.

Seat belt

G Observe Safety notes, see page 46.X Fasten and position your seat belt ;

correctly (Y page 48).Make sure:RThe seat belt is always fitted snugly.RAdjust the seat belt so that the shoulder

section is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder.RPlace the lap portion of the seat belt as low

as possible on your hips.

Seat and head restraint

G Observe Safety notes, see page 80.X Position seat = and head restraint

properly. See (Y page 81) for seat andhead restraint adjustment.

Observe the following points:RAlways be in a properly seated position.RThe position should be as far rearward from

the front air bag in the steering wheel aspossible, while still permitting properoperation of vehicle controls.RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating

position that still allows you to reach theaccelerator/brake pedal safely.RThe seat must be adjusted so that you can

correctly fasten and position your seat belt.RThe seat backrest must be in a position that

is as nearly upright as possible.RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front

edge of the seat cushion lightly supportsyour legs.RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as

close to the head as possible and thecenter of the head restraint supports theback of the head at eye level.RNever place hands under the seat or near

any moving parts while the seat is beingadjusted.


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 50

Roll bar

G Warning!This vehicle is a two occupant vehicle. Therear storage area is not equipped to properlyseat or restrain occupants and therefore isnot permitted for use by any persons.Make sure that the roll bar’s path of motion isclear and no persons are injured by themoving roll bar. Raising or lowering of the rollbar could injure someone in it’s proximity.For your own safety, we recommend to drivewith the roll bar raised if the outsidetemperature is below +5‡ (-15†).

! If the outside temperature falls below+5‡ (-15†), the roll bar must be raisedmanually using the buttons provided toavoid damaging the hydraulics.

The roll bar raises automatically in anaccident or in a critical driving situation.

i When the roll bar is raised automatically,you will hear a ratcheting sound.

You can also raise and lower the roll barmanually using the buttons provided.The buttons for the roll bar are on the centerconsole under the retractable hardtop switch.

The roll bar can be moved manually when theignition is switched on.

G Warning!If the yellow roll bar warning lamp I in theinstrument cluster does not go out afterstarting the engine, or if it comes on while

driving, the roll bar system is not operatingproperly and may not activate in an accident.At the same time, the message Raise Roll-over Bar appears in the multifunctiondisplay. In this case, raise the roll barmanually before continuing to drive.For safety reasons, drive only with the roll barraised until the malfunction is repaired. Haveyour vehicle checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Raising: Lift the switch for the retractablehardtop.

X Press and hold button : until the roll baris raised.

X Lowering: Lift the switch for theretractable hardtop.

If the roll bar was raised manually:X Press and hold button ; until the roll bar

is lowered.If the roll bar was raised automatically:X Press and hold button : until you hear the

roll bar lock into place.X Press and hold button ; until the roll bar

is lowered.

i If you have raised the roll bar manuallyusing the button, the roll bar willautomatically be lowered and then raisedagain when you close and open theretractable hardtop.

Children in the vehicle

Safety notesIf an infant or child is traveling with you in thevehicle:X Secure the child using an infant or child

restraint appropriate to the age and size ofthe child.

X Make sure the infant or child is properlysecured at all times while the vehicle is inmotion.

Occupant safety 51

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 51

Z

G Warning!When leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the starter switch. Alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock thevehicle. Do not leave children unattended inthe vehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencouldRinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured through

excessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accident with

vehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from thestarter switch or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system’smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned by theseparts.

G Warning!Do not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment unless they arefirmly secured in place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child’s risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

Infant and child restraint systems

G Observe Safety notes, see page 51.We recommend all infants and children beproperly restrained at all times while thevehicle is in motion.The passenger lap/shoulder belt has aspecial seat belt retractor for securefastening of child restraints.To fasten a child restraint, follow the childrestraint manufacturer’s instructions formounting.To activate the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the shoulder belt out completely and

let it retract.During seat belt retraction, a ratchetingsound can be heard to indicate that thespecial seat belt retractor is activated.The seat belt is now locked.

X Push down on child restraint to take up anyslack.

To deactivate the special seat belt retractor:X Release the seat belt buckle and let the

seat belt retract completely.The seat belt can then again be used in theusual manner.

G Warning!Never release the seat belt buckle while thevehicle is in motion, since the special seat beltretractor will be deactivated.

The use of infant or child restraints is requiredby law in all 50 states, the District ofColumbia, the U.S. territories and allCanadian provinces.Infants and small children should be seatedin an appropriate infant or child restraintsystem. They must be properly secured by alap/shoulder belt in accordance with themanufacturer’s instructions for the childrestraint. All infant or child restraint systemsmust comply with U.S. Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards 213 and 225 and CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and210.2.


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 52

A statement by the child restraintmanufacturer of compliance with thesestandards can be found on the instructionlabel on the restraint and in the instructionmanual provided with the restraint.When using any infant restraint, toddlerrestraint, or booster seat, make sure tocarefully read and follow all manufacturer’sinstructions for installation and use.Please read and observe warning labelsaffixed to the inside of the vehicle and toinfant or child restraints.

G Warning!Children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle’s seat belt fully inaccordance with the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag

technology designed to deactivate thepassenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

passenger seat will be seriously injured oreven killed if the passenger front air baginflates in a collision which could occurunder some circumstances, even with theair bag technology installed in your vehicle.

RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint onthe passenger seat, make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the passenger front air bagis deactivated. Should the 45indicator lamp not illuminate or go out whilethe restraint is installed, please checkinstallation. Periodically check the45 indicator lamp while driving tomake sure the 45 indicator lamp isilluminated. If the 45 indicator lampgoes out or remains out, do not transport achild on the passenger seat until thesystem has been repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thepassenger seat will be seriously injured oreven killed if the passenger front air baginflates.RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child

restraint on the passenger seat, move theseat as far back as possible, use the properchild restraint recommended for the age,size and weight of the child, and securechild restraint with the vehicle’s seat beltaccording to the child seat manufacturer’sinstructions. For children larger than thetypical 12-month-old child, the passengerfront air bag may or may not be activated.

G Warning!Infants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. During anaccident, they could be crushed between theoccupant and seat belt.A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.Children too big for a toddler restraint mustride in seats using regular seat belts. Positionshoulder belt across chest and shoulder, notface or neck. A booster seat may benecessary to achieve proper seat beltpositioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until

Occupant safety 53

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 53

Z

they reach a height where a lap/shoulder beltfits properly without a booster.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint frombecoming a projectile in the event of anaccident.

Panic alarm

Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO

X Activating: Press and hold !button : for at least 1 second.An audible alarm and flashing exteriorlamps will operate.

X Deactivating: Press ! button : again.orX Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.orX Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must beinside the vehicle.

i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and2. this device must accept any

interference received, including

interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,

and2. this device must accept any

interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation of the device.


Driving safety systems

IntroductionThis section contains information about thefollowing driving safety systems:RABS (Antilock Brake System)RBAS (Brake Assist System)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)RElectro-hydraulic brake system

i In winter operation, the maximumeffectiveness of most of the drivingsystems described in this section is onlyachieved with winter tires, or snow chainsas required.

54 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 54

Safety notes

G Warning!The following factors increase the risk ofaccidents:RExcessive speed, especially in turnsRWet and slippery road surfacesRFollowing another vehicle too closely

The driving safety systems described in thissection cannot reduce these risks or preventthe natural laws of physics from acting on thevehicle. They cannot increase braking orsteering efficiency beyond that afforded bythe condition of the vehicle brakes and tiresor the traction afforded.Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver canprevent accidents.The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with thedriving safety systems described in thissection must never be exploited in a recklessor dangerous manner which could jeopardizethe user’s safety or the safety of others.Always adjust your driving style to theprevailing road and weather conditions andkeep a safe distance to other road users andobjects on the street.If a driving system malfunctions, other drivingsafety systems may also switch off. Observeindicator and warning lamps that may comeon as well as messages in the multifunctiondisplay that may appear.

ABS


G Warning!Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steadybrake pedal pressure instead. Pumping thebrake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABSand significantly reduces brakingeffectiveness.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulatesthe brake pressure so that the wheels do notlock during braking. This allows you tomaintain the ability to steer your vehicle.The ABS is functional above a speed ofapproximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independentof road surface conditions.On slippery road surfaces, the ABS willrespond even to light brake pressure.The ABS indicator lamp ! in theinstrument cluster comes on when you switchon the ignition. It goes out when the engineis running.

BrakingIf the ABS activates during braking, the ABS/ESP® warning lamp ÷ or d7 in theinstrument cluster flashes. Because of theelectro-hydraulic brake system, you will notfeel any pulsation in the brake pedal.X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake

pedal.Continuous, steady brake pedal pressureyields the advantages provided by the ABS,namely braking power and the ability to steerthe vehicle.The ABS/ESP® warning lamp ÷ or d7

flashes whenever the ABS is activated. It canbe an indication for hazardous roadconditions and functions as a reminder totake extra care while driving.

Emergency brake maneuverX Keep continuous full pressure on the brake

pedal.

G Warning!If the ABS malfunctions, other driving safetysystems such as the BAS or the ESP® are alsoswitched off. Observe indicator and warninglamps that may come on as well as messagesin the multifunction display that may appear.

7 Depending on vehicle production date.

Driving safety systems 55

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 55

Z

If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lockduring hard braking, reducing steeringcapability and extending the braking distance.

BAS

G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates inemergency situations. If you apply the brakesvery quickly, the BAS provides full brakeboost automatically, thereby potentiallyreducing the braking distance.X Apply continuous full braking pressure until

the emergency braking situation is over.The ABS will prevent the wheels fromlocking.

When you release the brake pedal, the brakesfunction again as normal. The BAS is thendeactivated.

G Warning!If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system stillfunctions, but without the additional brakeboost available that the BAS would normallyprovide in an emergency braking maneuver.Therefore, the braking distance may increase.

ESP®

G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) isoperational as soon as the engine is running.It monitors the vehicle’s traction (force ofadhesive friction between the tires and theroad surface) and handling.The ESP® recognizes that the vehicle deviatesfrom the direction of travel as intended by thedriver. By applying brakes to individualwheels and by limiting the engine output, theESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. TheESP® is especially useful while driving off andon wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®

also stabilizes the vehicle during braking andsteering maneuvers.The ABS/ESP® warning lamp ÷ or d8

in the instrument cluster comes on when youswitch on the ignition. It goes out when theengine is running.The ABS/ESP® warning lamp ÷ or d8

in the instrument cluster flashes when theESP® is engaged.

G Warning!Never switch off the ESP® when you see theABS/ESP® warning lamp ÷ or d9

flashing in the instrument cluster. In this caseproceed as follows:RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle as

possible.RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator

pedal.RAdapt your speed and driving style to the

prevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines couldcause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannotprevent accidents resulting from excessivespeed.

! Because the ESP® operatesautomatically, the engine and ignition mustbe shut off (SmartKey in starter switchposition 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton in position 0 or 1) when the parkingbrake is being tested on a brake testdynamometer or when the vehicle is beingtowed with the front axle raised.Active braking action through the ESP®

may otherwise seriously damage the brakesystem which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! The ESP® will only function properly if youuse wheels of the recommended tire size

8 Depending on vehicle production date.9 Depending on vehicle production date.


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 56

as specified in the “Technical data” sectionof this Operator’s Manual.

i The Distronic system and cruise controlswitch off automatically when the ESP®

engages.

Electronic Traction System (ETS)

G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.The ETS (Electronic Traction System) is acomponent of the ESP®. The ETS improvesthe vehicle’s ability to utilize availabletraction, especially under slippery roadconditions by applying the brakes to aspinning wheel.When you switch off the ESP®, the ETS is stillenabled.

Switching the ESP® off or on (except SL 63 AMG)

G Warning!The ESP® should not be switched off duringnormal driving other than in thecircumstances described below. Disablingthe system will reduce vehicle stability indriving maneuvers.Do not switch off the ESP® when a sparewheel is mounted.

To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch offthe ESP®. This allows the drive wheels to spinand thus cut into surfaces for better grip, forexampleRwhen driving with snow chainsRin deep snowRin sand or gravel

G Warning!Switch on the ESP® immediately if theaforementioned circumstances do not applyanymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not

stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skidor a wheel is spinning.

When you switch off the ESP®,Rthe ESP® will not stabilize the vehicleRthe engine output is not limited, which

allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cutinto surfaces for better gripRthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a

spinning wheelRthe ESP® continues to operate when you

are brakingRthe cruise control or the Distronic system

cannot be activatedRthe cruise control or the Distronic system

switch off if activated

i When the ESP® is switched off and one ormore drive wheels are spinning, the ABS/ESP® warning lamp ÷ or d8 in theinstrument cluster flashes. However, theESP® will then not stabilize the vehicle.

Depending on vehicle production date, thesymbol on the ESP® switch may differ.

Version 1X Switching off: With the engine running,

press ESP® switch : until the ESP® OFF



Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 57

Z

warning lamp å in the instrumentcluster comes on.The ESP® is switched off.

X Switching on: Press ESP® switch : untilthe ESP® OFF warning lamp å in theinstrument cluster goes out.You are now again in normal driving modewith the ESP® switched on.

G Warning!When the ESP® OFF warning lamp å isilluminated continuously, the ESP® isswitched off.When the ABS/ESP® warning lamp ÷ andthe ESP® OFF warning lamp å areilluminated continuously, the ESP® is notoperational due to a malfunction.When the ESP® is switched off or notoperational, vehicle stability in standarddriving maneuvers is reduced.Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailingroad conditions and to the non-operatingstatus of the ESP®.


press ESP® switch : until the ABS/ESP®

warning lamp d in the instrumentcluster comes on.The ESP® is switched off.

X Switching on: Press ESP® switch : untilthe ABS/ESP® warning lamp d in theinstrument cluster goes out.You are now again in normal driving modewith the ESP® switched on.

G Warning!When the ABS/ESP® warning lamp d isilluminated continuously, the ESP® isswitched off or is not operational due to amalfunction. Vehicle stability in standarddriving maneuvers is reduced.Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailingroad conditions and to the non-operatingstatus of the ESP®.

! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for anextended period with the ESP® switchedoff. This may cause serious damage to thedrivetrain which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

SL 63 AMG

Switching the SPORT handling mode on or offG Warning!The SPORT handling mode should not beswitched on during normal driving.Switching the SPORT handling mode on willresult in the following:Rno restriction to engine torqueRsystem-supported traction control is

limited

The SPORT handling mode is designed fordriving on closed tracks when the vehicle’snatural oversteer and understeercharacteristics are desired and requires ahighly skilled and experienced driver able tohandle these critical driving situations.


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 58

You could lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident.Please be aware of these limits when youswitch on the SPORT handling mode.Do not switch on the SPORT handling modewhen a spare wheel is mounted.

To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch onthe SPORT handling mode. This allows thedrive wheels to spin and thus cut intosurfaces for better grip, for exampleRwhen driving with snow chainsRin deep snowRin sand or gravel

G Warning!Switch off the SPORT handling mode andswitch on the ESP® immediately if theaforementioned circumstances do not applyanymore. Otherwise the SPORT handlingmode will only stabilize the vehicle to a limitedextent when it is starting to skid or a wheel isspinning.

When you switch on the SPORT handlingmodeRthe ESP® stabilizes the vehicle only to a

limited extentRthe engine output is limited, but only to the

extent that allows the drive wheels to spinand thus cut into surfaces for better gripRthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a


are braking hardRthe cruise control or the Distronic system



i When the SPORT handling mode isswitched on and one or more drive wheelsare spinning, the ABS/ESP® warning lamp

÷ or d8 in the instrument clusterflashes. However, the ESP® will thenstabilize the vehicle only to a limited extent.


Version 1X Switching on: With the engine running,

press ESP® switch : briefly.The SPORT handling mode warning lamp

in the instrument cluster comes on.The message SPORT handling modeappears in the multifunction display.

X Switching off: With the engine running,press ESP® switch : briefly.The SPORT handling mode warning lamp

in the instrument cluster goes out.



Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 59

Z

Version 2X Switching on: With the engine running,

press ESP® switch : briefly.The ABS/ESP® warning lamp d in theinstrument cluster comes on. The messageESP-SPORT appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Switching off: With the engine running,press ESP® SPORT switch : briefly.The ABS/ESP® warning lamp d in theinstrument cluster goes out. The messageESP-ON appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

The SPORT handling mode switches offautomatically when you turn off the engine.When starting the engine, the ESP® isactivated automatically.

Switching the ESP® off or onG Warning!The ESP® should not be switched off duringnormal driving.Disabling of the system will result in thefollowing:Rno restriction to engine torqueRloss of system-supported traction control

“ESP® OFF” is designed for driving on closedtracks when the vehicle’s natural oversteerand understeer characteristics are desiredand requires a highly skilled and experienced

driver able to handle these critical drivingsituations.You could lose control of your vehicle andcause an accident.Please be aware of these limits when youswitch off the ESP®.Do not switch off the ESP® when a sparewheel is mounted.

To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch offthe ESP®. This allows the drive wheels to spinand thus cut into surfaces for better grip, forexampleRwhen driving with snow chainsRin deep snowRin sand or gravel

G Warning!Switch on the ESP® immediately if theaforementioned circumstances do not applyanymore. Otherwise the ESP® will notstabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skidor a wheel is spinning.

When you switch off the ESP®,Rthe ESP® will not stabilize the vehicleRthe engine output is not limited, which

allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cutinto surfaces for better gripRthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a


are braking hardRthe cruise control or the Distronic system



i When the ESP® is switched off and one ormore drive wheels are spinning, the ABS/ESP® warning lamp ÷ or d8 in the



fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 60

instrument cluster does not flash. TheESP® will then not stabilize the vehicle.



press ESP® switch : until the ESP® OFFwarning lamp å in the instrumentcluster comes on.The message ESP-OFF appears in themultifunction display.

X Switching on: With the engine running,press ESP® switch : until the ESP® OFFwarning lamp å in the instrumentcluster goes out.The message ESP-ON appears in themultifunction display.

G Warning!When the ESP® OFF warning lamp å is on,the ESP® is switched off.When the ABS/ESP® warning lamp ÷ andthe ESP® OFF warning lamp å areilluminated continuously, the ESP® is notoperational due to a malfunctionWhen the ESP® is switched off or notoperational due to a malfunction, vehiclestability in standard driving maneuvers isreduced.Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailingroad conditions and to the non-operatingstatus of the ESP®.


press ESP® switch : until the ABS/ESP®

warning lamp d and the ESP® OFFwarning lamp % in the instrumentcluster come on.The message ESP-OFF appears in themultifunction display.

X Switching on: With the engine running,press ESP® switch : briefly.The ABS/ESP® warning lamp d and theESP® OFF warning lamp % in theinstrument cluster go out. The messageESP-ON appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

G Warning!When the ABS/ESP® warning lamp d andthe ESP® OFF warning lamp % areilluminated continuously, the ESP® isswitched off. Vehicle stability in standarddriving maneuvers is reduced.Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailingroad conditions and to the non-operatingstatus of the ESP®.

! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for anextended period with the ESP® switchedoff. This may cause serious damage to thedrivetrain which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.


Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 61

Z

Electro-hydraulic brake systemThe electro-hydraulic brake system combinesa hydraulic brake circuit with electronicallycontrolled brake servo assistance. You haveincreased braking safety and improvedbraking comfort.

G Warning!Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated inthe speedometer display, for example by the$ (USA only) or J (Canada only)indicator lamp. Refer to the “Practical hints”section. Also read and observe the messagesin the instrument cluster multifunctiondisplay.

For information on warning and indicatorlamps, see the “Practical hints” section(Y page 255). For information on themessages that may appear in themultifunction display, see the “Practicalhints” section (Y page 227) and(Y page 237).

G Warning!The electro-hydraulic brake system requireselectrical power to operate.A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply orelectrical system may impair brake systemoperation and switch it into its emergencyoperation mode. In such a case, the red brakewarning lamp comes on and warningmessages appear in the multifunction displaywhile driving. To brake, the driver must thenapply significantly greater brake pedalpressure and depress the pedal much furtherto obtain the expected braking effect. Ifnecessary, apply full pressure to the brakepedal. Brakes are only applied to the frontwheels. Stopping distance is increased!If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend thatthe vehicle be transported with all wheels offthe ground using flatbed or appropriate wheellift/dolly equipment.A tow bar must be used if circumstances donot permit the use of the recommended

towing methods and the vehicle requirestowing with all four wheels on the ground.Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on theground is only permissible for distances up to30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, seethe “Towing the vehicle” section in thisOperator’s Manual.

The electro-hydraulic brake system isactivated automatically when youRunlock the vehicle with the SmartKey or

with KEYLESS-GORopen the driver’s or passenger doorRturn the SmartKey in the starter switch to

position 1Rpress the start/stop button on the gear

selector lever once (vehicles withKEYLESS-GO)Rdepress the brake pedalRrelease the parking brakeIf the electro-hydraulic brake system isactivated as the brake pedal is firstdepressed, you may feel a reduced pedalresistance and longer pedal travel thannormal. When releasing the pedal, you mayalso feel the brake pedal pulsate and you mayhear a sound which is caused by theactivation of the electro-hydraulic brakesystem pump. This is normal and not anindication of a malfunction. Pedal travelreturns to normal when you release the brakepedal and the sound soon ceases.If you experience the above while driving andthe red brake warning lamp illuminatesand/or warning messages appear in themultifunction display, the brake system ismalfunctioning. Follow the instructions of thewarning message(s) and have the brakesystem checked immediately.

G Warning!Have brake pad replacement and other workon the electro-hydraulic brake system carried


fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 62

out by qualified technicians only. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for furtherinformation.The electro-hydraulic brake system must bedeactivated prior to working on the system.High pressure is intermittently built up in thesystem as part of its automatic self-test.In addition, the system is automaticallyactivated when the vehicle is unlocked byremote control, when the driver or passengerdoor is opened, when the SmartKey in thestarter switch is turned to position 1 or theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button is pressedonce, when the brake pedal is depressed orwhen the parking brake is released. Failure todeactivate the system prior to maintenancewill cause brake pistons to extend and brakefluid to leak, which may result in injuries(contusions and acid burns). Extended brakepistons may also cause injury.

The electro-hydraulic brake system switchesoff automaticallyRapproximately 2 minutes after you turned

the SmartKey in the starter switch toposition 0 or removed the SmartKeyRapproximately 2 minutes after you pressed

the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button to turnoff the engine or power supply and openedthe driver’s door (with driver’s door open,the starter switch is set to position 0, sameas SmartKey removed from starter switch)Rapproximately 20 seconds after you locked

the vehicle from outsideFor more information on your vehicle’sbrakes, see the “Driving instructions” section(Y page 210).

Anti-theft systems

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents unauthorizedpersons from starting your vehicle.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

ActivatingX With SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey

from the starter switch.X With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and

open the driver’s door.

DeactivatingX Switch on the ignition.

i Starting the engine will also deactivatethe immobilizer.In the event that the engine cannot bestarted (yet the vehicle’s battery ischarged), the system is not operational.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

Anti-theft alarm systemOnce the alarm system has been armed, avisual and audible alarm is triggered whensomeone opensRa doorRthe trunkRthe hoodRa storage compartment in the rearRthe glove boxRthe storage compartment under the

armrestThe alarm will stay on even if the activatingelement, a door, for example, is closedimmediately.The alarm system will also be triggered whenRthe vehicle is raised (tow-away alarm)Rthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical

key

Anti-theft systems 63

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 63

Z

Ra door is opened from the insideRthe trunk is opened with the emergency

release buttonTo cancel the alarm after it has beentriggered, see “Canceling the alarm”(Y page 65).

i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates acall to the Customer Assistance Centerautomatically. The Tele Aid system willinitiate the call provided thatRyou have subscribed to the Tele Aid

serviceRthe Tele Aid service has been activated

properlyRthe necessary mobile phone, power

supply and GPS coverage are available

X Arming: Lock the vehicle with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.The turn signal lamps flash three times andan acoustic warning sounds three times toindicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicatorlamp : flashes to indicate that the alarmsystem is armed.

i If the turn signal lamps do not flash threetimes and the acoustic warning does notsound three times, a door or the trunk maynot be properly closed.

Close the respective element.X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the

SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.The turn signal lamps flash once and anacoustic warning sounds once to indicatethat the alarm system is disarmed.

i Unless you open a door or the trunk withinapproximately 40 seconds after unlockingthe vehicle:RThe vehicle will be locked again.RThe anti-theft alarm system will be

rearmed.

Tow-away alarmOnce the tow-away alarm is armed, a visualand audible alarm will be triggered whensomeone attempts to raise the vehicle.To cancel the alarm after it has beentriggered, see “Canceling the alarm”(Y page 65).

i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, a call to the CustomerAssistance Center is initiated automaticallyby the Tele Aid system provided that youhave subscribed to the Tele Aid service andthat it has been activated properly, and thatthe necessary mobile phone, power supplyand GPS coverage are available.

X Arming: Lock the vehicle with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.The tow-away alarm is armed after about30 seconds automatically.

X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.The tow-away alarm remains disarmed untilyou lock the vehicle again.

Disabling tow-away alarmTo prevent triggering the tow-away alarm,disable the tow-away alarm feature beforetowing the vehicle, or when parking on a

64 Anti-theft systemsSa

fety

and

sec

urity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 64

surface subject to movement, such as a ferryor auto train.

X Remove the SmartKey from the starterswitch.

X Press tow-away alarm switch :.Indicator lamp ; comes on briefly.

X Exit and lock the vehicle.The tow-away alarm remains disabled untilyou lock the vehicle again.

Canceling the alarmTo cancel the alarm, do one of the following:X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.X Press button % or & on the

SmartKey.

In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:X Grasp an outside door handle.

The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) ofthe vehicle.

X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.

Anti-theft systems 65

Safe

ty a

nd s

ecur

ity


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 65

Z

66


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 66

Vehicle equipment .............................. 68Locking and unlocking ....................... 68Starter switch positions ..................... 78Seats .................................................... 80Multifunction steering wheel ............. 84Mirrors ................................................. 86Memory function ................................. 88Lighting ................................................ 89Wipers .................................................. 95Power windows ................................... 96Driving and parking ............................ 98Automatic transmission ................... 103Instrument cluster ............................ 111Control system .................................. 113Driving systems ................................ 130Climate control system .................... 148Rear window defroster ..................... 155Retractable hardtop ......................... 155Loading and storing .......................... 161Useful features ................................. 164

67

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 67

Vehicle equipment


Locking and unlocking

Notes

G Observe Safety notes, see page 51.When unlocking or locking the vehicle withthe SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. Theacoustic signal is activated at the factory. Ifyou wish to deactivate the feature, or adjustits signal volume, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signallamps flash once. An acoustic signal soundsonce, and the locking knobs in the doorsmove up. The anti-theft alarm system isdisarmed.When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lampsflash three times. An acoustic signal soundsthree times, and the locking knobs in thedoors move down. The anti-theft alarmsystem is armed.All doors and the trunk must be closed.If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle withthe SmartKey, the batteries in the SmartKeyare discharged, the SmartKey ismalfunctioning, or the vehicle battery isdrained.X Check the batteries in the SmartKey

(Y page 71) and replace them ifnecessary.

X Use the mechanical key to unlock thedriver’s door and the trunk (Y page 267).

X Use the mechanical key to lock the vehicle(Y page 269).

X Have the vehicle battery and the vehiclebattery connections checked at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contactRoadside Assistance or an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

SmartKeyYour vehicle comes supplied with twoSmartKeys, each with remote control and aremovable mechanical key.The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocksRthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flapRthe glove boxRthe storage compartment under the

armrestRthe rear storage compartments

Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO: & Lock button; F Unlock button for trunk lid= % Unlock button

When you open a door, the windows on thatside lowers slightly. Once you close the door,the windows move up again.

! A window will not work if it is blocked withice or if the vehicle battery is discharged. If

68 Locking and unlockingCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 68

you cannot shut a door, do not force it oryou could damage the door or the window.Fix whatever is affecting the window beforetrying to shut the door.



interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.






Factory setting X Global unlocking: Press button %.Unless you open a door or the trunk withinapproximately 40 seconds after unlockingthe vehicle:RThe vehicle will be locked again.RThe anti-theft alarm system will be

rearmed.X Global locking: Press button &.

Selective setting If you frequently travel alone, you may wishto reprogramm the SmartKey. Pressingbutton % will then only unlock the driver’sdoor, interior lockable storagecompartments, and the fuel filler flap.X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons% and & simultaneously forapproximately 6 seconds until the batterycheck lamp (Y page 71) flashes twice.

The SmartKey will then function as follows:X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler

flap: Press button % once.X Global unlocking: Press button %

twice.X Global locking: Press button &.

KEYLESS-GOVehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO comewith two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, eachwith remote control and a removablemechanical key.The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated intothe SmartKey. The validity of the SmartKey ischecked every time you grasp an outside doorhandle.When the SmartKey is valid, your vehicleunlocksRthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flapRthe glove boxRthe storage compartment under the

armrestRthe rear storage compartmentsWhen you open a door, the windows on thatside lowers slightly. Once you close the door,the windows move up again.

! A window will not work if it is blocked withice or if the vehicle battery is discharged. If

Locking and unlocking 69

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 69

Z

you cannot shut a door, do not force it oryou could damage the door or the window.Fix whatever is affecting the window beforetrying to shut the door.









Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO RYou can also use the SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey(Y page 68).RYou can combine KEYLESS-GO functions

with normal SmartKey functions (e.g.unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and lockingwith button &).RAlways carry the SmartKey with you.RNever store the SmartKey together with

- electronic items such as a mobile phoneor another SmartKey

- metallic objects such as coins or metalfoil

Doing so could impair the function of theKEYLESS-GO system.RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey

must be located outside the vehicle withinapproximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or thetrunk.RWhen the vehicle has been parked for more

than 72 hours, the KEYLESS-GO function isdeactivated. Pull an outside door handleand switch on the ignition once to activatethe KEYLESS-GO function.RIf the SmartKey is positioned farther away

from the vehicle, the system may no longerrecognize the SmartKey. The vehiclecannot be locked or the engine started viathe KEYLESS-GO system.RIf the SmartKey is removed from the vehicle

while the engine is running (e.g. if apassenger exits the vehicle with theSmartKey), the message Key Not Detected appears in the multifunctiondisplay while driving off.Find the SmartKey or change its presentlocation immediately (e.g. place it on thepassenger seat or insert it in shirt pocket).RIf you have started the engine with the

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you canonly turn it off again with this button, evenif you have put the SmartKey in the starterswitch in the meantime.RThis does not apply if, after starting, the

automatic transmission is still in parkposition P and the SmartKey is theninserted in the starter switch. TheSmartKey will then have priority over theKEYLESS-GO function and the vehicle’selectrical system will operate according tothe position of the SmartKey in the starterswitch, even stopping the engine.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 70

RThe vehicle could be inadvertentlyunlocked if the SmartKey is within 3 ft (1 m)of the vehicle andan outside door handle is splashed with

wateror

- you attempt to clean an outside doorhandle

RRemember that the engine can be startedby anyone with a SmartKey that is leftinside the vehicle. If you leave theSmartKey behind when exiting and lockingthe vehicle, the message Key Detected In Vehicle appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Factory setting X Global unlocking: Grasp an outside door

handle.Unless you open a door or the trunk withinapproximately 40 seconds after unlockingthe vehicle:RThe vehicle will be locked again.RThe anti-theft alarm system will be

rearmed.

X Global locking: Press lock button : on anoutside door handle.

Selective setting If you frequently travel alone, you may wishto reprogram the SmartKey. Grasping thedriver’s outside door handle will then only

unlock the driver’s door, interior lockablestorage compartments, and the fuel filler flap.X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons% and & simultaneously forapproximately 6 seconds until the batterycheck lamp (Y page 71) flashes twice.

KEYLESS-GO will then function as follows:X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler

flap: Grasp the driver’s outside doorhandle.

X Global unlocking: Grasp the outside doorhandle on the passenger side.

X Global locking: Press lock button : on anoutside door handle.

Checking SmartKey batteries

Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO

X Press button & or % on theSmartKey.Battery check lamp : comes on briefly toindicate that the SmartKey batteries are inorder.

If the battery check lamp does not come onbriefly during check, the SmartKey batteriesare discharged.X Replace the batteries (Y page 269).

i You can obtain the required batteries atany authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i If the batteries are checked within signalrange of the vehicle, pressing button


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 71

Z

& or % will lock or unlock the vehicleaccordingly.

Loss of the SmartKeyIf you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,you should do the following:X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the

mechanical key to your car insurancecompany immediately.

X Have the mechanical lock replaced ifnecessary.

Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will beglad to supply you with a replacement. Forinformation on replacing the SmartKey, see“Replacing the SmartKey” (Y page 72).

Replacing the SmartKeyOnly you, or someone authorized by you canorder a replacement key from any Mercedes-Benz Center. In order to do so, the Mercedes-Benz Center will require proof of identity andvehicle ownership with original documents,including the following:If you are the current owner of the vehicle:Rthe vehicle’s current state registrationRa current identity card, passport, or drivers

licenseIf you are an authorized person:Rthe vehicle’s current state registrationRa current identity card, passport, or drivers

license for the authorized individualRsigned and dated authorization from the

owner of the vehicle for which the key isbeing requested

i Duplicated or photocopieddocumentation will not be accepted.

Activating the keyOnce you, or an authorized person, hasprovided the appropriate documents, theMercedes-Benz Center will need tosynchronize the key to your vehicle before itcan be used. In order to do so, the Mercedes-Benz Center need access to your vehicle.

Opening the doors from the insideYou can open a locked door from the inside.Open door only when conditions are safe todo so.

Example illustration driver’s door

If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, openinga door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm system.To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 65).X Pull on inside door handle ; on the

respective door.If the door was locked, locking knob : willmove up.When you open a door, the windows on thatside lowers slightly. Once you close thedoor, the windows move up again.

! A window will not work if it is blocked withice or if the vehicle battery is discharged. Ifyou cannot shut a door, do not force it oryou could damage the door or the window.Fix whatever is affecting the window beforetrying to shut the door.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 72

Automatic central lockingYou can switch the automatic central lockingon or off using the control system(Y page 126).The doors and the trunk lock automaticallywhen the vehicle is set into motion.You can open a locked door from the inside.Open door only when conditions are safe todo so.The doors are designed to unlockautomatically after an accident if the force ofthe impact exceeds a preset threshold.The vehicle locks automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning at a vehicle speed of above 9 mph(15 km/h). You could therefore lock yourselfout when the vehicle is pushed or towed or ison a test stand.

Locking and unlocking from the inside

G Observe Safety notes, see page 51.You can lock or unlock the vehicle from theinside using the central locking or unlockingswitch. This can be useful, for example, if youwant to lock the vehicle before starting todrive.The central locking or unlocking switch doesnot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap or theinterior storage compartments, such as theglove box.

X Locking: Press central locking switch :.When all doors are closed, the vehiclelocks.

X Unlocking: Press central unlockingswitch ;.

You can open a locked door from the inside.Open door only when conditions are safe todo so.If the vehicle was previously locked with thecentral locking switchRand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,

the complete vehicle is unlocked when adoor is opened from the insideRand the SmartKey is set to selective

settings, only the door opened from insideis unlocked

If the vehicle has been locked centrally withthe SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it will notunlock using the central unlocking switch.

Opening the trunk

G Warning!Make sure the trunk is closed when the engineis running and while driving. Among otherdangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gasesmay enter vehicle interior resulting inunconsciousness and death.

! When you open the trunk, the trunk lidswings open upwards. Always make surethere is sufficient overhead clearance.

You can open the trunk when the vehicle isstationary and the retractable hardtop is fullyopened or closed.A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.88 m)is required to open the trunk lid.

i To facilitate trunk loading and unloadingwhen the hardtop is retracted, you canraise the hardtop from its storage positionin the trunk using the load assist feature(Y page 164). You may also unhook theluggage cover.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 73

Z

Remember to re-secure the luggage coverafter loading/unloading the trunk.Otherwise you will not be able to lower theretractable hardtop.

Opening the trunk from the outside

Vehicles without trunk opening/closing systemX Press button F on the SmartKey.orX Pull on handle :.

In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: Thevehicle must be unlocked.

If the trunk does not open, it is still lockedseparately (Y page 77).

Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system X Press and hold button F on the

SmartKey until trunk unlocks and begins toopen.

orX Pull on handle :.

In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: Thevehicle must be unlocked.

If the trunk does not open, it is still lockedseparately (Y page 77).X Stopping the opening procedure: Press

button F on the SmartKey or pull thetrunk lid handle.

Opening the trunk from the inside

Vehicles without trunk opening/closing system

X Pull remote trunk opening switch : untilthe trunk unlocks and opens slightly.Indicator lamp ; comes on and remains lituntil the trunk is closed.

X Lift the trunk lid.

Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system

X Pull and hold remote trunk opening/closing switch : until the trunk unlocksand begins to open.Indicator lamp ; comes on and remains lituntil the trunk is closed.

X Release remote trunk opening switch :.X To interrupt the opening procedure:

Press or pull remote trunk opening/closingswitch :.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 74

Closing the trunk


G Warning!To prevent possible personal injury, alwayskeep hands and fingers away from the trunkopening when closing the trunk lid. Beespecially careful when small children arearound.

G Observe Safety notes, see page 51.Do not leave the SmartKey in the open trunk.You may lock yourself out.If the vehicle was previously locked centrallywith the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the trunklid will lock automatically when closed. Allturn signal lamps flash three times and anacoustic signal sounds three times to confirmlocking.

i When the hardtop is retracted, it must becompletely lowered in the trunk before thetrunk can be closed (Y page 155).

Closing the trunk from the outside manually

X Lower trunk lid by pulling on handle :firmly.

X Close trunk with hands placed flat on trunklid.

The power closing assist automaticallyensures that the trunk lid is pulled completelyclose (Y page 78).

Closing the trunk from the inside automatically

G Warning!Maintain sight of the area around the rear ofthe vehicle while operating the trunk lid withthe door mounted switch. Monitor the closingprocedure carefully to make sure no one is indanger of being injured.To interrupt the closing procedure, releasethe door mounted remote trunk opening/closing switch again.Even with the SmartKey removed from thestarter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO removed from the vehicle, the remotetrunk opening/closing switch can beoperated. Therefore, do not leave childrenunattended in the vehicle, or with access toan unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

In vehicles with trunk opening/closingsystem you can close the trunk from theinside using the remote trunk opening/closing switch.If the trunk lid comes into contact with anobject while closing, the closing procedure isstopped and the trunk lid reopens slightly.This will happen only while the trunk is in itsupper motion sequence. Check if luggage hasbeen piled too high, for example.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 75

Z

X Press and hold remote trunk opening/closing switch : until the trunk is closed.Indicator lamp ; in the switch goes outwhen the trunk is closed.

X Interrupting the closing procedure:Release remote trunk opening/closingswitch :.

Closing the trunk from the outside automatically

G Warning!Monitor the closing procedure carefully tomake sure no one is in danger of beinginjured. To prevent possible personal injury,always keep hands and fingers away from thetrunk opening when closing the trunk lid. Beespecially careful when small children arearound. To stop the closing procedure, do oneof the following:RPress button F on the SmartKey.RPress the remote trunk opening/closing

switch (on the driver’s door).RPress the trunk closing switch.RPress the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing

switch.RPull the trunk lid handle.

Even with the SmartKey removed from thestarter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO removed from the vehicle, the remotetrunk opening/closing switch can beoperated. Therefore, do not leave childrenunattended in the vehicle, or with access toan unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

In vehicles with trunk opening/closingsystem you can close the trunk from theoutside using the trunk closing switch.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

X Press trunk closing switch : briefly.

Closing the trunk and locking vehicle from outsideThis section applies to vehicles with trunkopening/closing system and KEYLESS-GOonly. You can close the trunk and lock thevehicle simultaneously from the outside usingthe KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 76

X Make sure you have the SmartKey withKEYLESS-GO with you.

X Press KEYLESS-GO locking/closingswitch : briefly.With all doors closed:RThe locking knobs in the doors move

down.RThe trunk lid starts to close

automatically.RAll turn signal lamps flash three times

once the trunk has closed completely.RAn acoustic signal sounds three times

once the trunk has closed completely.RThe anti-theft alarm system is armed.

Trunk lid emergency releaseThe trunk lid can be opened from inside thetrunk with the emergency release button.

X Briefly press emergency releasebutton :.The trunk lid unlocks and opens slightly.

X Push up the trunk lid to fully open.The emergency release button unlocks thetrunk while the vehicle is standing still or inmotion.Illumination of the emergency release button:RThe button flashes for 30 minutes after

opening the trunk.RThe button flashes for 60 minutes after

closing the trunk.

The emergency release button does notunlock the trunk, if the vehicle battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Valet lockingYou can lock the trunk separately with themechanical key. This denies unauthorizedaccess to the trunk, e.g. when you valet parkthe vehicle.X Leave only the SmartKey less its

mechanical key with the vehicle.

X Valet locking: Close the trunk.X Remove the mechanical key from the

SmartKey (Y page 267).X Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid

lock.X Turn the mechanical key clockwise to

position 2 and remove the mechanicalkey in that position to lock the trunk.

The trunk remains locked even when thevehicle is centrally unlocked.You can then only open the trunk with themechanical key.X Canceling: Insert the mechanical key in

the trunk lid lock.X Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise

to neutral position 1 and remove themechanical key in that position to unlockthe trunk.You can now open the trunk.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 77

Z

Power closing assist for trunk lidIt is not necessary to slam the trunk lidclosed. An electrical power-assistedmechanism draws the trunk lid closed quietlyand automatically once the trunk lid has beenlatched. When the electrical power-assistedmechanism has stopped, the trunk can bereopened.

G Warning!To prevent possible personal injury, alwayskeep hands and fingers away from the trunkopening when closing the trunk lid. Beespecially careful when small children arearound.In case of danger, pull the inside or outsidedoor handle, or press the trunk lid lock.To prevent personal injury, never actuate theclosing assist mechanism by tampering withthe door or trunk lid latch.


X Press the trunk lid gently into its lock.

Starter switch positions

SmartKey


Starter switchg For removing SmartKey (gear selector

lever must be in park position P)1 Power supply for some electrical

consumers, e.g. wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical

consumers) and driving position 3 Starting position

When you switch on the ignition, all lamps inthe instrument cluster come on. The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp and turnsignal indicator lamps will only come on ifactivated. If a lamp in the instrument clusterfails to come on when the ignition is switchedon, have it checked and replaced if necessary.If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains onafter starting the engine or comes on whiledriving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster”(Y page 254).X Always remove the SmartKey from the

starter switch when the engine is not inoperation.This will help to prevent accelerated vehiclebattery discharge or a completelydischarged vehicle battery.

If the SmartKey cannot be turned in thestarter switch, the vehicle battery may not besufficiently charged.X Check the vehicle battery and charge it if

necessary (Y page 285).

78 Starter switch positionsCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 78

orX Get a jump start (Y page 285).

KEYLESS-GO

G Observe Safety notes, see page 51.Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GOfeature are supplied with a SmartKey withintegrated KEYLESS-GO function.The SmartKey must be present in the vehicle.Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop buttonwithout depressing the brake pedalcorresponds to the various starter switchpositions (Y page 78).Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop buttonwith the brake pedal firmly depressed willstart the engine (Y page 98).The function of the SmartKey overrules theKEYLESS-GO function.X Make sure the automatic transmission is in

park position P.X Do not depress the brake pedal.

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button: USA only; Canada only

Position 0Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton, the vehicle’s on-board electronicshave status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).

Position 1X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

once.This supplies power for some electricalconsumers, e.g. wipers.

i When you now press the KEYLESS-GOstart/stop buttonRonce more, the ignition (position 2) is

switched onRtwice more the power supply is again

switched off

Ignition (or position 2) X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

twice.This supplies power for all electricalconsumers.When you switch on the ignition, all lampsin the instrument cluster come on. Thehigh-beam headlamp indicator lamp andturn signal indicator lamps will only comeon if activated. If a lamp in the instrumentcluster fails to come on when the ignitionis switched on, have it checked andreplaced if necessary. If a lamp in theinstrument cluster remains on afterstarting the engine or comes on whiledriving, refer to “Lamps in instrumentcluster” (Y page 254).

i When you now press the KEYLESS-GOstart/stop button once, the power supplyis again switched off.

Starter switch positions 79

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 79

Z

Seats

Safety notes

G Warning!In order to avoid possible loss of vehiclecontrol the following must be done before thevehicle is put into motion:Rseat adjustmentRhead restraint adjustmentRsteering wheel adjustmentRrear view mirror adjustmentRfastening of seat belts

G Warning!Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.Adjusting the seat while driving could causethe driver to lose control of the vehicle.Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide underit, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. That could cause seriousor fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seatbelts provide the best restraint when thewearer is in a position that is as upright aspossible and seat belts are properlypositioned on the body.

G Warning!Your seat must be adjusted so that you cancorrectly fasten your seat belt.Observe the following points:RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms are

slightly angled when holding the steeringwheel.RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating

position that still allows you to reach theaccelerator/brake pedal safely. Theposition should be as far back as possiblewith the driver still able to operate thecontrols properly.

RAdjust the head restraint so that it is asclose to the head as possible. The center ofthe head restraint must support the back ofthe head at eye level.RNever place hands under the seat or near

any moving parts while a seat is beingadjusted.

Failure to do so could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

G Warning!The power seats can be operated at any time.Therefore, do not leave children unattendedin the vehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to avehicle could result in an accident and/orserious personal injury.

G Warning!Children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in anappropriately sized infant restraint, toddlerrestraint, or booster seat recommended forthe size and weight of the child. For additionalinformation, see section “Children in thevehicle”.A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

G Warning!For your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeto the head as possible and the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat eye level. This will reduce the potential forinjury to the head and neck in the event of anaccident or similar situation.Do not drive the vehicle without the seat headrestraints. Head restraints are intended tohelp reduce injuries during an accident.

80 SeatsCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 80

Seat adjustment! When moving the seats, make sure there

are no items in the footwell or behind theseats. Otherwise, you could damage theseats and/or the items.

Power seats i The memory function (Y page 88) lets

you store the settings for the seat positiontogether with the settings for the steeringwheel and the exterior rear view mirrors.

X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press theswitch forward or backward in direction ofarrow A.

i When moving the seat fore or aft, the headrestraints may readjust automatically.

X Seat height: Press the switch up or downin direction of arrow ;.

X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up ordown in direction of arrow = until yourupper legs are lightly supported.

X Seat cushion depth: Press the switchforward or backward in direction ofarrow ? until your legs are supportedcomfortably.

X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switchforward or backward in direction of arrowB.

X Head restraint height: Press the switchup or down in direction of arrow :.

Moving the seats forward and backward

You can move the seats forward andbackward to facilitate loading and unloading.

G Warning!When moving the seats, make sure no one canbe caught by them. Never place hands underseat or near any moving parts during a seatadjustment procedure. To stop the seat frommoving when potential danger exists:RPress the switch once more.RMove the seat adjustment switch on the

door.

! When moving the seats, make sure thereare no items in the footwell or behind theseats. Otherwise, you could damage theseats and/or the items.

X Moving the seat forward: Press switchat : and release.The seat moves forward automatically.

X Moving the seat backward: Press switchat ; and release.The seat moves backwards to its previousposition automatically.

Lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the seat’slumbar support to help enhance support toyour spine.

Seats 81

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 81

Z

X Switch on the ignition.X Set the lumbar support with

thumbwheel : between 0 and 5.

Multicontour seatThe multicontour seat backrest has inflatableair cushions built into the seat backrest toprovide additional lumbar and side support.The seat backrest cushion height andcurvature can be continuously varied withswitches on the lower left side (driver’s seat)or the lower right side (passenger seat) of theseat when the ignition is switched on.

X Switch on the ignition.X Shoulder region support: Press W orX on switch :.The air cushion inflates or deflates.

X Lumbar region support: Press * or& on rocker switch ?.This selects the air cushion you wish toadjust.

X Press W or X on rocker switch ?.The air cushion inflates or deflates.

X Side bolsters adjustment: Pressswitch ; to the right or left.The lateral support increases or decreases.

Massage function (PULSE)You can reduce muscle tension during longtrips by periodically using the massagefunction.X Press button =.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on.The air cushions in the lumbar region inflateand deflate rhythmically.

i The massage function switches offautomatically after approximately8 minutes. The indicator lamp goes out.

Seat ventilation

The blue indicator lamps in seat ventilationswitch : come on to show which ventilationlevel you have selected.

i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seatcan be activated using the summer openingfeature (Y page 157).

X Switch on the ignition.X Switching on: Press seat ventilation

switch :.Three blue indicator lamps in seatventilation switch : come on.

82 SeatsCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 82

X Press seat ventilation switch : repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.

X Switching off: Press seat ventilationswitch : repeatedly until all indicatorlamps go out.

If one or more of the indicator lamps in theseat ventilation switch : are flashing, thereis insufficient voltage available since toomany electrical consumers are turned on. Theseat ventilation switches off automatically.The seat ventilation will switch back on againautomatically as soon as sufficient voltage isavailable.

Seat heatingThe seat heating will switch back on againautomatically as soon as sufficient voltage isavailable.

Vehicles without seat ventilation

: Rapid heating; Normal heating

The red indicator lamps in the switch comeon to show which heating level you haveselected.The seat heating switches from level 2 (rapidseat heating) to level 1 (normal seat heating)after approximately 5 minutes.The seat heating automatically switches offafter approximately 30 minutes.

X Switch on the ignition.X Switching on seat heating: Press lower

switch position ;.A red indicator lamp in the switch comeson.

X Switching off seat heating: Press lowerswitch position ; once more.

X Switching on rapid seat heating: Pressupper switch position :.Both red indicator lamps in the switchcome on.

X Switching off rapid seat heating: Pressupper switch position : once more.

If one or both of the indicator lamps in theseat heating switch are flashing, there isinsufficient voltage available since too manyelectrical consumers are turned on. The seatheating switches off automatically.The seat heating will switch back on againautomatically as soon as sufficient voltage isavailable.

Vehicles with seat ventilation

The red indicator lamps in the switch comeon to show which heating level you haveselected.The seat heating switches from level 2 (rapidseat heating) to level 1 (normal seat heating)after approximately 8 minutes.The seat heating automatically switches offafter approximately 30 minutes.

Seats 83

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 83

Z

X Switch on the ignition.X Switching on seat heating: Press

switch :.Both red indicator lamps in switch : comeon.

X Switching off seat heating: Pressswitch : repeatedly until all red indicatorlamps go out.

If one or both of the indicator lamps in theseat heating switch are flashing, there isinsufficient voltage available since too manyelectrical consumers are turned on. The seatheating switches off automatically.The seat heating will switch back on againautomatically as soon as sufficient voltage isavailable.

AIRSCARF neck-level heatingThe AIRSCARF neck-level heating providesthe area surrounding the occupants’ neckswith a heated air stream flowing fromopenings in the head restraints.

G Warning!When switching on the AIRSCARF neck-levelheating, the air streaming from the openingsmay be very hot. When in close proximity tothe openings, you could be seriously burned.To help avoid serious personal injuries, switchthe AIRSCARF to a lower heating level.

X Switch on the ignition.X Switching on: Press AIRSCARF switch :

for the desired side.All three indicator lamps on respectiveAIRSCARF switch : come on. After apreheating time of approximately10 seconds, the blower starts.

X Press AIRSCARF switch : repeatedly untilthe desired AIRSCARF heating level for thecorresponding seat is reached.

X Switching off: Press AIRSCARFswitch : repeatedly until all indicatorlamps on AIRSCARF switch : go out.

After switching off the AIRSCARF neck-levelheating, the AIRSCARF fan continues tooperate for approximately 7 seconds to cooldown the heater elements.

Multifunction steering wheel

Safety notes

G Warning!Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.Adjusting the steering wheel while drivingcould cause the driver to lose control of thevehicle.The electrical steering wheel adjustmentfeature can be operated at any time.Therefore, do not leave children unattendedin the vehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to avehicle could result in an accident and/orserious personal injury.

Make sureRyou can reach the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent at the elbowsRyou can move your legs freelyRall displays (including malfunction and

indicator lamps) on the instrument clusterare clearly visible

84 Multifunction steering wheelCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 84

Steering wheel adjustment

X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Movestalk in direction of arrows :.

X Adjusting steering wheel up or down:Move stalk in direction of arrows ;.

i The memory function (Y page 88) letsyou store the settings for the steeringwheel together with the settings for theseat position and the exterior rear viewmirrors.

Easy-entry/exit featureThis feature allows the driver an easier entryinto and exit from the vehicle. When enteringand exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel isin its uppermost position.The easy-entry/exit feature can be activatedor deactivated in the Convenience submenuof the control system (Y page 127).

G Warning!You must make sure no one can becometrapped or injured by the moving steeringwheel when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated.To stop steering wheel movement do one ofthe following:RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk.RPress one of the memory position buttons.RPress memory button M.

Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Children could open the driver’s door andunintentionally activate the easy-entry/exitfeature, which could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,the steering wheel will return to its last setposition when you close the driver’s door withthe ignition switched on. The steering wheelwill also return to its last set position whenyou insert the SmartKey into the starterswitch or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton once with the driver’s door closed.

i The last set steering wheel position isstored when the ignition is switched off orthe position is stored in memory(Y page 89).

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,the steering wheel tilts upwards when youremove the SmartKey from the starter switch.The steering wheel also tilts upwards whenyou open the driver’s door with the SmartKeyin starter switch position 0 or 1 or theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button in position 1.

i When the current position for the steeringwheel is in the uppermost tilt position, thesteering wheel will no longer be able tomove upward when the easy-entry/exitfeature is activated.The adjustment procedure is brieflyinterrupted when the engine is started.

G Warning!Let the system complete the adjustmentprocedure before setting the vehicle inmotion. All steering wheel adjustment mustbe completed before setting the vehicle inmotion. Driving off with the steering wheelstill adjusting could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle.

Multifunction steering wheel 85

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 85

Z

Crash-responsive exit aidWhen you open the driver’s door after anaccident has occurred, the steering columnmoves up. The position of the SmartKey in thestarter switch is insignificant. This functionfacilitates exiting as well as rescue of vehicleoccupants.The crash-responsive exit aid can only betriggered when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated via the control system.

Mirrors

NotesAdjust the interior and exterior rear viewmirrors before driving so that you have a goodview of the road and traffic conditions.

Interior rear view mirrorX Adjust the interior rear view mirror

manually.

Exterior rear view mirrors

G Warning!Exercise care when using the passenger-sideexterior rear view mirror. The mirror surfaceis convex (outwardly curved surface for awider field of view). Objects in mirror arecloser than they appear. Check your interiorrear view mirror and glance over yourshoulder before changing lanes.

i You can store the settings for the exteriorrear view mirror position with the memoryfunction (Y page 88).

X Switch on the ignition.X Press button : for the driver’s side

exterior rear view mirror or button ; forthe passenger-side exterior rear viewmirror.

X Press adjustment button = up, down, leftor right according to the desired setting.

! If an exterior rear view mirror was forciblyhit from the front, manually snap it backinto place.

i At low ambient temperatures, the exteriorrear view mirrors will be heatedautomatically.

Auto-dimming rear view mirrorsThe exterior rear view mirror on the driver’sside and the interior rear view mirror willrespond automatically to glare when theignition is switched on and incoming lightfrom headlamps falls on the sensor in theinterior rear view mirror.The rear view mirrors will not react if theautomatic transmission is set to reverse gearR or the interior lighting is switched on.

86 MirrorsCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 86

G Warning!The auto dimming function does not react ifincoming light is not aimed directly at sensorsin the interior rear view mirror.The interior rear view mirror and the exteriorrear view mirror on the driver’s side do notreact, for example, if the wind screen isinstalled.Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles(incident light) could blind you. As a result,you may not be able to observe trafficconditions and could cause an accident.

Exterior rear view mirror parking position

To assist during parking maneuvers, you canset the passenger-side exterior rear viewmirror so that you can see the rear wheel andthe road curb.

Setting and storing the parking position

X Switch on the ignition.X Press button ;, to select the passenger-

side exterior rear view mirror.X Shift the automatic transmission into

reverse gear R.The passenger-side exterior rear viewmirror moves to the preset parkingposition.

X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rearview mirror with adjustment button = so

that you see the rear wheel and the roadcurb.The exterior rear view mirror parkingposition is stored.

You can also store the parking position usingthe memory button M (Y page 89).X Switch on the ignition.X Press button ;, to select the passenger-

side exterior rear view mirror.X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear

view mirror with adjustment button = sothat you see the rear wheel and the roadcurb.

X Press memory button M and within3 seconds, press one of the arrows ofadjustment button =.The parking position is stored if the exteriorrear view mirror does not move.

i If the exterior rear view mirror does move,repeat the above steps. After the setting isstored, you can move the exterior rear viewmirror again.

Calling up the parking positionX Switch on the ignition.X Press button ;, to select the passenger-

side exterior rear view mirror.X Shift the automatic transmission into

reverse gear R.The passenger-side exterior rear viewmirror moves to the stored parkingposition.

The passenger-side exterior rear view mirrorreturns to its previously stored drivingpositionR10 seconds after you have put the gear

selector lever out of reverse gear RRimmediately once your vehicle exceeds a

speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)Rimmediately when you press button : to

select the driver’s side exterior rear viewmirror

Mirrors 87

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 87

Z

Power-folding exterior rear view mirrors

This feature is only available in Canadavehicles.

! Before you drive the vehicle through anautomatic car wash, fold in the exterior rearview mirrors. Otherwise they may getdamaged.

Folding in and out automatically The function must be activated in theConvenience submenu (Y page 127).The exterior rear view mirrors fold inautomatically as soon as the vehicle is lockedfrom the outside.The exterior rear view mirrors fold outautomatically as soon as the vehicle isunlocked and the driver’s or front passengerdoor is subsequently opened.

SynchronizingThe power-folding rear view mirrors may haveto be synchronized after the vehicle batteryhas been disconnected or discharged. If theexterior rear view mirrors do not fold properlyupon locking or unlocking the vehicle, do thefollowing:X Make sure the power-folding function in the

control system is activated (Y page 127).X Fold each exterior rear view mirror out

completely (Y page 88).When the exterior rear view mirrors foldproperly upon locking the vehicle, the exteriormirrors are synchronized. Otherwise repeatthe above steps.

Folding in and out manuallyThe exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate ifthey are not folded out completely.

X Folding in: Briefly press button :.Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.

i At speeds above approximately 60 mph(100 km/h), you will not be able to fold theexterior mirrors in.

Memory function

NotesWith the memory function you can store upto three different configurations per frontseat.Each memory position button on the driver’sside can store all of the following settings:RSeat position and lumbar supportRSteering wheel positionRExterior rear view mirrors’ position

G Warning!Do not activate the memory function whiledriving. Activating the memory function whiledriving could cause the driver to lose controlof the vehicle.

Each memory position button on thepassenger side can store all of the followingsettings:RSeat position and lumbar supportRMulticontour seat: previously saved

settings

88 Memory functionCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 88

Storing positions into memoryX Adjust the seats.X On the driver’s side, also adjust the

steering wheel and exterior rear viewmirrors to the desired positions.

X Press memory button M once and within3 seconds press memory position button1, 2 or 3.When the settings are stored to theselected position, an acknowledgementsignal sounds.

Recalling positions from memoryX Press and hold desired memory position

button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has movedto the stored position completely. On thedriver’s side, also wait for the steeringwheel and exterior rear view mirrors tomove to the stored position.

i Releasing the memory position buttonstops movement to the stored positionsimmediately.

Lighting

Notesi If you drive in countries with left-hand

driving, you must have the headlampsmodified for symmetrical low beams.

Relevant information can be obtained atany authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i The active Bi-Xenon headlamps increaseusable illumination over conventionalheadlamps because they follow thecurvature of the road ahead. The beams ofthe active Bi-Xenon headlamps shift toeither side according to the vehicle’ssteering angle and speed.

Exterior lamp switch

1 W Standing lamps, left2 X Standing lamps, right3 $ Off

Daytime running lamp mode4 Ã Automatic headlamp mode

Daytime running lamp mode5 T Parking lamps (also tail lamps,

license plate lamps, side markerlamps and instrument panel lamps)

6 L Low-beam headlamps or high-beamheadlamps

7 N Front fog lamps8 R Rear fog lamp

i The exterior lamps (except standinglamps or parking lamps) go outautomatically when you remove theSmartKey from the starter switch or openthe driver’s door with the ignition switchedoff.When the parking lamps or the rear foglamp are switched on and you remove the

Lighting 89

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 89

Z

SmartKey from the starter switch and openthe driver’s door, an acoustic signalsounds.In addition the message Lights Are Still On appears in the multifunctiondisplay.Switch off the parking lamps or the rear foglamp manually.

! Failure to switch off the parking lampswhen leaving the vehicle may result in adischarged battery.

Low-beam headlamps The low-beam headlamps can be switched onand off with the exterior lamp switch.X Switch on the ignition.X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp

switch to position L.The following lamps come on:RLow-beam headlampsRTail lampsRParking lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lampsRInstrument panel lampsRGreen indicator lamp T in the exterior

lamp switchX Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp

switch to position $.

Automatic headlamp mode The following lamps come on and go outautomatically depending on the brightness ofthe ambient light:RLow-beam headlampsRTail lampsRParking lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lamps

G Warning!If the exterior lamp switch is set to Ã, theheadlamps will not automatically come onunder foggy conditions.To minimize risk to you and to others, activateheadlamps by turning exterior lamp switch toL when driving or when traffic and/orambient lighting conditions require you to doso.In low ambient lighting conditions, only switchfrom position Ã to L with the vehicleat a standstill in a safe location. Switchingfrom Ã to L will briefly switch off theheadlamps. Doing so while driving in lowambient lighting conditions may result in anaccident.The automatic headlamp feature is only an aidto the driver. The driver is responsible for theoperation of the vehicle’s lights at all times.

X Switching on: Turn the exterior lampswitch to position Ã.

The following lamps come on and go outdepending on the brightness of the ambientlight with the SmartKey in starter switchposition 1 or the KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton pressed once:RTail lampsRParking lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lampsWhen the engine is running, the low-beamheadlamps will also come on and turn offautomatically.Canada only: High-beam headlamps are onlyavailable with the exterior lamp switch inposition L.

Daytime running lamp mode In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode ismandatory and therefore in a constant mode.In the USA, the daytime running lamp modeis deactivated by default.

90 LightingCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 90

X Activate the daytime running lamp modeusing the control system, see “Switchingdaytime running lamp mode on or off (USAonly)” (Y page 124).

X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position$ or Ã.When the engine is running, the low-beamheadlamps come on.In low ambient lighting conditions, thefollowing lamps will come on additionally:RTail lampsRParking lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lamps

With the daytime running lamp modeactivated and the engine running, you cannotswitch off the low-beam headlamps manually.

Canada onlyWith the exterior lamp switch in position$ or Ã, you cannot switch on thehigh-beam headlamps.The high-beam flasher is available at all times.X For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp

switch to position L to permit activationof the high-beam headlamps.

When the engine is running, and youRshift from a driving position to neutral

position N or park position P with thevehicle at a standstill, the low-beamheadlamps will go out with a delay of3 minutesRturn the exterior lamp switch to positionT, the low-beam headlamps, the tailand parking lamps, the license plate lampsand the side marker lamps come onRturn the exterior lamp switch to positionL, the manual headlamp mode haspriority over the daytime running lampmodeThe corresponding exterior lamps come on(Y page 89).

USA onlyYou can only switch on the high-beamheadlamps in low ambient lighting conditions.The high-beam flasher is available at all times.When the engine is running, and you turn theexterior lamp switch to position T orL, the manual headlamp mode haspriority over the daytime running lamp mode.The corresponding exterior lamps come on(Y page 89).

Fog lamps Fog lamps cannot be switched on with theexterior lamp switch in position Ã.

G Warning!In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,only switch from position Ã to L withthe vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.Switching from Ã to L will brieflyswitch off the headlamps. Doing so whiledriving in low ambient lighting conditions mayresult in an accident.

Fog lamps will operate with the parking lampsand/or the low-beam headlamps on. Foglamps should only be used in conjunction withlow-beam headlamps. Consult your State orProvince Motor Vehicle Regulationsregarding permissible lamp operation.X Switch on the ignition.X Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionT or L (Y page 89).

X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out theexterior lamp switch to first stop.The green indicator lamp N in theexterior lamp switch comes on.

X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out theexterior lamp switch to second stop.The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps, thegreen N and the yellow indicator lampR in the exterior lamp switch come on.

X Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch toits stop.

Lighting 91

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 91

Z

Locator lighting and night security illumination Locator lighting and night securityillumination are described in the “Controlsystem” section, see “Switching locatorlighting on or off” (Y page 125) and“Switching night security illumination(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on oroff” (Y page 125).

Combination switch

Turn signals X Press the combination switch in direction

of arrow ; or ?.The corresponding turn signal indicatorlamp ! or # in the instrumentcluster flashes.

The combination switch resets automaticallyafter major steering wheel movements.To signal minor directional changes:X Press the combination switch only to the

point of resistance in direction ofarrow ; or ? and release.The corresponding turn signal lamps willflash three times.

High beam X Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionL (Y page 89).

X Switching on: Push the combinationswitch in direction of arrow :.The high-beam headlamp indicator lampK in the instrument cluster comes on.

X Switching off: Pull the combination switchin direction of arrow = to its originalposition.

i Also note the information on high-beamheadlamps with activated automaticheadlamp mode (Y page 90) or the daytimerunning lamp mode (Y page 90).

High-beam flasher X Switching on: Pull the combination switch

briefly in direction of arrow =.

Hazard warning flasherThe hazard warning flasher can be switchedon at all times, even with the SmartKeyremoved from the starter switch.The hazard warning flasher comes onautomatically when an air bag deploys.The hazard warning flasher switch is locatedon the upper part of the center console.

92 LightingCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 92

X Switching on: Press hazard warningflasher switch :.All turn signal lamps are flashing.

i With the hazard warning flasher activatedand the combination switch set for eitherleft or right turn, only the respective left orright turn signals will operate when theignition is switched on.

X Switching off: Press hazard warningflasher switch : again.

i If the hazard warning flasher has beenactivated automatically, press hazardwarning flasher switch : to switch it off.

Headlamp cleaning system

X Switch on the ignition.X Press headlamp cleaning button :.

The headlamps are cleaned with a high-pressure water jet.

The headlamps will be cleaned automaticallywhen you haveRswitched on the headlamps

andRthe windshield wipers have wiped the

windshield with washer fluid fifteen timesThe counter resets when you switch off theignition.For information on filling up the washerreservoir, see “Washer system and headlampcleaning system” (Y page 185).

Corner-illuminating lampsThe corner-illuminating lamps improveillumination of the area in the direction intowhich you are turning.The corner-illuminating lamps will onlyoperate in low ambient lighting conditions.If you are driving faster than 25 mph(40 km/h) the corner-illuminating function isnot available.

Switching onX Make sure the engine is running.X Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionL or Ã (Y page 89).

orX Activate the daytime running lamp mode

(Y page 90).X Switch on the left or right turn signal,

depending on whether you are turning leftor right.The respective corner-illuminating lampcomes on. If you have switched on the turnsignal for one side but turn the steeringwheel in the other direction, the corner-illuminating lamp comes on on the side ofthe turn signal.

orX Turn steering wheel in desired direction.

Driving forward: The corner-illuminatinglamp on the side of your steering directioncomes on.Driving in reverse: The corner-illuminatinglamp opposite to your steering directioncomes on.

The corner-illuminating lamps will come onautomatically depending on the steeringangle, even if you did not switch on either turnsignal. If the corner-illuminating lamps cameon automatically, they will also go outautomatically depending on the steeringangle and vehicle speed.The corner-illuminating lamps temporarilycome on on both sides of the vehicle if youturn the steering wheel in one direction and

Lighting 93

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 93

Z

then again in the other direction shortlythereafter.The corner-illuminating lamp remains lit for ashort time only. It then goes outautomatically.

Switching offX Switch off the left or right turn signal.orX Steer straight ahead.

The corner-illuminating lamp goes out.

i There may be a brief delay before thecorner-illuminating lamps go out.

Interior lightingThe interior lighting controls are located inthe overhead control panel.

: p Left reading lamp on/off ; p Right reading lamp on/off= c Interior lighting on/off ? Slide switch for automatic control

Automatic control X Activating: Slide switch ? to the left.

The interior lighting and the entry/exitlamps come on in darkness, when youRunlock the vehicleRremove the SmartKey from the starter

switch (Interior Lighting Delayed Switch-off must be switched on(Y page 126))

Ropen a doorRopen the trunk

The interior lighting goes out after a shorttime.

i If a door remains open, the interior lampsgo out automatically after approximately5 minutes.

X Deactivating: Slide switch ? to the right.

Manual control ! An interior lamp switched on manually

does not go out automatically.Leaving an interior lamp switched on for anextended period of time with the engineturned off could result in a dischargedbattery.

X Switching interior lighting on/off: Pressswitch c.

X Switching reading lamps on/off: Pressrespective switch p.

Courtesy lightingFor better orientation in the dark, courtesylamps will illuminate the interior of yourvehicle as follows:With parking lamps switched on:Rthe door handlesRthe driver and passenger footwellsWith SmartKey in starter switch position 1:Rthe door handlesRthe center console

i If you turn the SmartKey in the starterswitch to position 0 and switch off theheadlamps, the door handle lamps willremain lit for approximately 5 minutes.

94 LightingCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 94

Wipers

Notes! Do not operate the wipers when the

windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates ona windshield might scratch the glass and/or damage the wiper blades when wipingoccurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessaryto operate the wipers in dry weatherconditions, always operate the wipers withwasher fluid.

Windshield wipersX Observe notes on page (Y page 95).

Switching on/off

Combination switch1 0 Windshield wipers off2 I Intermittent wiping3 II Slow continuous wiping4 III Fast continuous wipingA í Single wipe/ î Wiping with

washer fluid

X Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the desired

position, depending on the intensity of therain.

Intermittent wiping Only switch on intermittent wiping under wetweather conditions or in the presence ofprecipitation.

When you select intermittent wiping, the rainsensor is activated. The rain sensor sets asuitable wiping interval depending on thewetness of the sensor surface automatically.

! Do not leave windshield wipers on anintermittent setting when the vehicle istaken to an automatic car wash or duringwindshield cleaning. Windshield wipers willoperate in the presence of water sprayedon the windshield, and windshield wipersmay be damaged as a result.

! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt onthe surface of the rain sensor or opticaleffects may cause the windshield wipers towipe in an undesired fashion. This couldthen damage the windshield wiper bladesor scratch the windshield. You shouldtherefore switch off the windshield wiperswhen weather conditions are dry.

Intermittent wiping interval is dependent onthe wetness of the windshield. After the initialwipe, pauses between wipes are controlled bythe rain sensor automatically.X Turn the combination switch to position I.Intermittent wiping is interrupted when thevehicle is at a standstill and a door is opened.This protects persons getting into or out ofthe vehicle from being sprayed.Intermittent wiping will be continued when alldoors are closed andRthe automatic transmission is in drive

position D or reverse gear RorRthe wiper setting is changed using the

combination switch

Single wipeX Press the combination switch briefly in

direction of arrow A to the resistancepoint.The windshield wipers wipe one timewithout washer fluid.

Wipers 95

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 95

Z

Wiping with washer fluidX Press the combination switch in direction

of arrow A past the resistance point.The windshield wipers operate with washerfluid.

i To prevent smears on the windshield ornoisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe withwasher fluid every now and then even whenit is raining.

For information on filling up the washerreservoir, see “Washer system and headlampcleaning system” (Y page 185).For information on cleaning the headlampswith washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaningsystem” (Y page 93).

Problems with wipers! If anything blocks the windshield wipers

(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them offimmediately.For safety reasons, do the following beforeattempting to remove any blockage:RStop the vehicle in a safe location.RRemove the SmartKey from the starter

switch.orRTurn off the engine by pressing the

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button andopen the driver’s door (with the driver’sdoor open, starter switch is in position0, same as with SmartKey removed fromstarter switch).REngage the parking brake.RRemove blockage.RTurn the windshield wipers on again.

If the windshield wipers fail to function atall with the combination switch in positionI,Rset the combination switch to the next

higher wiper speedRhave the windshield wipers checked at

the nearest authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter

Power windows

Opening and closingThe windows are opened and closedelectrically. The switches for all windows arelocated on the driver’s door. The switch foroperating the passenger-side windows islocated on the passenger door.G Observe Safety notes, see page 51.

G Warning!When closing the windows, make sure thereis no danger of anyone being harmed by theclosing procedure.The door windows are equipped with theexpress operation and automatic reversalfunction. If in express operation mode a doorwindow encounters an obstruction thatblocks its path, the automatic reversalfunction will stop the door window and openit slightly.The door windows operate differently whenthe switch is pulled and held. See the “Closingwhen a door window is blocked” section fordetails.The closing of the door windows can beimmediately halted by releasing the switch or,if the switch was pulled past the resistancepoint and released, by pressing or pulling therespective switch.The closing of the rear side windows can beimmediately halted by releasing the switch.If a window encounters an obstruction thatblocks its path in a circumstance where youare closing the windows by pressing and

96 Power windowsCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 96

holding button & on the SmartKey or bypressing and holding the lock button (vehicleswith KEYLESS-GO) on an outside door handle,the automatic reversal function will notoperate.

i You can also open or close the windowsusing the SmartKey, see “Summer openingfeature” (Y page 156) and “Convenienceclosing feature” (Y page 156).

i After switching off the ignition orremoving the SmartKey from the starterswitch, you can operate the windows untilyou open a door. If no door was opened youcan operate the windows for up to5 minutes.

Door windows i When you open the door windows while

the hardtop is open, the rear side windowswill also open automatically.

X Switch on the ignition.X Opening/closing: Press or pull and hold

switch : or ; to the resistance point.The corresponding door window movesdownward or upward until you release theswitch.

X Express operation: Press or pullswitch : or ; past the resistance pointand release.The corresponding door window opens orcloses completely.

X Stopping during express operation:Press or pull the respective switch again.

Closing when a door window is blockedG Warning!Make sure that nobody can become trappedand be seriously or even fatally injured whenclosing a door window with greater force orwithout automatic reversal function.

If the upward movement of a door window isblocked during the closing procedure, thedoor window will stop and open slightly.X Immediately after the door window has

stopped because it was blocked, pull andhold the respective switch upward until thedoor window is fully closed.The door window closes with greater force.

If the door window is blocked again and opensslightly:X Immediately after the door window was

blocked, pull and hold the respectiveswitch upward until the door window is fullyclosed.The door window closes without automaticreversal function.

G Warning!Pulling and holding the switch to close thedoor window immediately after it had beenblocked two times will cause the door windowto close without any reversal function for aslong as you hold the switch.

Opening and closing the rear side windows X Opening: Open the door window.X Press switch : or ; again.

The corresponding rear side window willopen completely.

Power windows 97

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 97

Z

X Closing: Close the door window.X Pull and hold switch : or ;.

The corresponding rear side window movesupward until you release the switch.

Closing with KEYLESS-GOWhen locking the vehicle, you cansimultaneously close the windows.X Press and hold the lock button on an

outside door handle (Y page 71) until thewindows are completely closed.

X Release the lock button on the outside doorhandle to interrupt the closing procedure.

Synchronizing power windowsThe windows must be synchronized after thebattery has been disconnected or if thewindows cannot be fully closed (expressoperation).Each window must be synchronizedseparately.X Close all doors.X Switch on the ignition.X Pull and hold switch : or ; (Y page 97)

until the respective window is closed.The window opens again slightly.

X Pull and hold the respective switch oncemore immediately until the window isclosed completely.

X Hold the respective switch forapproximately 1 second.The window is synchronized.

Driving and parking

Safety notes

G Warning!Make sure absolutely no objects areobstructing the pedals’ range of movement.Keep the driver’s footwell clear of allobstacles. If there are any floormats or

carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedalsstill have sufficient clearance.During sudden driving or braking maneuversthe objects could get caught between orunder the pedals. You could then no longerbrake or accelerate. This could lead toaccidents and injury.

G Warning!With the engine not running, there is no powerassistance for the brake and steeringsystems. In this case, it is important to keepin mind that a considerably higher degree ofeffort is necessary to brake and steer thevehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.

Starting the engine

G Warning!Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to yourhealth. All exhaust gas contains carbonmonoxide (CO), and inhaling it can causeunconsciousness and possible death.Do not run the engine in confined areas (suchas a garage) which are not properly ventilated.If you think that exhaust gas fumes areentering the vehicle while driving, have thecause determined and correctedimmediately. If you must drive under theseconditions, drive only with at least onewindow fully open at all times.

98 Driving and parkingCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 98

Automatic transmission

Gearshift pattern for automatic transmissionj Park position with gear selector lever lockk Reverse geari Neutral positionh Drive position

For more information, see “Automatictransmission” (Y page 103).X Make sure the automatic transmission is in

park position P.

With SmartKey X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to

position 3 (Y page 78) and release it.The engine starts automatically.

With KEYLESS-GO

G Warning!As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, thevehicle can be started. Therefore, never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle, as theycould otherwise accidentally start the engine.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Donot leave children unattended in the vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Achild’s unsupervised access to a vehicle couldresult in an accident and/or serious personalinjury.

You can start your vehicle without theSmartKey in the starter switch using theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button.The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button: USA only; Canada only

X Depress the brake pedal during the startingprocedure.

X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

once.The engine starts automatically.

Starting difficulties ! Remember that extended starting

attempts can drain the battery.

The engine does not start. You can hear the starter.There could be a malfunction in the engineelectronics or in the fuel supply system.Carry out the following steps:X If you are starting the engine with the

SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starter

Driving and parking 99

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 99

Z

switch to position 0 and repeat the startingprocedure.

X If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS-GO: Close any doors that may be open toallow for better detection of the SmartKey.

orX Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio

signals from another source may beinterfering with the KEYLESS-GO function.

X Repeat the starting procedure.

If the engine does not start after severalstarting attempts:X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center or call Roadside Assistance.

The engine does not start. You cannot hear the starter.The battery may not be charged sufficiently.X Get a jump start (Y page 285).

If the engine will not start despite a jumpstart:X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center or call Roadside Assistance.The starter has been exposed to excessivetemperatures.X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes.X Repeat the starting procedure.

If the engine does not start after severalstarting attempts:X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz


Driving off

G Warning!On slippery road surfaces, never downshift inorder to obtain braking action. This couldresult in drive wheel slip and reduced vehiclecontrol. Your vehicle’s ABS will not preventthis type of loss of control.

! Do not run a cold engine at high enginespeeds. Running a cold engine at highengine speeds may shorten the service lifeof the engine. This is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.SL 63 AMG: At engine temperatures below68‡ (20†), the engine’s maximum speedis restricted in order to protect it fromdamage. Avoid driving your vehicle at fullspeed when the engine is cold to preventpremature engine wear and/or diminishedcomfort.

! If an acoustic warning sounds and themessage Release Parking Brakeappears in the multifunction display whendriving off, you have forgotten to releasethe parking brake.Release the parking brake.

! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This maycause serious damage to the drivetrainwhich is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

! Simultaneously depressing theaccelerator pedal and applying the brakesreduces engine performance and causespremature brake and drivetrain wear whichis not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

i Once the vehicle is in motion, theautomatic central locking function engagesand the locking knobs in the doors movedown.The automatic central locking function canbe switched off (Y page 126).


G Warning!It is dangerous to shift the automatictransmission out of park position P or neutralposition N if the engine speed is higher thanidle speed. If your foot is not firmly on thebrake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 100

quickly forward or in reverse. You could losecontrol of the vehicle and hit someone orsomething. Only shift into gear when theengine is idling normally and when your rightfoot is firmly on the brake pedal.

! Only shift the automatic transmission intoreverse gear R or park position P when thevehicle is stopped. Otherwise theautomatic transmission could be damaged.

X Depress the brake pedal.The gear selector lever lock is released.

X Shift the automatic transmission into driveposition D or reverse gear R.

i Shifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position P is only possible with thebrake pedal depressed.Only depressing the brake pedal releasesthe gear selector lever lock.

X Wait for the gear selection process tocomplete before setting the vehicle inmotion.

X If engaged, release the parking brake.X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.After a cold start, the automatic transmissionshifts at a higher engine speed. This allowsthe catalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature earlier.For more information on driving, see “Drivinginstructions” (Y page 209).

Problems while driving

The engine runs erratically and misfiresRAn ignition cable may be damaged.RThe engine electronics may not be

operating properly.RUnburned gasoline may have entered the

catalytic converter and damaged it.

X Give very little gas.X Have the problem checked at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

The coolant temperature is above 248‡ (120†)The coolant is too hot and is no longer coolingthe engine.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon

as possible.X Turn off the engine immediately.X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.X Check the coolant level and add coolant if

necessary (Y page 184).

In case of accident If the vehicle is leaking fuel:X Do not start the engine under any

circumstances.X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the

roadway.X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.

If the extent of the damage cannot bedetermined:X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz


If no damage on major assemblies, fuelsystem, and engine mount can bedetermined:X Start the engine in the usual manner.

Parking

G Warning!Do not park this vehicle in areas wherecombustible materials such as grass, hay orleaves can come into contact with the hotexhaust system. These materials could beignited and cause a vehicle fire.

Driving and parking 101

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 101

Z

Vehicle movement may result in seriouspersonal injury or damage to the vehicle orvehicle drivetrain. Therefore, always do thefollowing before turning off the engine andleaving the vehicle:RKeep right foot on the brake pedal.REngage the parking brake.RShift the automatic transmission into park

position P.RSlowly release the brake pedal.RWhen parked on an incline, always turn the

front wheels towards the road curb.RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch to

position 0 and remove the SmartKey fromthe starter switch, or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the

vehicle when leaving.

Parking brake

G Warning!Engaging the parking brake while the vehicleis in motion can cause the rear wheels to lockup. You could lose control of the vehicle andcause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’sbrake lights do not light up when the parkingbrake is engaged.

G Warning!When leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the starter switch, take it withyou, and lock the vehicle. Do not leavechildren unattended in the vehicle, or withaccess to an unlocked vehicle. Children couldrelease the parking brake and/or shift theautomatic transmission out of park positionP, either of which could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

X Releasing: Pull on release handle :.When the ignition is switched on or theengine is running, the brake warning lamp$ (USA only) or J (Canada only) inthe instrument cluster goes out.

X Engaging: Step on parking brakepedal ; firmly.When the engine is running, the brakewarning lamp $ (USA only) or J(Canada only) in the instrument clustercomes on.

Turning off the engine

G Warning!Do not turn off the engine before the vehiclehas come to a complete stop. With the enginenot running, there is no power assistance forthe brake and steering systems. In this case,it is important to keep in mind that aconsiderably higher degree of effort isnecessary to brake and steer the vehicle.

X Shift the automatic transmission into parkposition P.

X Engage the parking brake.

i Always engage the parking brake inaddition to shifting the automatictransmission into park position P.

With SmartKey X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to

position 0.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 102


The SmartKey can only be removed from thestarter switch with the automatictransmission in park position P.

With KEYLESS-GOX Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.

With the driver’s door closed, the starterswitch is now in position 1. With the driver’sdoor opened, the starter switch is set toposition 0, same as the SmartKey removedfrom the starter switch (Y page 78).

If an acoustic warning sounds, you have triedto turn off the engine with the KEYLESS-GOstart/stop button while the automatictransmission was not in park position P.Read and observe messages that may appearin the multifunction display (Y page 234).


IntroductionFor information on driving with an automatictransmission, see “Driving and parking”(Y page 98).

G Warning!Make sure absolutely no objects areobstructing the pedals’ range of movement.Keep the driver’s footwell clear of allobstacles. If there are any floormats orcarpets in the footwell, make sure the pedalsstill have sufficient clearance.During sudden driving or braking maneuversthe objects could get caught between orunder the pedals. You could then no longerbrake or accelerate. This could lead toaccidents and injury.

! Allow the engine to warm up under lowload use. Do not place full load on theengine until the operating temperature hasbeen reached.

Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for anextended period when driving off onslippery road surfaces.This may cause serious damage to theengine and the drivetrain which is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

i During the brief warm-up, transmissionupshifting is delayed. This allows thecatalytic converter to heat up more quicklyto operating temperature.

Gear selector lever

Gearshift pattern for automatic transmissionj Park position with gear selector lever lockk Reverse geari Neutral positionh Drive position

G Warning!It is dangerous to shift the automatictransmission out of park position P or neutralposition N if the engine speed is higher thanidle speed. If your foot is not firmly on thebrake pedal, the vehicle could acceleratequickly forward or in reverse. You could losecontrol of the vehicle and hit someone orsomething. Only shift into gear when theengine is idling normally and when your rightfoot is firmly on the brake pedal.

! Only shift the automatic transmission intoreverse gear R or park position P when the

Automatic transmission 103

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 103

Z

vehicle is stopped. Otherwise theautomatic transmission could be damaged.

i Shifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position P is only possible with thebrake pedal depressed.Only depressing the brake pedal releasesthe gear selector lever lock.

i The current gear selector lever positioncorresponds with the current transmissionposition.The current transmission position P, R, N,or D appears in the right multifunctiondisplay (Y page 104).

There are additional indicators on the coverof the shifting gate showing the current gearselector lever position.The indicators come on when you insert theSmartKey into the starter switch, and go outwhen you remove the SmartKey from thestarter switch.

Shifting procedureThe automatic transmission selects individualgears automatically, depending onRthe selected gear range (Y page 106)Rthe selected program mode:

C/S (Y page 106)orM (vehicles with AMG Sport Package,SL 63 AMG and SL 65 AMG only)(Y page 109)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe vehicle speedWith drive position D selected, you caninfluence transmission shifting byRlimiting the gear rangeRextending the gear rangeRchanging the gears manually (vehicles with

AMG Sport Package, SL 63 AMG andSL 65 AMG only)

SL 63 AMG: Double-clutching is active whendownshifting in all program modes. Double-clutching reduces load-alteration effects andsupports sporty driving. The degree to whichyou perceive double-clutching acousticallyvaries depending on the selected programmode.

Transmission positionsThe current transmission position appears inthe right multifunction display.

: Transmission position indicator

104 Automatic transmissionCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 104

Effect

B Park positionShift the automatic transmissioninto park position P only when thevehicle is stopped. The parkposition is not intended to serve asa brake when the vehicle is parked.Rather, the driver should alwaysengage the parking brake inaddition to shifting the automatictransmission into park position P tosecure the vehicle.The SmartKey can only be removedfrom the starter switch with thegear selector lever in park positionP. With the SmartKey removed fromthe starter switch, the gear selectorlever is locked in park position P.If the vehicle’s electrical system ismalfunctioning, the gear selectorlever could remain locked in parkposition P.X Have the vehicle’s electrical

system checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center as soonas possible.

C Reverse gearShift the automatic transmissioninto reverse gear R only when thevehicle is stopped.

Effect

A Neutral positionNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive axle. When thebrakes are released, the vehicle canbe moved freely (pushed or towed).To avoid damage to thetransmission, never shift theautomatic transmission into neutralposition N while driving.Exception: If the ESP® is switchedoff or malfunctioning, shift theautomatic transmission into neutralposition N if the vehicle is in dangerof skidding.

! Coasting the vehicle, or drivingfor any other reason with theautomatic transmission inneutral position N can result intransmission damage that is notcovered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

7 Drive positionThe automatic transmission shiftsautomatically. All forward gears areavailable.

Driving tips

Kickdown Use the kickdown when you want maximumacceleration.X U.S. vehicles except AMG vehicles:

Fully depress the accelerator pedal.Depending on the engine speed theautomatic transmission shifts into a lowergear.

X Canada vehicles and AMG vehicles:Depress the accelerator pedal past thepoint of resistance.Depending on the engine speed theautomatic transmission shifts into a lowergear.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 105

Z

Working on the vehicle

G Warning!When working on the vehicle, engage theparking brake and shift the automatictransmission into park position P. Otherwisethe vehicle could roll away which could resultin an accident and/or serious personal injury.

Gear rangesWith the automatic transmission in driveposition D and driving in automatic programmode C or S, you can limit or extend the gearrange, see “One-touch gearshifting”(Y page 108).The current gear range appears in the rightmultifunction display.

: Gear range indicator

Effect

= With this selection you can use thebraking effect of the engine.

5 Allows the use of the engine’sbraking effect when drivingRon steep downgradesRin mountainous regionsRunder extreme operating

conditions

4 For maximum use of the engine’sbraking effect on very steep orlengthy downgrades.

Automatic shift program

Program mode selector switch

C Comfort For comfort driving

S Sport For sporty driving

Program mode selector switch on vehicles withAMG Sport Package.



M Manual For manual gearshifting(Y page 109)


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 106

Program mode selector dial on SL 63 AMG

C Comfort For standard driving


S+ Sport Plus For sporty driving withshorter shift times

M Manual For manual gearshifting(Y page 109)

RS RACE START For optimumacceleration from astanding start

i Program mode RS cannot be selectedwhile driving. For more information, see“RACE START (SL 63 AMG)” (Y page 141).

Program mode selector switch on SL 65 AMG


S Sport For standard driving

M MANUAL For manual gearshifting(Y page 109)

The current program mode appears in theright multifunction display.

: Program mode indicator

i SL 63 AMG: In addition, the currentlyselected program mode is indicated in redon the program mode selector dial.

You should only change the program modewhen the automatic transmission is in parkposition P.Automatic program mode S will not be stored.When the engine is turned off with theautomatic program mode S selected, theautomatic transmission will go to theautomatic program mode C when the engineis restarted.SL 63 AMG: Automatic program mode S+ willnot be stored. When the engine is turned offwith automatic program mode S+ selected,the automatic transmission will go toautomatic program mode C when the engineis restarted.X All models except SL 63 AMG: Press the

program mode selector switch repeatedlyuntil the letter of the desired program modeappears in the right multifunction display.

X SL 63 AMG: Turn the program modeselector dial until the letter of the desiredprogram mode appears in the rightmultifunction display.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 107

Z

Selecting program mode C means:RThe vehicle starts out more gentle, both

forward and reverse, except when drivingoff with full throttle.RTraction and driving stability are improved

on icy roads.RUpshifts occur earlier even when you give

more gas. The engine then operates atlower revolutions and the wheels are lesslikely to spin.

Selecting program mode S means thatupshifts occur later.

One-touch gearshiftingWith the automatic transmission in driveposition D and driving in automatic programmode C or S, you can limit or extend the gearrange using the gear selector lever or thesteering wheel gearshift control.SL 63 AMG and SL 65 AMG: For informationon using the gear selector lever or thesteering wheel gearshift control in manualprogram mode M, see “Manual shift program”(Y page 109).

Steering wheel gearshift control (exampleillustration)

i You cannot shift with the steering wheelgearshift control when the automatictransmission is in park position P, neutralposition N, or reverse gear R.

Limiting gear range


X Briefly press the gear selector lever to theleft in the D- direction.

orX Briefly pull left gearshift control :.

The automatic transmission will shift intothe next lower gear as permitted by theshift program. This action simultaneouslylimits the gear range of the automatictransmission.

i To avoid overrevving the engine whendownshifting, the automatic transmissionwill not shift into a lower gear if the engine’smaximum speed would be exceeded.

Extending gear rangeX Briefly press the gear selector lever to the

right in the D+ direction.orX Briefly pull right gearshift control ;.

The automatic transmission will shift intothe next higher gear as permitted by theshift program. This action simultaneouslyextends the gear range of the automatictransmission.

i If you press on the accelerator pedalwhen the engine has reached therevolution limit of the current gear range,the automatic transmission will upshiftbeyond any gear range limit selected.

Canceling gear range limitX Press and hold the gear selector lever to

the right in the D+ direction until D


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 108

reappears in the right multifunctiondisplay.

orX Pull and hold right gearshift control ; untilD reappears in the right multifunctiondisplay.The automatic transmission will shift fromthe current gear range directly into driveposition D.

Shifting into optimal gear range X Press and hold the gear selector lever to

the left in the D- direction.orX Pull and hold left gearshift control :.

The automatic transmission will select thegear range suited for optimal accelerationand deceleration automatically. This willinvolve shifting down one or more gears.

Manual shift programThe manual shift program is available onvehicles with AMG Sport Package, SL 63 AMGand SL 65 AMG only.Manual program mode M differs with regardto spontaneity, response time, and shiftingsmoothness from automatic program modesS or S+ (SL 63 AMG only).In manual program mode M, system-controlled automatic gearshifting is switchedoff. You need to change the gears by manuallyupshifting or downshifting using the gearselector lever or the steering wheel gearshiftcontrol.

Program mode selector dial on SL 63 AMG

C Comfort For standard driving


S+ Sport Plus For sporty driving withshorter shift times

M Manual For manual gearshifting

RS RACE START For optimumacceleration from astanding start

i Program mode RS cannot be selectedwhile driving. For more information, see“RACE START (SL 63 AMG)” (Y page 141).

i E 63 AMG: In addition, the currentlyselected program mode is indicated in redon the program mode selector dial.

i SL 63 AMG: In addition, the currentlyselected program mode is indicated in redon the program mode selector dial.

Program mode selector switch on SL 65 AMG


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 109

Z



M MANUAL For manual gearshifting

Program mode selector switch on vehicles withAMG Sport Package



M Manual For manual gearshifting

The current program mode appears in theright multifunction display (Y page 107).For information on automatic program mode(C or S), see “Automatic shift program”(Y page 106) and “One-touch gearshifting”(Y page 108).

Activating manual shift programX All models except SL 63 AMG: Press the

program mode selector switch repeatedlyuntil M appears in the right multifunctiondisplay.

X SL 63 AMG: Turn the program modeselector dial until M appears in the rightmultifunction display.The automatic transmission switches tomanual program mode M. Automaticshifting is switched off. The gear range isnot limited.

You can change the gears manually with driveposition D selected. You can upshift ordownshift through the gears in succession.

i Manual program mode M will not bestored. When the engine is turned off withmanual program mode M selected, theautomatic transmission will go toautomatic program mode C when theengine is restarted.

Upshifting! In manual program mode M, the

automatic transmission will not upshift,even if the engine has reached itsoverrevving range. Shift up into the nextgear before the engine has reached itsoverrevving range. Make absolutely certainthat the engine speed does not reach thered marking on the tachometer. Otherwisethe engine could be damaged which is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

X Briefly press the gear selector lever to theright in the D+ direction.

orX Briefly pull right gearshift control ;

(Y page 108).The automatic transmission shifts into thenext higher gear.

Upshift indicator

In manual program mode M, upshiftindicator ; in the right multifunction displayadvises you to upshift before the enginereaches the overspeed range. In addition,symbol ^ may appear instead of manualprogram mode symbol M in the rightmultifunction display. Thus you can drive at


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 110

the maximum engine speed for each gearwithout overrevving the engine.X Shift the automatic transmission from

current gear : into the next higher gear.The fuel supply will otherwise beinterrupted to prevent the engine fromoverrevving.

Downshifting


X Briefly press the gear selector lever to theleft in the D- direction.

orX Briefly pull left gearshift control :

(Y page 108).The automatic transmission shifts into thenext lower gear.

i For maximum acceleration, press andhold the gear selector lever to the left in theD- direction or pull and hold the leftgearshift control. Depending on the enginespeed the automatic transmission selectsthe optimal gear for maximumacceleration.

i When you brake or stop, the automatictransmission shifts down into a gear fromwhich you can easily accelerate or take off.

Kickdown Using the kickdown while driving in manualprogram mode M is not possible.

Deactivating manual shift programX All models except SL 63 AMG: Press the

program mode selector switch repeatedlyuntil C or S appears in the rightmultifunction display.

X SL 63 AMG: Turn the program modeselector dial until C or S appears in the rightmultifunction display.

orX Restart the engine.

The automatic transmission will go toautomatic program mode C.

Manual program mode M is not stored.

Emergency operation (limp-home mode)

If vehicle acceleration becomes lessresponsive or sluggish or the automatictransmission no longer shifts, the automatictransmission is most likely operating in limp-home (emergency operation) mode. In thismode only second gear and reverse gear Rcan be selected.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.X Shift the automatic transmission into park

position P.X Turn off the engine.X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.X Restart the engine.X Shift the automatic transmission into drive

position D (for second gear) or reverse gearR.

X Have the automatic transmission checkedat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center assoon as possible.

Instrument cluster

IntroductionFor a full view illustration of the instrumentcluster, see “Instrument cluster”(Y page 30).

G Warning!No messages will be displayed if either theinstrument cluster or the multifunctiondisplay is inoperative.

Instrument cluster 111

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 111

Z

As a result, you will not be able to seeinformation about your driving conditions,such asRspeedRoutside temperatureRwarning/indicator lampsRmalfunction/warning messagesRfailure of any systems

Driving characteristics may be impaired.If you must continue to drive, do so with addedcaution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

: Reset button

For information on changing the instrumentcluster settings, e.g. the language, see(Y page 122).

Activating the instrument clusterThe instrument cluster is activated when youRopen a doorRswitch on the ignitionRpress reset button :Rswitch on the exterior lamps

i Opening a door activates the instrumentcluster illumination only for about30 seconds.

Adjusting the instrument cluster illumination

Use reset button : to adjust the illuminationbrightness for the instrument cluster and theswitches on the center console.X To brighten illumination: Turn reset

button : clockwise until the desired levelof illumination is reached.

X To dim illumination: Turn resetbutton : counterclockwise until thedesired level of illumination is reached.

i The instrument cluster illumination isdimmed or brightened automatically to suitambient light conditions.

Coolant temperature gaugeThe coolant temperature gauge is located onthe left side in the instrument cluster(Y page 30).

G Warning!Driving when your engine is overheated cancause some fluids which may have leaked intothe engine compartment to catch fire. Youcould be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can causeserious burns which can occur just by openingthe engine hood. Stay away from the engineif you see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away fromother traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature mayrise close to 248‡ (120†).

! Excessive coolant temperature triggers awarning in the multifunction display and thered coolant temperature warninglamp ? in the instrument cluster comeson.The engine should not be operated with acoolant temperature above 248‡ (120†).

112 Instrument clusterCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 112

Doing so may cause serious engine damagewhich is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

Resetting trip odometerX Make sure you are viewing the standard

display (Y page 116) in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press and hold the reset button in theinstrument cluster (Y page 111) until thetrip odometer is reset.

TachometerThe red marking on the tachometer(Y page 30) denotes excessive engine speed.

! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds,as it may result in serious engine damagethat is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

To help protect the engine, the fuel supply isinterrupted if the engine is operated withinthe red marking.

Control system

IntroductionThe control system is activated as soon as thestarter switch is in position 1.The control system enables you to call upinformation about your vehicle and to changevehicle settings.For example, you can use the control systemto find out when your vehicle is next due formaintenance service, to set the language formessages in the instrument cluster display,and much more.

G Warning!A driver’s attention to the road and trafficconditions must always be his/her primaryfocus when driving.

For your safety and the safety of others,selecting features through the multifunctionsteering wheel should only be done by thedriver when traffic and road conditions permitit to be done safely.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

The control system relays information to themultifunction display.

Multifunction steering wheelThe displays in the multifunction display andthe settings in the control system arecontrolled by using the buttons on themultifunction steering wheel.

: Left multifunction display in thespeedometer

; Right multifunction display in thetachometer

Control system 113

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 113

Z

= Press button~ to end a call

to reject an incoming call6 to answer a call

to dial10

to redial10

Press buttonWX

to select submenus in theSettings menuto set valuesto operate the RACETIMER11

to set the volume

? Press buttonVU

to select next or previous menu

Press button briefly&*

to move within a menuWithin Audio/DVD menu toselect previous or next track,scene or stored stationWithin Telephone menu toswitch to the phone book andselect a name or number

Press and hold button&*

Within Audio/DVD menu toselect previous or next trackwith quick search or to selectprevious or next station instation list or wave bandWithin Telephone menu tostart the quick search in thephone book

Depending on the selected menu, pressingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel will alter what appears in themultifunction display.

The information available in the multifunctiondisplay is arranged in menus andaccompanying functions and submenus.The individual functions are then found withinthe relevant menu (radio or CD operationsunder Audio/DVD menu, for example).These functions serve to call up relevantinformation or to customize the settings foryour vehicle.It is helpful to think of the menus, and thefunctions within each menu, as beingarranged in a circular pattern.X Press button V or U repeatedly to

pass through each menu one after theother.

X Press button * or & repeatedly topass through each function display, oneafter the other, in the current menu.

In the Settings menu, instead of functions,you will find a number of submenus for callingup and changing settings. For instructions onusing these submenus, see “Settings menu”(Y page 121).The number of menus available in the systemdepends on which optional equipment isinstalled in your vehicle.

Multifunction displayThe multifunction display consists of thedisplay fields in the speedometer and thetachometer. In its default state, the leftmultifunction display shows the mainodometer and the outside temperature, whilethe trip odometer appears in the rightmultifunction display. This default setting isreferred to as the standard display.

10 Function only available in telephone menu.11 AMG vehicles only.

114 Control systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 114

: Outside temperature indicator; Transmission position/gear range

indicator

= Trip odometer? Automatic transmission program mode

indicatorA Main odometer

For more information on menus displayed inthe multifunction display, see “Menus andsubmenus” (Y page 115).

Menus and submenus

i The headings used in the menus table aredesigned to facilitate navigation within thesystem and are not necessarily identical tothose shown in the multifunction display.The first function displayed in each menuwill automatically show you which part ofthe system you are in.

Function

: Standard display menu(Y page 116)

; AMG12 menu (Y page 116)

= Audio/DVD menu (Y page 119)

? Navigation menu (Y page 120)

A Distronic menu (Y page 120)

12 AMG vehicles only.

Control system 115

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 115

Z

Function

B Vehicle status message memory13 menu (Y page 120)

C Settings menu (Y page 121)

D Trip computer menu (Y page 128)

E Telephone menu (Y page 129)

Standard display menu

Standard display: Outside temperature; Transmission position= Trip odometer? Automatic transmission program modeA Main odometer

X If you see another display, press buttonV or U repeatedly until the standarddisplay appears.

You can select whether the digitalspeedometer or the outside temperatureappears in the left multifunction display(Y page 124).X Press button & or * to select the

functions in the Standard display menu.The following functions are available:RChecking tire inflation pressure with the

Advanced TPMS (Y page 190)RCalling up digital speedometer or outside

temperature (Y page 116)

RCalling up maintenance service indicatordisplay (Y page 214)RChecking engine oil level (Y page 182)

Calling up digital speedometer or outside temperature If you have selected the digital speedometerfor the standard display (Y page 124), selectthe outside temperature display here.

G Warning!The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe digital speedometer or, depending onthe chosen setting, the outsidetemperature appears in the rightmultifunction display.

AMG menuThis function is only available in AMGvehicles.X Press button V or U repeatedly until

the AMG menu appears in themultifunction display.

The main screen of the AMG menu shows youthe engine oil temperature : as well as thegear currently engaged ;.

13 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 116

The engine oil temperature flashes if theengine oil temperature has not yet reached80†. During this time, avoid driving at fullengine speed.If the engine reaches the overspeed range inthe manual shift program, the menu will beshown in red. In addition, you will see UP nextto gear indicator ; as a reminder to upshift.Use buttons & or * to select thefollowing functions in the AMG menu:RSETUP (Y page 117)RRACETIMER (Y page 117)ROverall analysis (Y page 118)RLap analysis (Y page 118)

SETUPX Press button V or U repeatedly until


X Press button & repeatedly until theSETUP appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

orX Tap the AMG button on the center console

(SL 63 AMG only) (Y page 144).

i You can store and call up automatictransmission program mode andsuspension style settings with the AMGbutton on the center console (SL 63 AMGonly). For more information, see(Y page 144).

: Automatic transmission program modeindicator

; Suspension style indicator

RACETIMER

G Warning!The RACETIMER feature is only for use onroads and in conditions where high speeddriving is permitted. Racing on public roads isprohibited under all circumstances. The driveris and must always remain responsible forfollowing posted speed limits.

The RACETIMER allows you to time and savedriving stretches.X Press button V or U repeatedly until


X Press button & repeatedly until theRACETIMER appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

: Lap number; RACETIMER= Gear indicator

You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or the starter switch is inposition 2 (Y page 78).While the RACETIMER is being displayed, youcannot adjust the audio volume using buttonsW or X.X Starting: Press button W.X Displaying intermediate time: Press

button X while the timer is running.The intermediate time is shown for5 seconds.

X Stopping: Press button W.When you stop the vehicle and turn theSmartKey to position 1 (Y page 78) or, invehicles with KEYLESS-GO, turn off theengine and do not open the driver’s door, the

Control system 117

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 117

Z

RACETIMER stops timing. Timing is resumedwhen you press button W after switchingthe ignition back on or restarting the engine.

Saving lap time and starting a new lapYou can save up to nine laps.X Press button X while the timer is

running.The intermediate time will be shown for5 seconds.

X Press button X within 5 seconds.The intermediate time shown will be savedas a lap time.The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap.The new lap begins to be timed as soon asthe intermediate time is called up.

: Best lap time; Lap number= RACETIMER? Gear indicator

Resetting current lapX Press button W while the timer is

running.The timer stops.

X Press button X.The lap time is reset to “0”.

Deleting all lapsIt is not possible to delete a single saved lap.When you turn off the engine, the RACETIMERwill be reset to “0” after 30 seconds. All lapsare deleted.

X Press button W while the timer isrunning.The timer stops.

X Press the reset button in the instrumentcluster twice (Y page 112).

X Press button W.The timer starts. The saved laps aredeleted.

Overall analysisThis function is only available if you havesaved at least one lap and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press button V or U repeatedly until


X Press button & repeatedly until theoverall analysis appears in themultifunction display.

: Overall analysis of RACETIMER; Overall driving time= Maximum speed? Average speedA Overall distance driven

Lap analysisThis function is only available if you havesaved at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press button V or U repeatedly until


X Press button & repeatedly until the lapanalysis appears in the multifunctiondisplay.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 118

Each lap is shown in its own submenu. Thefastest lap is indicated by flashingsymbol :.

: Lap number; Lap time= Maximum speed during lap? Average speed during lapA Lap length

X Press button & or * to see other lapanalyses.

Audio/DVD menuThe functions in the Audio/DVD menuoperate the audio or video equipment whichyou have currently switched on.The following functions are available:RSelecting radio station (Y page 119)ROperating audio devices/audio media

(Y page 119)ROperating video DVD (Y page 120)If no audio equipment is currently switchedon, the message AUDIO Off appears in themultifunction display.

Selecting radio station i The SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio is treated

as a radio application.Additional optional satellite radioequipment and a subscription to a satelliteradio service provider are required forsatellite radio operation. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails and availability for your vehicle.

For more information, refer to separateCOMAND system operating instructions.

X Switch on the COMAND system and selectradio. Refer to separate COMAND systemoperating instructions.

X Press button V or U repeatedly untilthe currently tuned station appears in themultifunction display.

Example illustration: Wave band setting and stored memory

position; Station frequency

X Selecting next or previous stored station: Press button * or & brieflyto select a stored station.

X Selecting next or previous station in the station list: Press and hold button * or& to select a station.

X Selecting next or previous station in wave band (Only if no station list isavailable): Press and hold button * or& to select a station.

You can only store new stations using thecorresponding feature on the radio. Refer toseparate COMAND system operatinginstructions.

Operating audio devices/audio mediaX Switch on the COMAND system and select

the audio device or audio media. Refer toseparate COMAND system operatinginstructions.

X Press button V or U repeatedly untilthe Audio/DVD menu appears in themultifunction display.

Control system 119

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 119

Z

Example illustration: Disc number; Current track

X Selecting next or previous track: Pressbutton * or & briefly.

X Selecting a track from the track list (quick search): Press and hold button* or &.

The current track does not appear duringAudio AUX mode operation.

Operating video DVDX Switch on the COMAND system and select

DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMANDsystem operating instructions.

X Press button V or U repeatedly untilthe Audio/DVD menu appears in themultifunction display.

: Disc number; Current scene

X Press button * or & to select ascene.

Navigation menuThe Navigation menu contains the functionsneeded to operate your navigation system.

X Press button V or U repeatedly untilthe Navigation menu appears in themultifunction display.The message shown in the multifunctiondisplay depends on the status of thenavigation system:RWith the COMAND system switched off,

the message NAVI Off appears in themultifunction display.RWith the COMAND system switched on

but route guidance not activated, thedirection of travel and, if applicable, thename of the street currently traveled onappear in the multifunction display.RWith the COMAND system switched on

and route guidance activated, thedirection of travel and maneuverinstructions appear in the multifunctiondisplay.

Please refer to separate COMAND systemoperating instructions for instructions on howto activate the route guidance system.

Distronic menuUse the Distronic menu to display thecurrent settings for your Distronic system.The information shown in the multifunctiondisplay depends on whether the Distronicsystem is activated or deactivated.Please refer to the “Driving systems” sectionof this manual (Y page 133) for instructionson how to activate Distronic.

Vehicle status message memory menu

Use the Vehicle status message memorymenu to scan malfunction and warningmessages that may be stored in the memory.Such messages appear in the multifunctiondisplay and are based on conditions orsystem status the vehicle’s system hasrecorded.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 120

The Vehicle status message memory menuonly appears if messages have been stored.

G Warning!Malfunction and warning messages are onlyindicated for certain systems and areintentionally not very detailed. Themalfunction and warning messages aresimply a reminder with respect to theoperation of certain systems. They do notreplace the owner’s and/or driver’sresponsibility to maintain the vehicle’soperating safety. Have all requiredmaintenance and safety checks performed onthe vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to address themalfunction and warning messages.

X Press button V or U repeatedly untilthe Vehicle status message memorymenu appears in the multifunction display.If conditions have occurred causing statusmessages to be recorded, the number ofmessages appears in the rightmultifunction display.

X Press button & or *.The stored messages will now be displayedin the order in which they have occurred.For malfunction and warning messages,see “Vehicle status messages in themultifunction display” (Y page 226).

i After you have scrolled through allrecorded status messages, the firstrecorded message appears again.

Should the vehicle’s system record anyconditions while driving, the number ofmessages will reappear in the multifunctiondisplay when the SmartKey in the starterswitch is turned to position 0 or removed

from the starter switch. With KEYLESS-GO,the number of messages will reappear whenyou turn off the engine by pressing theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open thedriver’s door.Except for high-priority messages, the vehiclestatus message memory will be cleared whenyou switch off the ignition.

Settings menu

IntroductionIn the Settings menu there are twofunctions: The function To reset, press reset button for 3 seconds, with whichyou can reset all the settings to the originalfactory settings and a collection of submenuswith which you can make individual settingsfor your vehicle.The following settings and submenus areavailable in the Settings menu:RResetting to factory settings

(Y page 121)RSubmenus in the Settings menu

(Y page 122)RInstrument cluster submenu

(Y page 122)RLighting submenu (Y page 124)RVehicle submenu (Y page 126)RConvenience submenu (Y page 127)

Resetting to factory settingsYou can reset the settings of all submenus tothe factory settings.For safety reasons, the function Light Circuit Headlamp Mode in the Lightingsubmenu cannot be reset while driving.X Press button V or U repeatedly until

the Settings menu appears in themultifunction display.

Control system 121

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 121

Z

X Press the reset button in the instrumentcluster (Y page 111) for approximately3 seconds.The request to press the reset button oncemore to confirm appears in the rightmultifunction display.

X Press the reset button once more.The settings you have changed will not bereset unless you confirm the action bypressing the reset button a second time.

Submenus in the Settings menuX Press button V or U repeatedly until


X Press button &.The collection of the submenus appears inthe right multifunction display. There aremore submenus than can be displayedsimultaneously.

X Press button X.The selection marker moves to the nextsubmenu.

X Scroll down with button X, scroll upwith button W.

X With the selection marker on the desiredsubmenu, use button & to access theindividual functions within that submenu.

X Once within the submenu, use button& to move to the next function or button

* to move to the previous functionwithin that submenu.

X Use button W or X to change thesettings of the respective function.

The following lists show what settings can bechanged within the various menus. Detailedinstructions on making individual settings canbe found on the following pages.

Instrument cluster submenuRSelecting speedometer/odometer display

mode (Y page 123) (Canada only)RSelecting digital speedometer display

mode (Y page 123)RSelecting language (Y page 123)RSelecting standard display (Y page 124)

Lighting submenuRSwitching daytime running lamp mode on

or off (USA only) (Y page 124)RSwitching locator lighting on or off

(Y page 125)RSwitching night security illumination

(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on oroff (Y page 125)RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off

on or off (Y page 126)

Vehicle submenuRSwitching automatic central locking on or

off (Y page 126)

Convenience submenuRActivating easy-entry/exit feature

(Y page 127)

Instrument cluster submenuAccess the Instr. Cluster submenu viathe Settings menu. Use the Instr. Cluster submenu to change the instrumentcluster display settings.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 122

The following functions are available:RSelecting speedometer/odometer display

mode (Y page 123) (Canada only)RSelecting digital speedometer display

mode (Y page 123)RSelecting language (Y page 123)RSetting standard display (Y page 124)

Selecting speedometer/odometer display mode (Canada only) X Press button V or U repeatedly until


X Press button &.X Move the selection marker with buttonW or X to the Instr. Clustersubmenu.

X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe message Speedometer appears in themultifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press button W or X to setspeedometer/odometer unit toKilometers or Miles.

Selecting digital speedometer display mode X Press button V or U repeatedly until


X Press button &.

X Move the selection marker with buttonW or X to the Instr. Clustersubmenu.

X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe message Digital Speedometerappears in the multifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press button W or X to set digitalspeedometer unit to Kilometers orMiles.

Selecting language X Press button V or U repeatedly until



X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe message Language appears in themultifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press button W or X to select thelanguage to be used for the multifunctiondisplay messages.

Control system 123

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 123

Z

Setting standard displayX Press button V or U repeatedly until



X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe message Select Display appears inthe multifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press button W or X to select thedesired setting.The selected display appears in the leftmultifunction display.The other display now appears in the rightmultifunction display when scrollingthrough the Standard display menu(Y page 116).

Lighting submenuAccess the Lighting submenu via theSettings menu. Use the Lighting submenuto change the lamp and lighting settings onyour vehicle.The following functions are available:RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on

or off (USA only) (Y page 124)RSwitching locator lighting on or off

(Y page 125)

RSwitching night security illumination(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on oroff (Y page 125)RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off

on or off (Y page 126)

Switching daytime running lamp mode on or off (USA only) X Press button V or U repeatedly until


X Press button &.X Move the selection marker with buttonW or X to the Lighting submenu.

X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe message Light Circuit Headlamp Mode appears in the multifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press button W or X to selectmanual operation (Manual) or daytimerunning lamp mode (Constant).

With daytime running lamp mode switched onand the exterior lamp switch inposition $ or Ã, the low-beamheadlamps are switched on when the engineis running.In low ambient light conditions the followinglamps will come on additionally:RParking lampsRTail lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lampsFor more information on the daytime runninglamp mode, see (Y page 90).


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 124

For safety reasons, resetting all the functionsof all submenus to the factory settings whiledriving (Y page 121) will not deactivate thedaytime running lamp mode.The following message appears in themultifunction display:Lighting Cannot be fully reset to factory settings while driving.

Switching locator lighting on or off With the locator lighting feature activated andthe exterior lamp switch in position Ã, thefollowing lamps will come on during darknesswhen the vehicle is unlocked using button% on the SmartKey:RParking lampsRTail lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lampsRFront fog lampsThe locator lighting goes out when the driver’sdoor is opened.If you do not open the driver’s door afterunlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, thelamps will go out automatically afterapproximately 40 seconds.X Press button V or U repeatedly until



X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe message Locator Lighting appearsin the multifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press button W or X to switch thelocator lighting function On or Off.

X Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionÃ when exiting the vehicle.The locator lighting feature is activated.

Switching night security illumination (Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on or off Use this function to set whether you wouldlike the exterior lamps to remain on for15 seconds during darkness after exiting thevehicle and closing all doors.With the headlamps delayed shut-off featureactivated and the exterior lamp switch inposition Ã before the engine is turned off,the following lamps will come on when theengine is turned off:RParking lampsRTail lampsRLicense plate lampsRSide marker lampsRFront fog lampsIf, after turning off the engine, you do notopen a door or do not close an opened door,the lamps will automatically go out after60 seconds.X Press button V or U repeatedly until



X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe message Headlamps Delayed Switch-off appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

Control system 125

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 125

Z

X Press button W or X to switch theheadlamps delayed shut-off feature On orOff.

X Turn the exterior lamp switch to positionÃ before turning off the engine.The headlamps delayed shut-off feature isactivated.

You can temporarily deactivate theheadlamps delayed shut-off feature:X Before exiting the vehicle, turn the

SmartKey in the starter switch to position0.

X Then turn it to position 2 and back toposition 0.The headlamps delayed shut-off feature isdeactivated. It will reactivate as soon asyou start the engine.

Switching interior lighting delayed shut-off on or off Use this function to set whether you wouldlike the interior lighting to remain on for10 seconds during darkness after you haveremoved the SmartKey from the starterswitch.X Press button V or U repeatedly until



X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe message Interior Lighting Delayed Switch-off appears in themultifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press button W or X to switch theinterior lighting delayed shut-off featureOn or Off.

Vehicle submenuAccess the Vehicle submenu via theSettings menu. Use the Vehicle submenuto set the automatic central locking.

Switching automatic central locking on or off Use this function to switch the automaticcentral locking on or off. With the automaticcentral locking activated, the vehicle islocked centrally at a vehicle speed ofapproximately 9 mph (15 km/h).X Press button V or U repeatedly until


X Press button &.X Move the selection marker with buttonW or X to the Vehicle submenu.

X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe message Automatic Door Lockappears in the multifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press button W or X to switch theautomatic central locking On or Off.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 126

Convenience submenuAccess the Convenience submenu via theSettings menu. Use the Conveniencesubmenu to activate the easy-entry/exitfeature (Y page 127), or to set the fold-infunction for exterior rear view mirrors(Y page 127).

Activating easy-entry/exit feature Use this function to activate and deactivatethe easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 85).

G Warning!You must make sure no one can becometrapped or injured by the moving steeringwheel when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated.To stop steering wheel movement do one ofthe following:RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk.RPress one of the memory position buttons.RPress memory button M.

Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Children could open the driver’s door andunintentionally activate the easy-entry/exitfeature, which could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

X Press button V or U repeatedly untilthe Settings menu appears in themultifunction display.

X Press button &.X Move the selection marker with buttonW or X to the Conveniencesubmenu.

X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe message Easy-entry Functionappears in the multifunction display.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

X Press button W or X to activate (On)or deactivate (Off) the easy-entry/exitfeature.

Switching fold-in function for exterior rear view mirrors on or off This feature is only available in Canadavehicles.Use this function to set the exterior rear viewmirrors to be folded in automatically whenyou lock your vehicle.With this function set to On and the exteriorrear view mirrors folded in using the buttonon the door control panel (Y page 88), theexterior rear view mirrors will not fold outwhen you switch on the ignition. You will thenhave to fold out the exterior rear view mirrorsusing the button on the door control panel(Y page 88).Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors arefolded out completely before driving off.X Press button V or U repeatedly until


X Press button &.X Move the selection marker with buttonW or X to the Conveniencesubmenu.

X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe message Fold In Mirrors When Locking appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The selection marker is on the currentsetting.

Control system 127

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 127

Z

X Press button W or X to switch thefunction On or Off.

Trip computer menuUse the Trip computer menu to call upstatistical data on your vehicle.The following information is available:RFuel consumption statistics since start

(Y page 128)RFuel consumption statistics since last reset

(Y page 128)RResetting fuel consumption statistics

(Y page 128)RDistance to empty (Y page 129)The last function called up will reappear thenext time you enter the trip computer menu.

Fuel consumption statistics since start X Press button U or V repeatedly until

the first function of the Trip computermenu appears in the multifunction display.

X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe message From Start appears in theleft multifunction display.

: Distance driven since start; Average speed since start

= Time elapsed since start? Average fuel consumption since start

All statistics stored since the last engine startwill be reset approximately 4 hours after theSmartKey in the starter switch is turned toposition 0 or removed from the starter switch.Resetting will not occur if you turn theSmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within thistime period.

Fuel consumption statistics since last resetX Press button U or V repeatedly until


X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe message From Reset appears in theleft multifunction display.

: Distance driven since last reset; Average speed since last reset= Time elapsed since last reset? Average fuel consumption since last reset

Resetting fuel consumption statisticsX Press button U or V repeatedly until


X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe reading that you want to reset appearsin the multifunction display.

X Press and hold the reset button in theinstrument cluster until the respectivevalues are reset to 0.

The fuel consumption statistics resetautomatically to 0 after 99 999 miles or9 999 hours, whichever occurs first.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 128

Distance to emptyX Press button U or V repeatedly until


X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe message Range: appears in the leftmultifunction display.The calculated remaining driving rangebased on the current fuel tank levelappears in the right multifunction display.If only very little fuel is left in the tank, avehicle at the fuel pump C appearsinstead of the remaining driving range.

Telephone menu

G Warning!A driver’s attention to the road must alwaysbe his/her primary focus when driving. Foryour safety and the safety of others, werecommend that you pull over to a safelocation and stop before placing or taking atelephone call. If you choose to use thetelephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone whenweather, road and traffic conditions permit.Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

You can connect your telephone to theCOMAND system via Bluetooth®, seeseparate COMAND system operatinginstructions.

X Switch on the COMAND system.Refer to separate COMAND systemoperating instructions.

X Press button U or V repeatedly untilthe message TEL appears in the leftmultifunction display.One of the following messages will appearin the multifunction display:RNo Service: No network is available.RBluetooth Ready: The telephone has

not been connected to the COMANDsystem via Bluetooth® yet.X Connect the telephone to the

COMAND system via Bluetooth®.

RReady or name of the network provider(if available): The telephone has found anetwork and is ready for use. You canoperate it using the control system.

Answering a call When your telephone is ready to receive calls,you can answer a call at any time. In the rightmultifunction display you will then see thefollowing message, or if available, the callerID (number or name):

X Press button 6.You have answered the call.

Ending a call or rejecting an incoming callX Press button ~.

Control system 129

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 129

Z

Dialing a number from the phone book When your telephone is ready to receive calls,you may select and dial a number from thephone book. You can add new numbers to thephone book with the telephone, see separateoperating instructions.X Press button U or V repeatedly until

the message TEL appears in the leftmultifunction display.

X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe desired name appears in the rightmultifunction display.If you press and hold button & or* for longer than 1 second, the systemscrolls rapidly through the list of namesuntil you release the button again.The stored names are displayed inalphabetical order.

X Press button 6.The control system dials the selectedphone number.If the connection is successful and thisfeature is supported by your networkprovider, the name of the party (if stored inyour phone book) you are calling willappear in the multifunction display.The control system stores the dialednumber in the redial memory.

orX Press button ~ if you do not want to

make the call.

Redialing The control system stores the most recentlydialed phone numbers. This eliminates theneed to search through your entire phonebook.

X Press button U or V repeatedly untilthe message TEL appears in the leftmultifunction display.

X Press button 6.The first number in the redial memoryappears in the right multifunction display.

X Press button & or * repeatedly untilthe desired number or name appears in themultifunction display.

X Press button 6.The control system dials the selectedphone number.

Driving systems

IntroductionThis section describes the following drivingsystems of your vehicle:RCruise controlRDistronicRDistance warning function (only available

with Distronic)RActive Body Control (ABC)RParktronic systemRHill-start assist system (SL 63 AMG)RRACE START (SL 63 AMG)

The driving safety systems ABS, BAS, ESP®

and the electro-hydraulic brake system aredescribed in the “Safety and security” section(Y page 54).

Cruise controlThe cruise control maintains the speed youset for your vehicle automatically.The use of the cruise control is recommendedfor driving at a constant speed for extendedperiods of time.

130 Driving systemsCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 130

The currently set speed or last set speed(“Resume” function) appears in the leftmultifunction display:RUSA only: e.g. CC 55 MPHRCanada only: e.g. ¯ 90 Km/hG Warning!The cruise control is a convenience systemdesigned to assist the driver during vehicleoperation. The driver is and must alwaysremain responsible for the vehicle’s speedand for safe brake operation.Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,and weather conditions make it advisable totravel at a constant speed.RThe use of the cruise control can be

dangerous on winding roads or in heavytraffic because conditions do not allow safedriving at a constant speed.RThe use of the cruise control can be

dangerous on slippery roads. Rapidchanges in tire traction can result in wheelspin and loss of control.RDeactivate the cruise control when driving

in fog.

The “Resume” function should only beoperated if the driver is fully aware of thepreviously set speed and wishes to resumethis particular preset speed.

G Warning!The cruise control brakes automatically sothat the set speed is not exceeded.

: Setting current or higher speed ; Setting current or lower speed= Canceling the cruise control? Activating the cruise control or resuming

to last set speed

Activating cruise control You can activate the cruise control at avehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).You cannot activate the cruise controlRwhen you brakeRwhen you have engaged the parking brakeRwhen the automatic transmission is in park

position P, reverse gear R, or neutralposition NRthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off

due to a malfunctionThe vehicle speed displayed in thespeedometer can briefly vary from the speedsetting for the cruise control system.

Setting current speed X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired

speed.X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in

direction of arrow : or press in directionof arrow ;.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.

i On uphill grades, the cruise control maynot be able to maintain the set speed. Once

Driving systems 131

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 131

Z

the grade eases, the set speed will beresumed.On downhill grades, the cruise controlmaintains the set speed by braking with thevehicle’s brake system. In addition, onlonger downhill grades the automatictransmission will downshift automatically.

Canceling cruise control X Depress the brake pedal.orX Briefly push the cruise control lever in

direction of arrow =.The last set speed is stored for later use.

The last stored speed is deleted from memorywhen the engine is turned off.The cruise control switches off automaticallywhen you depress the brake pedal or youengage the parking brake.The cruise control also switches offautomatically whenRthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph

(30 km/h)Rthe ESP® is in operationRthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®

switchRthe ESP® has switched off due to a

malfunctionRyou shift the automatic transmission into

neutral position N while drivingAn acoustic warning will sound. Observeadditional messages in the multifunctiondisplay that may appear.Depressing the accelerator pedal does notdeactivate the cruise control. After a briefacceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruisecontrol will resume the last set speed.

Changing the set speed

G Warning!Keep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has made the necessaryadjustments.Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed toa value that the prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Otherwise, suddenand unexpected acceleration or decelerationof the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

When you use the cruise control lever todecelerate, the brake system will brake thevehicle automatically if the engine’s brakingpower does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.X Increasing: Lift the cruise control lever in

direction of arrow : and hold it up untilthe desired speed is reached.

X Decreasing: Press the cruise control leverin direction of arrow ; and hold it downuntil the desired speed is reached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is set and the vehicle willaccelerate or decelerate.

Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) incrementsX Increasing: Briefly tip the cruise control

lever in direction of arrow :.X Decreasing: Briefly tip the cruise control

lever in direction of arrow ;.

Setting stored speed (Resume function)

G Warning!The set speed stored in memory should onlybe set again if prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Possibleacceleration or deceleration differencesarising from returning to the preset speedcould cause an accident and/or serious injuryto you and others.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 132

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever indirection of arrow ?.If no speed is stored, the current speed isset and stored.


The last stored speed is deleted from memorywhen the engine is turned off.

Distronic

Safety notesWhen activated, the Distronic adaptive cruisecontrol increases the driving convenienceafforded by the cruise control while travelingon expressways and other major roadways.RIf the Distronic distance sensor detects a

slower moving vehicle directly ahead, yourvehicle speed will be reduced so that youfollow that vehicle at your preset followingdistance.RIf there is no vehicle directly ahead of you,

the Distronic will function in the same wayas standard cruise control (Y page 130).

G Warning!The Distronic requires familiarity with itsoperational characteristics. We stronglyrecommend that you review the followinginformation carefully before operating thesystem.

G Warning!The Distronic is a convenience system. Itsspeed adjustment reduction capability isintended to make cruise control moreeffective and usable when traffic speeds vary.It is not however, intended to, nor does it,replace the need for extreme care.The responsibility for the vehicle’s speed,distance to the preceding vehicle and, mostimportantly, brake operation to ensure a safestopping distance, always remains with thedriver.

The Distronic cannot take street and trafficconditions into account. Complex drivingsituations are not always fully recognized bythe Distronic. This could result in wrong ormissing distance warnings.

G Warning!The Distronic adaptive cruise control is not asubstitute for active driving involvement. Itdoes not react to pedestrians or on stationaryobjects, nor does it recognize or predict thelane curvature or the movement of precedingvehicles.The Distronic can only apply 20% of themaximum braking power of the vehicle.It is the driver’s responsibility at all times tobe attentive to the road, weather and trafficconditions. Additionally, the driver mustprovide the steering, braking and other drivinginputs necessary to remain in control of thevehicle.High-frequency sources such as toll stations,speed measuring systems etc. can cause theDistronic system to malfunction.

G Warning!The Distronic cannot take road and trafficconditions into account. Only use theDistronic if the road, weather and trafficconditions make it advisable to travel at aconstant speed.

G Warning!Use of the Distronic can be dangerous onslippery roads. Rapid changes in tire tractioncan result in wheel spin and loss of control.The Distronic does not function in adversesight and distance conditions. Do not use theDistronic during conditions of fog, heavy rain,snow or sleet.

Driving systems 133

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 133

Z

G Warning!The Distronic cannot take weather conditionsinto account. Switch off the Distronic or donot switch it on if:Rroads are slippery or covered with snow or

ice. The wheels could lose traction whilebraking or accelerating, and the vehiclecould skid.Rthe Distronic system sensor cover is dirty

or visibility is diminished due to snow, rainor fog, for example. The distance controlsystem functionality could be impaired.

Always pay attention to surrounding trafficconditions even while the Distronic isswitched on. Otherwise, you may not be ableto recognize dangerous situations until it istoo late. This could cause an accident in whichyou and/or others could be injured.

G Warning!The “Resume” function should only beoperated if the driver is fully aware of thepreviously set speed and wishes to resumethis particular preset speed.

G Warning!Close attention to road and traffic conditionsis imperative at all times, regardless ofwhether or not the Distronic is activated.Use of the Distronic can be dangerous onwinding roads or in heavy traffic becauseconditions do not allow safe driving at aconstant speed.The Distronic will not react to stationaryobjects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehiclein a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). TheDistronic will also not respond to oncomingvehicles.

Switch off the DistronicRwhen changing from the left to the right

lane if vehicles are moving more slowly inthe left laneRwhen entering a turn lane or highway off

rampRin complex driving situations, such as in

highway construction zones

In these situations, the Distronic will continueto maintain the set speed unless deactivated.The Distronic is designed and intended onlyto maintain a set speed and keep a setdistance from moving objects in front of it.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removal, tampering, oraltering of the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.




Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 134

Distronic displays in the speedometer

When the Distronic is activated, setspeed ; and distance warning lamp :appear in the speedometer.The vehicle speed displayed on thespeedometer can briefly vary from the speedsetting on the Distronic system.When the Distronic detects a vehicle directlyahead, the Distronic indicator lamp Ò inthe speedometer dial comes on white.If the Distronic calculates that there is adanger of collision, the distance warning lampÒ in the speedometer comes on red andan intermittent warning sounds.X Immediately apply the brakes to avoid a

collision.Under no circumstances should the driverawait the intermittent warning soundbefore braking.The intermittent warning sound ceases andthe red distance warning lamp Ò goesout when the necessary distance to thevehicle ahead is established again.

G Warning!An intermittent warning sounds and thedistance warning lamp (red) Ò in thespeedometer dial is illuminated if theDistronic system calculates that the distance

to the vehicle ahead and your vehicle’scurrent speed indicate that the Distronic willnot be capable of slowing the vehiclesufficiently to maintain the preset followingdistance, which creates a danger of acollision.Immediately brake the vehicle to increaseyour distance to the preceding vehicle. Thewarning sound is intended as a final cautionin which you should intercede with your ownbraking inputs to avoid a potentiallydangerous situation. Do not wait for theoperation of the warning signal to intercedewith your own braking. This will result inpotentially dangerous emergency brakingwhich will not always result in an impact beingavoided.Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.

G Warning!The Distronic brakes your vehicle with amaximum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2).This corresponds to approximately 20% of themaximum deceleration of your vehicle.The Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effortto restore the preset distance or to maintainthe set speed.

Distronic menu in the control systemThe information shown in the multifunctiondisplay depends on whether the Distronicsystem and/or the distance warning functionare activated or deactivated.

i To activate or deactivate the Distronicsystem, see (Y page 136) or see(Y page 138).To activate or deactivate the Distancewarning function, see (Y page 141).

X Press button V or U repeatedly untilone of the following two displays appearsin the multifunction display.

Driving systems 135

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 135

Z

Distronic deactivatedWhen the Distronic is deactivated, you willsee the standard display in the leftmultifunction display.

: Preceding vehicle, if detected; Actual distance to the preceding vehicle= Preset distance threshold to the

preceding vehicle? Your vehicleA Symbol for activated distance warning

function (Y page 140)

Distronic activatedWhen the Distronic is activated, DTRsymbol : and set speed ; appear in the leftmultifunction display.

Cruise control leverThe Distronic system is operated by means ofthe cruise control lever.

: Setting current or higher speed; Setting current or lower speed= Deactivating the Distronic? Activating the Distronic, resuming to the

last set speed or increasing speed in1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments

Activating DistronicYou can activate the Distronic when thevehicle speed is between 20 mph (30 km/h)and 110 mph (180 km/h).When the Distronic is activated, the leftmultifunction display will show a messagesuch as DTR 55 MPH(Canada: DTR 90 Km/h).If the Distronic is not activated after thecruise control lever is pulled in direction ofarrow ? (Y page 136), you will see themessage DTR --- MPH (Canada:DTR --- Km/h) in the left multifunctiondisplay.In the following cases you cannot activate theDistronic:Rup to 2 minutes after starting the engineRwhen you brakeRwhen you have engaged the parking brakeRwhen the automatic transmission is in park

position P, reverse gear R, or neutralposition NRwhen the ESP® is switched off or has

switched off due to a malfunction


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 136

: White Distronic indicator lamp Ò; Set speed

The vehicle speed displayed on thespeedometer can briefly vary from the speedsetting on the Distronic system.

Setting the current speedX Accelerate or decelerate to the desired

speed.X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in

direction of arrow : or depress indirection of arrow ; (Y page 136).


i If you do not take your foot off of theaccelerator pedal and continue toaccelerate past the set speed, the followingmessage will appear in the multifunctiondisplay:DTR OverrideThe distance to a slower moving vehicle infront of you will not be set. Your vehiclespeed will then be determined only by theaccelerator pedal position.

Changing the set speed

G Warning!Keep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has made the necessaryadjustments.Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed toa value that the prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Otherwise, suddenand unexpected acceleration or decelerationof the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

You can increase the set speed in 5 mph(Canada: 10 km/h) increments or with fineadjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)increments. Decreasing the set speed ispossible in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)increments.When you use the cruise control lever todecelerate, the brake system will brake thevehicle automatically if the engine’s brakingpower does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.

Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) incrementsX Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control

lever up in direction of arrow :(Y page 136).

X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruisecontrol lever down in direction ofarrow ; (Y page 136).The new speed is set and the vehicle willaccelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind thatit may take a brief moment until the vehiclehas reached the set speed.

Fine adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) incrementsX Increasing: Briefly pull the cruise control

lever in direction of arrow ?(Y page 136).

Driving systems 137

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 137

Z

Setting stored speed (Resume function)

G Warning!The set speed stored in memory should onlybe set again if prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Possibleacceleration or deceleration differencesarising from returning to the preset speedcould cause an accident and/or serious injuryto you and others.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever indirection of arrow ? (Y page 136).If no speed is stored, the current speed isset and stored.


Deactivating DistronicX Depress the brake pedal.orX Briefly push the cruise control lever in

direction of arrow = (Y page 136).The following message appears briefly inthe multifunction display: DTR OffThe last set speed is stored for later use.

The last stored speed is deleted from memorywhen the engine is turned off.The Distronic switches off automaticallywhen you depress the brake pedal or youengage the parking brake.The Distronic switches off automatically andan acoustic warning will sound whenRthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph

(30 km/h)Rthe ESP® is in operationRthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®

switchRthe ESP® has switched off due to a

malfunctionRyou shift the automatic transmission into

neutral position N while driving

Observe additional messages in themultifunction display that may appear.

G Warning!Distronic switches off and releases the brakeswhen the vehicle decelerates below theminimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) byoperation of the system. At that time thedriver must apply the brakes in order toreduce vehicle speed further or bring it to astop.

Depressing the accelerator pedal does notdeactivate the Distronic. After a briefacceleration (e.g. for passing), the Distronicwill resume the last set speed.

Setting the following distance in DistronicYou can set the specified following distancefor Distronic by varying the time settingbetween 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this timesetting and the current speed of your vehicle,Distronic calculates and sets the requiredfollowing distance to the preceding vehicle.The set distance will be shown in the rightmultifunction display.

G Warning!It is up to the driver to exercise discretion toselect the appropriate setting given roadconditions, traffic, driver’s preferred drivingstyle and applicable laws and drivingrecommendations for safe following distance.

Example illustration (except SL 63 AMG)

SL 63 AMG:


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 138

The thumbwheel for adjusting the followingdistance is located on the right side of thecenter console.X Increasing distance: Turn

thumbwheel : towards ª.Increasing the distance setting tellsDistronic to maintain a greater followingdistance to the preceding vehicle.

X Decreasing distance: Turnthumbwheel : towards ¥.Decreasing the distance setting tellsDistronic to maintain a shorter followingdistance to the preceding vehicle.

Driving with DistronicThis section describes a number of drivingsituations where special precaution isrequired on the part of the driver. Be preparedto brake in such situations. Braking willdeactivate the Distronic system.

G Warning!The Distronic works to maintain the speedselected by the driver unless a movingobstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in thesame travel direction is detected (e.g.following another vehicle ahead of you at yourset distance).This means that:RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle after

you have changed lanes.RWhile in a sharp turn or if the preceding

vehicle is in a sharp turn, the Distroniccould lose sight of the preceding vehicle.Your vehicle could then accelerate to thepreviously selected speed.

The Distronic regulates only the distancebetween your vehicle and those directlyahead of it, but does not register stationaryobjects in the road, e.g.:Ra stopped vehicle in a traffic jamRa disabled vehicleRan oncoming vehicle

The driver must always be alert, observe alltraffic and intercede as required by means ofsteering or braking the vehicle.

G Warning!The Distronic should not be used in snowy oricy road conditions.

The most likely cause for a malfunctioningsystem is a dirty Distronic system sensorcover (located in the hood grille), especiallyat times of snow and ice or heavy rain.In such a case, the Distronic will switch off,and the message DISTRONIC Currently Unavailable – See Oper. Manualappears in the multifunction display.For cleaning and care of the Distronic systemsensor cover, see (Y page 218).

i If the message DISTRONIC Currently Unavailable – See Oper. Manualdisappears during driving, the dirt (e.g.slush) has dissolved; the Distronic isavailable again if you reactivate it(Y page 136).

Turns and bends

In turns or bends, the Distronic may notdetect a moving vehicle in front, or it may

Driving systems 139

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 139

Z

detect one too soon. This may cause yourvehicle to brake late or unexpectedly.

Offset driving

A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset fromyour direct line of travel may not be detectedby the Distronic. There will be insufficientdistance to the preceding vehicle.

Lane changing

The Distronic has not yet detected the vehiclechanging lanes. There will be insufficientdistance to the lane-changing vehicle.

Narrow vehicles

Because of their narrow profile, the vehiclestraveling near the outer edges of the lanehave not yet been detected by the Distronic.There will be insufficient distance to thepreceding vehicles.

Distance warning functionWhen the Distronic is deactivated, thisfunction will continue to warn you whenrecognizing a stationary obstacle or a slowervehicle moving in your vehicle’s path and thedanger of a collision exists:RThe distance warning lamp Ò in the

speedometer comes on red.RAn intermittent warning will sound if

necessary.If these warnings are issued, you must applythe brakes to maintain a safe distance andavoid a collision with the preceding vehicle.When depressing the brake pedal, thewarning sound ceases. The warning soundwill also cease when the distance to thepreceding vehicle is sufficient again withoutapplying the brakes. In this case, the distancewarning lamp Ò will also go out.

G Warning!If the distance warning lamp (red) Ò in thespeedometer comes on while driving and/oran intermittent warning sounds, immediateattention on the part of the driver is required.As required by the traffic situation, apply thebrakes and navigate around a possibleobstacle. However, do not drive by relying onthe distance warning function, as this willresult in an emergency braking application.This will not always enable you to avoid acollision, especially when traveling on varyingroad surface conditions and with varyingdriver reaction.Complex driving situations are not alwaysfully recognized by the distance warningfunction. This could result in wrong or missingdistance warnings.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 140

Example illustration (except SL 63 AMG)

SL 63 AMG:The distance warning function on/off switchis located on the right side of the centerconsole.X Activating/deactivating: Press

switch :.When the distance warning function isactivated, indicator lamp ; in switch :comes on. A loudspeaker symbol appearsin the right multifunction display(Y page 136).

RACE START (SL 63 AMG)RACE START enables optimum accelerationfrom a standing start with suitable high-griproad surface conditions.

G Warning!RACE START is only available when the SPORThandling mode is switched on. The SPORThandling mode stabilizes the vehicle only to alimited extent if the vehicle starts to skid orwhen a wheel is spinning.RACE START should be used only on closedtracks. Always adapt your speed and drivingto the prevailing road and weather conditions.

Conditions for activationRACE START can be activated whenRthe doors are closedRthe engine is running and has reached its

operating temperature of approximately

80†. This is the case when the engine oiltemperature indicator in the multifunctiondisplay stops flashing.Rthe SPORT handling mode is switched on

(Y page 58)Rthe multifunction steering wheel is in the

straight-ahead positionRthe vehicle is standing still and the brake

pedal is depressed (left foot)Rthe automatic transmission is in drive

position D

Activating RACE STARTX Depress the brake pedal with your left foot

and keep it depressed.X Turn the program mode selector dial

clockwise (Y page 107) until the RS lampon the dial comes on.The message RACE START Cancel: Paddle DOWN appears in the leftmultifunction display and the messageRACE START Confirm: Paddle UPappears in the right multifunction display.

i When the activation conditions are notfulfilled anymore, RACE START is canceled.The message RACE START appears in theleft multifunction display and the messageCanceled appears in the rightmultifunction display.

X To cancel: Pull left steering wheel gearshiftcontrol (Y page 108).

orX To confirm: Pull right steering wheel

gearshift control (Y page 108).The message RACE START appears in theleft multifunction display and the messageAvailable Depress Gas Pedal appearsin the right multifunction display.

i If you do not depress the acceleratorpedal within 2 seconds, RACE START iscanceled. The message RACE STARTappears in the left multifunction displayand the message Not Possible See

Driving systems 141

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 141

Z

Operator’s Manual appears in the rightmultifunction display.

X Depress the accelerator pedal fully.The engine speed rises to approximately4000 rpm.The message RACE START appears in theleft multifunction display and the messageRelease Brake To Start appears in theright multifunction display.

i If you do not release the brake pedalwithin 7 seconds, RACE START is canceled.The message RACE START appears in theleft multifunction display and the messageCanceled appears in the rightmultifunction display.

X Take your foot off the brake pedal whilekeeping the accelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximumacceleration.The message RACE START appears in theleft multifunction display and the messageActive appears in the right multifunctiondisplay.

RACE START deactivates at a vehicle speedof approximately 50 km/h. The automatictransmission switches to program mode S+.The SPORT handling mode remains switchedon.RACE START is canceled immediately if yourelease the accelerator pedal while RACESTART is active or when the activationconditions are not fulfilled anymore. Themessage RACE START appears in the leftmultifunction display and the message Not Possible See Operator’s Manualappears in the right multifunction display.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly in ashort period of time, it is only availableagain after having driven the vehicle acertain distance.

Hill-start assist system (SL 63 AMG)On uphill grades, the hill-start assist systemmaintains the pressure in the brake systemfor approximately 1 second after you havereleased the brake pedal. Therefore, you canstart off smoothly without the vehicle movingimmediately after releasing the brake pedal.

G Warning!The hill-start assist system is not designed tofunction as a parking brake. It does notprevent the vehicle from moving when parkedon an incline.Always engage the parking brake in additionto shifting the automatic transmission intopark position P.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission into drive

position D or reverse gear R.X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.The hill-start assist system is inactiveRwhen starting off on a level road or downhill

gradesRwith the automatic transmission in neutral

position NRwith the parking brake engagedRif the ESP® has switched off due to a

malfunction

ABCThe ABC system is an active, computer-controlled system that adjusts thesuspension hydraulically at all four wheels inresponse to various driving situations. Itselects the optimum suspension tuning andride height for your vehicle automatically.

Vehicle level controlYour vehicle adjusts its ride heightautomatically to increase vehicle safety andto reduce fuel consumption.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 142

The vehicle chassis ride height is raised orlowered according to the selected levelsetting and to the vehicle speed. Withincreasing speed, the ride height is reducedby up to approximately 0.5 in (12 mm). Withdecreasing speed, the ride height is againraised to the selected vehicle level.These height adjustments are so small thatyou may not notice any change.

Setting the vehicle level

G Warning!To help avoid personal injury, keep hands andfeet away from wheel housing area, and stayaway from under the vehicle when loweringthe vehicle chassis.

The following vehicle level settings can beselected when the vehicle is stationary andthe engine is running:

Level Use for Indicatorlamps

Normal For driving onnormal roads.

Both lampsare off.

Level 1 For driving onrough roads orwith snow chains(Y page 208).

One lampis on.

Level 2 For driving on veryrough road surfaceconditions.

Both lampsare on.

Select the level 1 and level 2 settings onlywhen required by current driving conditions.Otherwise the fuel consumption mayincrease and/or the handling may beimpaired.

i The selected setting remains stored inmemory, even when the engine is turnedoff and restarted.

X Start the engine.X Press vehicle level control button = briefly

to change from one level setting to thenext.RThe normal level is selected if both

indicator lamps are off.RAt level 1, indicator lamp : is on.RAt level 2, both indicator lamps :

and ; are on.When the vehicle is at level 2, pressingvehicle level control button = will returnthe vehicle to normal level.

i Pressing vehicle level control button =twice in quick succession will cause thevehicle to immediately raise or lower to thenew vehicle level as selected.

Suspension tuningThe suspension tuning is set according to:Ryour driving styleRroad surface conditionsRyour choice of suspension styleRthe vehicle loadingYou can set the following suspension styles:RRegular (Comfort)RSporty

i The selected setting remains stored inmemory, even when the engine is turnedoff and restarted.

Driving systems 143

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 143

Z

Setting suspension tuning (except SL 63 AMG)

X Start the engine.

Suspension for sporty driving styleThe setting for sporty driving is selected whenindicator lamp ; is on.X Press ABC suspension tuning button :.

Indicator lamp ; comes on.

Suspension for regular driving styleThe setting for regular driving is selectedwhen indicator lamp ; is off.X Press ABC suspension tuning button :.

Indicator lamp ; goes out.

SL 65 AMG: You can display the currentsettings in the SETUP of the AMG menu(Y page 117).

Setting suspension tuning (SL 63 AMG)

X Start the engine.

Suspension for sporty driving styleThe suspension tuning for a sporty drivingstyle is selected when ABC suspension tuningbutton : comes on in red.X Press ABC suspension tuning button :.

Button : comes on in red.

Suspension for regular driving styleThe suspension tuning for a regular drivingstyle is selected when ABC suspension tuningbutton : is not on in red.X Press ABC suspension tuning button :.

The red illumination on button : goes out.

Storing and calling up settings When you have selected the suspensiontuning and the program mode (Y page 106),you can store, call up, and display the settingsusing AMG button ; when the engine isrunning. Pressing AMG button ; when theignition is switched on, displays the currentsettings only.You can also call up the settings via thecontrol system (Y page 117).X Storing: Press and hold AMG button ;

until an acoustic signal sounds.The current setting is stored and appearsin the multifunction display.

X Calling up and displaying: Press AMGbutton ;.The stores suspension tuning and programmode are in effect and the settings appearin the multifunction display.

X Displaying: Tap AMG button ;.The stored and/or currently active settingsappear in the multifunction display.

Parktronic system (Parking assist)The Parktronic system is an electronicparking aid with ultrasonic sensors designedto assist the driver during parking maneuvers.The Parktronic system indicates the relative


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 144

distance between the vehicle and an obstaclevisually and audibly.The Parktronic system is activatedautomatically whenRyou switch on the ignition

andRyou release the parking brake

andRthe automatic transmission is in drive

position D, reverse gear R, or neutralposition N

The Parktronic system deactivates at speedsabove approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). Atlower speeds, the Parktronic systemactivates again.The Parktronic system also deactivates whenyou shift the automatic transmission intopark position P or engage the parking brake.The Parktronic system monitors thesurroundings of your vehicle with six sensorsin the front bumper and four sensors in therear bumper.

Example illustration, sensors in the front bumper

To function properly, sensors : must be freeof dirt, ice, snow and slush. Cleansensors : regularly. Be careful not toscratch or damage sensors :, see “Cleaningthe driving systems sensors” (Y page 218).

G Warning!The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It isnot intended to, nor does it replace, the needfor extreme care. The responsibility during

parking and other critical maneuvers alwaysremains with the driver.

G Warning!Make sure no persons or animals are in ornear the area in which you are parking/maneuvering. Otherwise, they could beinjured.

! Special attention must be paid to objectswith smooth surfaces or low silhouettes(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts,elevated crossbars or road curbs). Suchobjects may not be detected by the systemand can damage the vehicle.During parking maneuvers, pay specialattention to objects located above or belowthe height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs,painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). TheParktronic system will not detect suchobjects at close range and damage to yourvehicle or the object may result.

! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources(e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, orjackhammers) may impair the operation ofthe Parktronic system.

Range of the sensors

Driving systems 145

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 145

Z

Front sensors

Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)

Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)

Rear sensors



Minimum distance



If the Parktronic system detects an obstaclein this range, all the distance warningsegments illuminate and you hear a warningsignal. If the obstacle is closer than theminimum distance, the actual distance mayno longer be indicated by the Parktronicsystem.

Warning indicators Visual signals indicate the relative distancebetween the sensors and an obstacle.

Front area warning indicators

Rear area warning indicators

Each warning indicator is divided into sixyellow and two red distance segments for leftside : and right side ; of the vehicle. TheParktronic system is ready to measure whenthe border around the indicator is illuminated.The current transmission position determineswhich warning indicator will be activated.

Currenttransmissionposition

Warning indicator

D Front area activated

R or N Front and rear areaactivated

As your vehicle approaches an object, one ormore distance segments will illuminate,depending on the distance. When the eighthdistance segment illuminates, you havereached the minimum distance.RFront area: An intermittent acoustic

warning will sound as the first red distance


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 146

segment illuminates and a constantacoustic warning lasting a maximum of2 seconds will sound for the second reddistance segment. The signal is canceledwhen the automatic transmission is shiftedinto park position P or the parking brake isengaged.RRear area: An intermittent acoustic

warning will sound when the first distancesegment illuminates. This signal quickenswith each additional distance segment lit.When the eighth distance segmentilluminates, the acoustic warning becomesa constant signal. The signal is canceledwhen the automatic transmission is shiftedinto drive position D, or park position P, orthe parking brake is engaged.

Switching the Parktronic system on/off The Parktronic system switches onautomatically when the ignition is switchedon.

X Switching off: Press Parktronicswitch :.Indicator lamp ; comes on.

X Switching on: Press Parktronic switch :again.

Parktronic system malfunction There is a malfunction in the Parktronicsystem, if only the red distance segmentsilluminate and an acoustic warning sounds.The Parktronic system will switch offautomatically after 20 seconds and indicatorlamp ; in Parktronic switch : comes on.X Have the Parktronic system checked at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soonas possible.

If only the red distance segments illuminateand no acoustic warning sounds, theParktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. dirt,ice, snow and slush). Another cause could beinterference from other radio or ultrasonicsignals (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, orjackhammers). The Parktronic system willswitch off automatically after 20 seconds andindicator lamp ; in Parktronic switch :comes on.X Switch off the ignition.X Clean the Parktronic system sensors

(Y page 218).X Switch on the ignition.

orX Check the Parktronic system operation at

another location to rule out interferencefrom outside radio or ultrasonic signals.

Driving systems 147

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 147

Z

Climate control system

Control panel

Automatic climate control

Function Recommendation/Notes

1 Air distributiondisplay, driver’s side

2 Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until thewindshield or the side windows are clearagain.

(Y page 153)

3 Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time,e.g. in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windowscan fog up due to lack of fresh air.

(Y page 154)

4 Rear windowdefroster

(Y page 155)

5 Air distributiondisplay, passengerside

6 Air distribution,passenger side

(Y page 153)

7 Temperature control,passenger side

i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 151)

8 AC cooling on/off i Switch on/off the air conditioning. (Y page 150)

Residual heat/ventilation

i With the engine turned off, it is possibleto continue to heat or ventilate the interior.

(Y page 154)

9 Climate control on/off

i Switch on/off the climate controlsystem.

(Y page 149)

a Air volume control (Y page 153)

148 Climate control systemCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 148

Function Recommendation/Notes

b Air distribution andair volume(automatic mode)

i Switch on the automatic mode. Theindicator lamp in button Ã comes on.

(Y page 150)

c Temperature control,driver’s side

i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 151)

d Air distribution,driver’s side

(Y page 153)

Notes on climate control systemThe climate control system is operationalwhenever the engine is running. You canoperate the climate control system in eitherthe automatic or manual mode. The systemcools or heats the interior depending on theselected interior temperature.It can only function optimally when you aredriving with the windows and the retractablehardtop closed.Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odorsare filtered out before outside air enters thepassenger compartment through the airdistribution system.

G Warning!Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)may require replacement of the filter beforeits scheduled replacement interval. A cloggedfilter will reduce the air volume to the interiorand the windows could fog up, impairingvisibility and endangering you and others.Have a clogged filter replaced as soon aspossible at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

The air conditioning will not engage (nocooling) if the A/C mode (Y page 150) isdeactivated.

G Warning!Follow the recommended settings for heatingand cooling given on the following pages.Otherwise the windows could fog up,

impairing visibility and endangering you andothers.

X Keep the air intake grille in front of thewindshield free of snow and debris.

When the retractable hardtop is closed, donot obstruct air flow by placing objects on theair flow-through exhaust slots below the rearwindow.

i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate theinterior before driving off. The climatecontrol will then adjust the interiortemperature to the set value much faster.

Deactivating the climate control system

G Warning!When the climate control system isdeactivated, the outside air supply andcirculation are also deactivated. Only choosethis setting for a short time when theretractable hardtop is closed. Otherwise thewindows could fog up, impairing visibility andendangering you and others.

X Deactivating: Press button ^.The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

X Reactivating: Press button ^.The indicator lamp in the button goes out.The previous settings are once again ineffect.

or

Climate control system 149

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 149

Z

X Turn temperature controls C or H(Y page 148) clockwise orcounterclockwise.The indicator lamp in button ̂ goes out.

orX Press button Ã.

The indicator lamp in button Ã comeson. The air volume and air distribution areadjusted automatically.

orX Press button ¬.

The indicator lamp in button ̂ goes out.

Air conditioningThe air conditioning is operational while theengine is running and cools the interior air tothe temperature set by the operator. Inaddition, the air conditioning dehumidifiesthe interior air and helps prevent windowfogging.

G Warning!If you deactivate the air conditioning, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Window fogging may impairvisibility and endanger you and others.

i Condensated water may drip out fromunderneath the vehicle. This is normal andnot an indication of a malfunction.

The air conditioning uses the refrigerantR134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs whichare harmful to the ozone layer.

DeactivatingIt is possible to deactivate the airconditioning. The interior air will then nolonger be cooled or dehumidified.X Press button Á.

The indicator lamp in the button goes out.The cooling function switches off after ashort delay.

ActivatingMoist air can fog up the windows. You candehumidify the interior air with the airconditioning.X Press button Á.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

Automatic modeAir distribution and air volume can beadjusted automatically by the climate controlsystem. You can also adjust the settings forair distribution and air volume manually.When operating the climate control system inautomatic mode, the interior air temperature,air volume and air distribution are adjustedautomatically.In automatic mode, cooling withdehumidification is switched on. This functioncan be switched off if necessary.

G Warning!If you deactivate the air conditioning, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Window fogging may impairvisibility and endanger you and others.

X Set the desired temperature(Y page 151).

X Activating: Press button Ã.The indicator lamp in the button comes on.The air volume and air distribution areadjusted automatically.

X Deactivating: Press button Ã.The indicator lamp in the button goes out.The blower will run at speed setting 3. Theair flows through the center and side airvents.

orX Press one button Ä.

The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out.The climate control settings for therespective side of the passengercompartment is adjusted manually.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 150

orX Turn air volume control K clockwise or

counterclockwise.The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out.Automatic air volume is switched off and iscontrolled according to the desiredposition. The automatic air distributionremains switched on.

Setting the temperatureYou can adjust the air temperature on eachside of the passenger compartment. Youshould raise or lower the temperature settingin small increments, preferably starting at72‡ (22†).X Increasing/decreasing: Turn

temperature control C and/or H(Y page 148) slightly clockwise orcounterclockwise.

Adjusting air vents

G Warning!When operating the climate control, the airthat enters the passenger compartmentthrough the air vents can be very hot or verycold (depending on the set temperature). Thismay cause burns or frostbite to unprotectedskin in the immediate area of the air vents.Always keep sufficient distance betweenunprotected parts of the body and the airvents. If necessary, use the air distributionadjustment to direct the air to air vents in thevehicle interior that are not in the immediatearea of unprotected skin.

For best possible performance of the climatecontrol:X Keep the air intake grille in front of the

windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, andany other debris.

X Always keep all air vents and grilles in thepassenger compartment free fromobstruction.

i For draft-free ventilation, move theadjustable center and side air vents to themiddle position.

Center air vents

: Cockpit air vent, fixed; Right center air vent, adjustable= Thumbwheel for air volume control for

center air vents? Left center air vent, adjustable

X Opening/closing adjustable center air vents: Turn thumbwheel = upward to thefirst stop or downward.Center air vents ; and ? are open orclosed.

X Opening/closing cockpit air vent: Turnthumbwheel = upward all the way ordownward.Cockpit air vent : is open or closed.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 151

Z

Side air vents

Example illustration driver’s side: Left side defroster air vent, fixed; Left side air vent, adjustable= Thumbwheel for air volume control for

adjustable left side air vent

X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel =upward or downward.

Ventilated glove boxThe glove box can be ventilated, for instanceto cool its contents, when the climate controlsystem is activated. The level of airflow to theglove box depends on the airflow and airdistribution settings. The temperature of theair is approximately the same as that of theair flowing from the center air vents.

! Close the glove box air vent when heatingthe vehicle interior. Activate the airconditioning (cooling function) when theoutside temperature is high. Otherwise,temperature-sensitive items stored in theglove box could be damaged.

i You should keep air vent ; closed whenoutside temperatures are low.

X Opening the air vent: Make sure airvent ; is unobstructed.

X Turn thumbwheel : upwards.X Closing the air vent: Turn

thumbwheel : downwards.

AIRSCARF vent

G Warning!When switching on the AIRSCARF neck-levelheating, the air streaming from the openingsmay be very hot. When in close proximity tothe openings, you could be seriously burned.To help avoid serious personal injuries, switchthe AIRSCARF to a lower heating level.

: AIRSCARF vent

You can switch on the AIRSCARF neck-levelheating with the AIRSCARF switch(Y page 84).


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 152

Adjusting air distributionThe air distribution can be adjustedseparately on each side of the passengercompartment with buttons Ä.The symbols on the controls represent thefollowing functions:

Symbol Function

¯ Directs air through thedefroster air vents to thewindshield and door windows

P Directs air through the centerand side air vents

O Directs air to the footwells

N Directs air through the center,side air vents and to thefootwells

a Directs air through thedefroster air vents to thewindshield, door windows andfootwells

X Press one button Ä until the desiredsetting for the respective side of thepassenger compartment appears in airdistribution display : or A (Y page 148).

Adjusting air volumeX Decreasing/increasing: Turn air volume

control F (Y page 148) clockwise orcounterclockwise.

Front defrosterYou can use this setting to defrost thewindshield, for example if it is iced up.You can also defog the windshield and thedoor windows.

i Keep this setting selected only until thewindshield or the door windows are clearagain.

X Activating: Press button ¬.The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

The climate control switches to the followingfunctions automatically:Rcooling on to dehumidifyRmost efficient blower speed and heating

power, depending on outside temperatureRair flows onto the windshield and the door

windowsRthe air recirculation mode is switched offX Deactivating: Press button ¬ again.

The indicator lamp in the button goes out.The previous settings are once again ineffect. The cooling remains switched on.The air recirculation remains switched off.

orX Press button Ã.

The indicator lamp in button ¬ goes out.Air volume and air distribution are adjustedautomatically.

orX Turn temperature controls C and H

(Y page 148) clockwise orcounterclockwise.

orX Turn air volume control F (Y page 148)

clockwise or counterclockwise.

Windshield fogged on the outside X Switch the windshield wipers on

(Y page 95).X Press one button Ä until the settingP, N or O appears in airdistribution display : or A (Y page 148).

Maximum cooling MAX COOLMAX COOL is only available in U.S. vehicles.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 153

Z

MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.If the air distribution controls as well as theair volume control are set to Ã and thereis a high need for cooling, MAX COOL isactivated. “MAX COOL” appears intemperature controls C and H(Y page 148).This provides the fastest possible cooling ofthe vehicle interior (when retractable hardtopis closed).

Automatic climate control panel with MAX COOLactivated

Air recirculation modeSwitch to air recirculation mode to preventunpleasant odors from entering the vehiclefrom the outside (e. g. before driving througha tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake ofoutside air and recirculates the air in thepassenger compartment.

G Warning!Fogged windows impair visibility,endangering you and others. If the windowsbegin to fog on the inside, switching off theair recirculation mode immediately shouldclear interior window fogging. If interiorwindow fogging persists, make sure the airconditioning is activated, or press button¬.

X Activating: Press button g.The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

i The air recirculation mode is activatedautomatically at high outsidetemperatures.The indicator lamp in button g is not litwhen the air recirculation mode is switchedon automatically.A quantity of outside air is added afterapproximately 30 minutes.

X Deactivating: Press button g again.The indicator lamp in the button goes out.

i The manually selected air recirculationmode is deactivated automatically:Rafter 5 minutes if the outside

temperature is below approximately41‡ (5†)Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning is

turned offRafter 30 minutes if the outside

temperature is above approximately41‡ (5†)

Residual heat and ventilationWith the engine turned off, it is possible tocontinue to heat or ventilate the interior forup to 30 minutes. This feature makes use ofthe residual heat produced by the engine.

i If you switch on the residual heat functionwhen outside temperatures are high, onlythe ventilation will be switched on.

i How long the system will provide heatingdepends on the coolant temperature andthe selected temperature. The blower willrun at low speed regardless of the airdistribution control setting.

X Activating: Switch off the ignition.X Press button Á.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on.X Deactivating: Press button Á.

The indicator lamp in the button goes out.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 154

The residual heat is deactivatedautomatically:Rwhen the ignition is switched onRafter approximately 30 minutesRif the battery voltage drops

Rear window defroster

G Warning!Any accumulation of snow and ice should beremoved from the rear window before driving.Visibility could otherwise be impaired,endangering you and others.

The rear window defroster uses a largeamount of power. To keep the battery drainto a minimum, switch off the defroster assoon as the rear window is clear. Thedefroster is switched off automatically aftersome time of operation depending on theoutside temperature.X Switch on the ignition.X Switching on: Press button ¤.

The indicator lamp in the button comes on.

! The rear window defroster cannot beswitched on when the retractable hardtopis open. The indicator lamp will startflashing if the hardtop is open.RClose the retractable hardtop.The rear window defroster can then beswitched on.

X Switching off: Press button ¤ again.The rear window defroster switches off whenthe battery voltage is too low. The indicatorlamp in button ¤ flashes. Too manyelectrical consumers may be operatingsimultaneously.X Switch off consumers that are currently not

needed if required.

Retractable hardtop

Safety notesFor safety reasons, the retractable hardtopcan only be opened and closed when thevehicle is standing still.G Observe Safety notes, see page 51.

G Warning!To prevent possible accidents, only drive thevehicle with the retractable hardtop eithercompletely closed and locked, or fully loweredinto its storage compartment.If the retractable hardtop does not completelyopen or close, the roof hydraulics will losepressure and the retractable hardtop isloweredRafter approximately 7 minutes when the

ignition is switched onRafter approximately 15 seconds when the

ignition is switched off

Shortly before the retractable hardtop islowered, a warning will sound. In themultifunction display you will see K andthe message Retractable Roof Lowering.Properly lock the retractable hardtop beforecontinuing to drive. Otherwise, the unlockedhardtop could open while the vehicle is inmotion and cause you to lose control of thevehicle. You or others could be injured as aresult.

G Warning!Before operating the retractable hardtop,make sure there is no danger of anyone beinginjured by the moving parts (retractablehardtop, roof frame, and trunk lid).Hands must never be placed near the roofframe, upper windshield area, hardtop, shelfbehind roll bars, or trunk lid while theretractable hardtop is being raised orlowered. Serious personal injury may occur.If potential danger exists, release theretractable hardtop switch or button % or

Retractable hardtop 155

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 155

Z

& on the SmartKey. This immediatelyinterrupts the raising or lowering procedure.You then can operate the retractable hardtopswitch or press button % or & on theSmartKey to raise or lower the retractablehardtop away from the danger zone

! Never sit or place heavy objects on therear shelf. Doing so could cause damage tothe retractable hardtop and the rear shelf.

! Please keep in mind that weatherconditions can sometimes change rapidly.Make sure to close the retractable hardtopwhen leaving the vehicle. If water entersthe vehicle interior, vehicle electronicscould be damaged which is not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! When opening and closing the retractablehardtop, make sureRthere is sufficient clearance for the

retractable hardtop to move up and forthe trunk lid to move backRthe luggage cover is installed, extended

and closedRthe trunk is loaded only to the height of

the luggage coverRthe luggage/cargo does not push up the

closed luggage coverRthe trunk lid is closedRthe outside temperature is above +5‡

(-15†)Otherwise the retractable hardtop andtrunk as well as other parts of the vehiclecould be damaged.

Opening and closing

With the retractable hardtop switch

G Observe Safety notes, see page 155.X Engage the parking brake.X Close the luggage cover (Y page 158).

X Close the trunk lid.X Switch on the ignition.

Retractable hardtop switch

Openingi Make sure the retractable hardtop is dry

before you open it. Otherwise water mayenter the trunk interior.

X Pull up on the retractable hardtop switch asindicated by arrow : until the retractablehardtop is completely lowered into its trunkstorage compartment.

ClosingX Press down on the retractable hardtop

switch as indicated by arrow ; until theretractable hardtop is completely closedand locked.

With the SmartKey


156 Retractable hardtopCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 156

X Close the luggage cover (Y page 158).X Close the trunk lid.X Aim the transmitter eye at an outside door

handle.The SmartKey must be in close proximity tothe outside door handle.

Opening (Summer opening feature)i Make sure the retractable hardtop is dry

before you open it. Otherwise water mayenter the trunk interior.

X Press and hold button % until theretractable hardtop is completely open.The seat ventilation for the driver’s seatswitches on and the rear side windows alsoopen.

X Release button % to interrupt theopening procedure.

X Press and hold button % once more toopen the door windows.

Closing (Convenience closing feature)X Press and hold button & until the

retractable hardtop is completely closed.All currently open windows also close.

X Release button & to interrupt theclosing procedure.

Locking

G Observe Safety notes, see page 155.The retractable hardtop is not fully closed andlocked or not fully opened and locked ifRthe message K Retractable Roof In Operation appears in themultifunction displayRa warning sounds for 10 seconds when

driving off or while drivingIf the retractable hardtop is not properlylocked, lock it as follows.

Unlocked status noticed when stoppedX Switch on the ignition.X To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully

closed position, press down on theretractable hardtop switch (Y page 156)until the retractable hardtop is fully closed.

orX To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully

opened position, pull up on the retractablehardtop switch (Y page 156) until theretractable hardtop is fully opened.

Unlocked status noticed while driving

G Warning!Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soonas it is safe to do so and lock the retractablehardtop before continuing to drive. You couldotherwise endanger yourself and others.

X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or assoon as it is safe to do so.

X Leave the ignition switched on.X To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully

closed position, press down on theretractable hardtop switch (Y page 156)until the retractable hardtop is fully closed.

orX To lock the retractable hardtop in its fully

opened position, pull up on the retractablehardtop switch (Y page 156) until theretractable hardtop is fully opened.

Wind screen

G Warning!The wind screen can restrict the driver’svision to the rear of the vehicle. To prevent apossible accident when visibility is limited(e.g. in darkness), the upper part of the windscreen should be folded back.

The wind screen deflects drafts away from thedriver and passenger when the retractablehardtop is lowered.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 157

Z

The wind screen is stored in the trunk.

InstallingX Leave the wind screen folded and place it

on the roll bar.X Make sure the fastening straps are

unbuckled.

X Slide the wind screen into the roll bar untilguide tabs : on each side latchunderneath the roll bar.Make sure the fastening straps do not getcaught.

i The fastening straps must be directedinto the vehicle interior.

X Adjust the roll bar to a height (Y page 51)that allows you to reach easily underneathit.

X Guide the fastening straps around the topof the roll bar and close buckles ;.

X Tighten the fastening straps if necessary.

X Lower the roll bar (Y page 51).X Fold the upper section of the wind screen

up towards the head restraints until itstops.

RemovingX Fold the upper section of the wind screen

back.X Adjust the roll bar to a height (Y page 51)

that allows you to reach easily underneathit.

X Undo the buckles on the upper section ofthe roll bar by pressing release button :.

X Lower the roll bar (Y page 51).Make sure the fastening straps do not getcaught.

X Pull the wind screen out towards the frontof the vehicle.Be careful not to damage interior trim withthe guide tabs.

X Store the wind screen in a safe place.

Luggage coverThe luggage cover covers luggage/cargo inthe trunk.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 158

! To prevent damage to the retractablehardtop or luggage/cargo when loweringthe retractable hardtop:RLoad trunk only to the height of the

luggage cover.RDo not permit luggage/cargo to push up

the closed luggage cover.RDo not place anything on top of or in front

of the luggage cover.RDo not place anything on the shelf behind

the roll bar.

Closing

Closed luggage cover: Luggage cover; Zipper= Side holder? HandleX Pull out luggage cover : in direction of

arrow using handle ?.X Hook luggage cover : into left and right

side holders =.

OpeningX Unhook luggage cover : from side holders=.

X While holding on to handle ?, guideluggage cover : in the opposite directionof arrow.

Removing

Closed luggage cover: Luggage cover; Zipper= Side holder? HandleX Fold back the entire length of the zipper’s

cloth cover.X Open zipper ; completely while the

luggage cover is closed.X Open luggage cover :.

Opened luggage coverA Tensioning claspB Retainer spring

G Warning!Only open the tensioning clasps when theluggage cover is opened. You could otherwisebe injured.


Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 159

Z

X Open tensioning clasps A by pulling themdownward.

X Unhook retainer springs B from holdersand flip retainer springs all the way up.

C Luggage coverD Cloth endE Cloth holderX Carefully tilt luggage cover C in direction

of arrow towards rear of trunk.X Roll up front end of cloth D in the trunk

towards the front and fasten it in place infront of cloth holder E.

X Remove luggage cover C from the trunk.

Installing! Before installing the luggage cover, make

sure that the cloth end is in front of thecloth holder. Otherwise, it could bedamaged.

X Carefully place luggage cover in trunk.

X Insert luggage cover : into guide rails= on both sides using hooks ;.

X Tilt luggage cover : forward in directionof arrow.

X Fold retainer springs of tensioning claspsdownward and clip them into holders onboth sides (Y page 159).

X Close tensioning clasps on both sides bypressing them upward.

X Pull handle of luggage cover towards therear.

X Clip eyelets onto side trim panels.X Close the zipper completely.X Fold back the zipper’s cloth cover across

the entire length of the luggage cover.

Sunshade for panorama roofThe sunshade protects you from excessivesunlight coming in through the panoramaroof.

G Warning!Do not operate the sunshade while driving.Adjusting the sunshade while driving couldcause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 160

X Opening: Squeeze stop buttons : andguide the sunshade towards the rear.

X Closing: Using handle ;, slide thesunshade towards the front of the vehicle.

Loading and storing

Parcel nets

G Warning!Parcel nets are intended for storing light-weight items only, such as road maps, mail,etc.Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, orfragile objects may not be transported in theparcel nets. In an accident, during hardbraking, or sudden maneuvers, they could bethrown around inside the vehicle and causeinjury to vehicle occupants.Parcel nets cannot protect transported goodsin the event of an accident.

A parcel net is located in the passengerfootwell.Two parcel nets are located in the trunk oneach side of the right and left trunk side walls.In addition a trunk floor net is available tosecure loads.X Pull the trunk floor net from the trunk back

wall towards the front over the luggage.X Hang the hooks of the trunk floor net on the

eyes on the trunk floor.

Front storage compartments

G Warning!To help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whenstoring objects in the vehicle. Put luggage orcargo in the trunk if possible.Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than theseat backrests.Keep compartment lids closed. This will helpto prevent stored objects from being thrownabout and injuring vehicle occupants duringRbrakingRvehicle maneuversRan accident

Glove box Depending on vehicle equipment, an AUXsocket is located in the glove box. Forinformation on AUX operation, see separateCOMAND system operating instructions.The glove box can be ventilated(Y page 152).

X Opening: Press glove box lid release :.

X Closing: Push glove box lid ; upwardsuntil it engages.

Locking/unlocking the storage compartments separatelyThe storage compartments are centrallylocked when you lock the vehicle from theoutside.

Loading and storing 161

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 161

Z

You can also lock the storage compartmentsseparately, e.g. when the vehicle is in theshop for service.The following storage compartments remainlocked, even when the vehicle is unlockedwith the SmartKey:RGlove boxRStorage compartment under the armrestRRear storage compartmentsThe separate locking status of these storagecompartments can only be canceled with themechanical key.

1 Separately unlocking storagecompartments

2 Separately locking storagecompartments

i If the glove box cannot be unlocked usingthe SmartKey, see “Unlocking the glovebox” (Y page 268).

Armrest storage compartment Depending on vehicle equipment, a mediainterface is located in the storagecompartment. For information on mediainterface, see separate COMAND systemoperating instructions.

i The Roadside Assistance button º(Y page 169) and the Information buttonE (Y page 170) are located in thestorage compartment.

X Opening: Press storage compartmentrelease button ; and lift armrest : indirection of arrow.

X Closing: Lower armrest : until it engages.

Seat storage compartmentsA storage compartment is located in the seatbase of each seat.The passenger seat storage compartmentcontains the first aid kit, see “First aid kit”(Y page 224).

X Opening: Pull handle : up.X Fold storage compartment lid ; forward

in direction of arrow.

162 Loading and storingCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 162

Door storage compartments

G Warning!Keep the door storage compartments closedwhile vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so maycause the seat belt to catch at the rear andprevent proper positioning of the seat belt.

: Release button; Storage compartment lid

X Opening: Press release button :.

Rear storage compartments

G Warning!To help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whenstoring objects in the vehicle. Put luggage orcargo in the trunk if possible.Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than theseat backrests.Keep compartment lids closed. This will helpto prevent stored objects from being thrownabout and injuring vehicle occupants duringRbrakingRvehicle maneuversRan accident

Driver’s side rear storage compartment: Release button; Storage compartment lid

X Opening: Press release button :.

Luggage compartment in the rear

G Warning!Secure all pieces of luggage in the rear withthe luggage straps. Unsecured pieces ofluggage can otherwise cause injury during abraking maneuver and can increase the riskof injury in an accident.Never allow anyone to ride in the rear.The luggage straps can only secure lightluggage items. Carry heavy pieces of luggagein the trunk.The rear compartment area is not designed orintended to accommodate occupants. Severepersonal injury or death may be the result inan accident.

G Warning!The shelf below the rear window should notbe used to carry objects. This will avoid suchobjects from being thrown about and injuringvehicle occupants during an accident orsudden maneuver.The trunk is the preferred place to carryobjects.

Loading and storing 163

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 163

Z

X Securing luggage: Pull strap : out ofholder ;.

X Secure the luggage with strap : so that itcannot move.

X Insert strap : into latch =.X Releasing strap: Press release button ?

and guide strap : back to holder ;.

Load assist in the trunkTo facilitate trunk loading after opening thetrunk lid, use the load assist feature to raisethe retracted hardtop from its storageposition in the trunk.

G Warning!To prevent injuries, make sure that there is nopossibility of body parts getting caught inmoving parts. If potential danger exists, pressthe switch again. This will immediately stopthe movement of the hardtop.

Hardtop : can only be raised or loweredwhen luggage cover ; is closed and thetrunk lid is completely opened.X Raising the hardtop: Press load assist

button =.Retracted hardtop : rises a shortdistance. Load assist button = comes onbrightly. You can now open luggagecover ;.

X Lowering the hardtop: Close luggagecover ;.

X Press load assist button =.Hardtop : lowers. Load assist button =is dimly lit.

! Only close the trunk if the hardtop iscompletely lowered. Otherwise you coulddamage the hardtop.If you begin to close the trunk lid before thehardtop is completely lowered, the loadassist button will flash and a warning willsound.

Useful features

Cup holder

G Warning!In order to help prevent spilling liquids onvehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,only use containers that fit into the cupholder. Use lids on open containers and donot fill containers to a height where thecontents, especially hot liquids, could spill

164 Useful featuresCo

ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 164

during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in anaccident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupantsmay cause serious personal injury. Liquidsspilled on vehicle equipment may causedamage not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.An open cup holder may cause injury to youor others when contacted during braking,vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.Keep in mind that objects placed in the cupholder may come loose during braking,vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and bethrown around in the vehicle interior. Objectsthrown around in the vehicle interior maycause an accident and/or serious personalinjury.

X Opening: Briefly press cup holdercover : or ;.

X Closing: Press cup holder cover : or ;until the cup holder engages.

Sun visors

G Warning!Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visorsclosed while vehicle is in motion. Reflectedglare can endanger you and others.

: Mounting; Vanity mirror cover= Vanity mirror lamp? Sun visorA Vanity mirrorB Holder, e.g. for gas cards

Glare through the windshieldX Flip sun visor ? down when you

experience glare.

Glare through a door windowX Close vanity mirror cover ; if opened.X Disengage sun visor ? from mounting :.X Pivot sun visor ? to the side.

Vanity mirrorThe vanity mirror lamp only functions whenthe sun visor is engaged in mounting :.X Flip sun visor ? down.X Lift up vanity mirror cover ;.

Vanity mirror lamp = comes on.

Useful features 165

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 165

Z

Ashtray

X Opening: Briefly touch cover plate :.X Removing ashtray insert: Secure vehicle

from movement by engaging the parkingbrake.

X Shift the automatic transmission intoneutral position N.

X Press sliding knob ; to the right.The ashtray insert will eject a shortdistance.

X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Press ashtrayinsert into the frame until it snaps intoplace.

X Closing: Push down cover plate :.

Cigarette lighter


G Warning!Never touch the heating element or sides ofthe lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold theknob only.Make sure any children traveling with you donot injure themselves or start a fire with thehot cigarette lighter.

If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter isbeing used extensively, the vehicle batterymay become discharged.X Open the cover (Y page 166).

X Switch on the ignition.X Push in cigarette lighter :.

Cigarette lighter : will pop outautomatically when hot.

X Take out cigarette lighter :.X Reinsert cigarette lighter : in its socket

after use.

Power outletThe power outlet can be used toaccommodate 12V DC electrical accessories(e.g. auxiliary lamps, mobile phone chargers)up to a maximum of 15 A (180 W).X Switch on the ignition.

Power outlet in trunk

If the engine is off and power outlet : isbeing used extensively, the vehicle batterymay become discharged.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 166

Tele Aid! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a

subscriber agreement must be completed.To ensure your system is activated andoperational, please press Informationbutton E to perform the acquaintancecall. Failure to complete either of thesesteps may result in a system that is notactivated.If you have any questions regardingactivation, please call the CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canadaonly).

Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aidacquaintance call, you will receive a user IDand password in the mail. You may use thispassword to access the Tele Aid section in“Owner’s Online” at www.mbusa.com (USAonly). The “My Tele Aid” section will give youaccess to account information, remote doorunlock and more.The Tele Aid system is available ifRit has been activated and is operational.

Activation requires a subscription formonitoring services, connection andcellular air timeRvehicle battery power is availableRthe relevant cellular phone network and

GPS signals are available and pass theinformation on to the Customer AssistanceCenter

i Location of the vehicle on a map is onlypossible if the vehicle is able to receivesignals from the GPS satellite network andpass the information on to the CustomerAssistance Center.

The Tele Aid system(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)

The Tele Aid system consists of three typesof response:RAutomatic and manual emergencyRRoadside AssistanceRInformation

To adjust the speaker volume during a TeleAid call do the following:X Press button W or X on the

multifunction steering wheel.orX Use the adjustment button on your

COMAND system.Be sure to check “Owner’s Online” atwww.mbusa.com (USA only) for moreinformation and a description of all availablefeatures.

System self-test The system performs a self-test after youhave switched on the ignition.

G Warning!A malfunction in the system has beendetected if any or all of the followingconditions occur:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does

not come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance

button º does not come on during thesystem self-test.RThe indicator lamp in Information buttonE does not come on during the systemself-test.RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button,

Roadside Assistance button º, orInformation button E remainsilluminated constantly in red after thesystem self-test.RThe message Tele Aid Inoperative

appears in the multifunction display afterthe system self-test.

Useful features 167

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 167

Z

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. Incase of an emergency, help will have to besummoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestMercedes-Benz Center or contact theCustomer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada only)as soon as possible.

Emergency calls ! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a

subscriber agreement must be completed.To ensure your system is activated andoperational, please press Informationbutton E to perform the acquaintancecall. Failure to complete either of thesesteps may result in a system that is notactivated.If you have any questions regardingactivation, please call the CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canadaonly).

An emergency call is initiated automaticallyfollowing an accident in which the EmergencyTensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags havedeployed.

i An automatically initiated Tele Aidemergency call cannot be canceled.

An emergency call can also be initiatedmanually (Y page 168).Once the emergency call is in progress, theindicator lamp in the SOS button will begin toflash. The message Connecting Callappears in the multifunction display and theCOMAND system is muted. When theconnection is established, the messageCall Connected appears in themultifunction display.All information relevant to the emergency,such as the location of the vehicle

(determined by the GPS satellite locationsystem), vehicle model, identification numberand color are generated.A voice connection between the CustomerAssistance Center and the occupants of thevehicle will be established automatically soonafter the emergency call has been initiated.The Customer Assistance Center will attemptto determine the nature of the emergencymore precisely, provided they can speak toan occupant of the vehicle.

i If no vehicle occupant responds, anambulance will be sent to the vehicleimmediately.

G Warning!If the indicator lamp in the SOS button isflashing continuously and there was no voiceconnection to the Customer AssistanceCenter established, then the Tele Aid systemcould not initiate an emergency call (e.g. therelevant cellular phone network is notavailable).The message Call Failed appears in themultifunction display for approximately10 seconds.Should this occur, assistance must besummoned by other means.

i The “911” emergency call system is apublic service. Using it without due causeis a criminal offense.

Initiating an emergency call manually


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 168

X Briefly press on cover : to open.X Press SOS button ; briefly.

The indicator lamp in SOS button ; willflash until the emergency call is concluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theCustomer Assistance Center.

X Close cover : after the emergency call isconcluded.

G Warning!If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in thevehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,vehicle in a dangerous road location), pleasedo not wait for voice contact after you havepressed the emergency button. Carefullyleave the vehicle and move to a safe location.The Customer Assistance Center willautomatically contact local emergencyofficials with the vehicle’s approximatelocation if they receive an automatic SOSsignal and cannot make voice contact with thevehicle occupants.

X Terminating calls: Press button ~ onthe multifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the respective button for ending a

telephone call on the COMAND system.

Roadside Assistance button X Open the storage compartment under the

armrest (Y page 162).

X Press and hold Roadside Assistancebutton : for longer than 2 seconds.A call to a Mercedes-Benz RoadsideAssistance dispatcher will be initiated. Theindicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton : will flash while the call is inprogress. The message Connecting Call will appear in the multifunctiondisplay and the COMAND system is muted.

When the connection is established, themessage Call Connected appears in themultifunction display. The Tele Aid system willtransmit data generating the vehicleidentification number, model, color andlocation (subject to availability of cellular andGPS signals).

i The COMAND system display indicatesthat a Tele Aid call is in progress. While thecall is connected you can change to thenavigation menu by pressing the NAVIbutton on the COMAND system. Spokencommands are not available.

A voice connection between the RoadsideAssistance dispatcher and the occupants ofthe vehicle will be established.X Describe the nature of the need for

assistance.The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistancedispatcher will either dispatch a qualifiedMercedes-Benz technician or arrange to towyour vehicle to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. For services such aslabor and/or towing, charges may apply.Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual formore information.Sign and Drive services (USA only):Services such as a jump start, a few gallonsof fuel or the replacement of a flat tire withthe vehicle spare wheel are obtainable at nocharge.

i If the indicator lamp in RoadsideAssistance button : is flashingcontinuously and there was no voiceconnection to the Customer AssistanceCenter established, then the Tele Aid

Useful features 169

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 169

Z

system could not initiate a RoadsideAssistance call (e.g. the relevant cellularphone network is not available). Themessage Call Failed appears in themultifunction display.




Information button X Open the storage compartment under the

armrest (Y page 162).

X Press and hold Information button : forlonger than 2 seconds.A call to the Customer Assistance Centerwill be initiated. The indicator lamp inInformation button : will flash while thecall is in progress. The messageConnecting Call will appear in themultifunction display and the COMANDsystem is muted.

When the connection is established, themessage Call Connected appears in themultifunction display. The Tele Aid system willtransmit data generating the vehicleidentification number, model, color andlocation (subject to availability of cellular andGPS signals).

i The COMAND system display indicatesthat a Tele Aid call is in progress. While thecall is connected you can change to the

navigation menu by pressing the NAVIbutton on the COMAND system. Spokencommands are not available.

A voice connection between the CustomerAssistance Center representative and theoccupants of the vehicle will be established.Information regarding the operation of yourvehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA productsand services is available to you.For more details concerning the Tele Aidsystem, please visit www.mbusa.com (USAonly), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the“My Tele Aid” section to learn more.

i If the indicator lamp in Informationbutton : is flashing continuously andthere was no voice connection to theCustomer Assistance Center established,then the Tele Aid system could not initiatean Information call (e.g. the relevantcellular phone network is not available).The message Call Failed appears in themultifunction display.




Call priorityIf other service calls such as a RoadsideAssistance call or Information call are active,an emergency call is still possible. In thiscase, the emergency call will take priority andoverride all other active calls.The indicator lamp in the respective buttonflashes until the call is concluded. Automaticinitiated emergency calls can only beterminated by a Customer Assistance Centerrepresentative. All other calls can beterminated by pressing button ~ on themultifunction steering wheel or therespective button for ending a telephone callon the COMAND system.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 170

i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,the COMAND system audio is muted. Themobile phone is no longer connected to theCOMAND system. If you must use thisphone, we recommend that you use it onlywith the vehicle at a standstill in a safelocation.

Destination Download to the COMAND systemi The components and operating principles

of the COMAND system can be found in theseparate COMAND system operatinginstructions.

Destination Download allows you access to adatabase of over 10 million points of interest(POIs) that can be downloaded to yourvehicle’s navigation system. If you know thedestination, the address can be downloaded,or can be provided with points of interestsnear your location.

Route guidanceYou will be prompted to confirm that routeguidance to the entered address is to bestarted.X Select Yes using button = or ; on

the COMAND system.X Press button 9 on the COMAND system

to confirm.The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidance to thedefined address.

i If you select No, you can save the addressto your address book.

i The Destination Download feature isavailable if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Search & Send “Search & Send” is a navigation destinationaddress entry service. For more information

on “Search & Send”, refer to separateCOMAND system operating instructions.

Remote door unlock In case you have locked your vehicleunintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),and the reserve SmartKey is not available:X Contact the Customer Assistance Center

at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or1-888-923-8367 (Canada only).You will be asked to provide your password.

X Then return to your vehicle at the timearranged with the Customer AssistanceCenter and pull the trunk recessed handlefor a minimum of 20 seconds until theindicator lamp in the SOS button is flashing.The message Connecting Call appears inthe multifunction display.

As an alternative, you may unlock the vehiclevia Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of“Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password(USA only).

i The remote door unlock feature isavailable if the relevant cellular phonenetwork is available.The SOS button will flash and the messageCall Connected will appear in themultifunction display to indicate receipt ofthe door unlock command.If the trunk recessed handle was pulled formore than 20 seconds before door unlockauthorization was received by theCustomer Assistance Center, you mustwait 15 minutes before pulling the trunkrecessed handle again.

Useful features 171

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 171

Z

Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services In the event your vehicle was stolen:X Report the incident to the police.

The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X Pass this number on to the CustomerAssistance Center along with yourpassword.The Customer Assistance Center will thenattempt to covertly contact the vehicle’sTele Aid system. Once the vehicle islocated, the Customer Assistance Centerwill contact the local law enforcement andyou. The vehicle’s location will only beprovided to law enforcement.

i If the anti-theft alarm or the tow-awayalarm stays on for more than 30 seconds,a call to the Customer Assistance Center isinitiated automatically by the Tele Aidsystem provided Tele Aid service wassubscribed to and properly activated, andthat necessary cellular service and GPScoverage are available. See “Anti-theftalarm system” (Y page 63) and “Tow-awayalarm” (Y page 64).

Garage door openerThe integrated remote control can operate upto three separately controlled devicescompatible with HomeLink® or some othersystems.

G Warning!Before programming the integrated remotecontrol to a garage door opener or gateoperator, make sure people and objects areout of the way of the device to preventpotential harm or damage. Whenprogramming a garage door opener, the doormoves up or down. When programming a gateoperator, the gate opens or closes.Do not use the integrated remote control withany garage door opener that lacks safety stopand reverse features as required by U.S.

federal safety standards (this includes anygarage door opener model manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982). A garage door thatcannot detect an object - signaling the doorto stop and reverse - does not meet currentU.S. federal safety standards.When programming a garage door opener,park vehicle outside the garage.Do not run the engine while programming theintegrated remote control. Inhalation ofexhaust gas is hazardous to your health. Allexhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),and inhaling it can cause unconsciousnessand possible death.

Interior rear view mirror with integrated remotecontrol

Hand-held remote control A is not part of thevehicle equipment.

Programming the integrated remote controlX Step 1: Switch on the ignition.X Step 2: If you have previously programmed

a signal transmitter button and wish toretain its programming, proceed to step 3.

orX If you are programming the integrated

remote control for the first time, press andhold the two outer signal transmitterbuttons ; and ? and release them whenindicator lamp : begins to flash afterapproximately 20 seconds.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 172

Do not hold the buttons for longer than30 seconds.This procedure erases any previoussettings for all three channels andinitializes the memory. If you later wish toprogram a second and/or third hand-heldtransmitter to the remaining two signaltransmitter buttons, do not repeat this stepand begin directly with step 3.

X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remotecontrol A of the device you wish to trainapproximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) awayfrom the signal transmitter button (;, =or ?) to be programmed, while keepingindicator lamp : in view.

X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneouslypress hand-held remote control button Band the desired signal transmitter button(;, = or ?). Do not release the buttonsuntil step 5 is completed.Indicator lamp : will flash, first slowly andthen rapidly.

i Indicator lamp : flashes immediatelythe first time the signal transmitter buttonis programmed. If this button has alreadybeen programmed, the indicator lamp willstart flashing after 20 seconds.

X Step 5: After indicator lamp : changesfrom a slow to a rapidly flashing light,release the hand-held remote controlbutton and the signal transmitter button.

X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trainedsignal transmitter button (;, = or ?) andobserve indicator lamp :.If indicator lamp : stays on constantly,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the respective signaltransmitter button (;, = or ?) is pressedand released.

i If indicator lamp : flashes rapidly forapproximately 2 seconds and then turns toa constant light, continue withprogramming steps 8 through 12 as your

garage door opener may be equipped withthe “rolling code” feature.

X Step 7: To program the remaining twosignal transmitter buttons, repeat the stepsabove starting with step 3.

Rolling code programmingTo train a garage door opener (or other rollingcode devices) with the rolling code feature,follow these instructions after completing the“Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) ofthis text. For your convenience and tocomplete the procedure faster, you mightwant to have someone assist you.X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the

garage door opener motor head unit.

i Exact location and color of the button mayvary by garage door opener brand.Depending on manufacturer, the “training”button may also be referred to as “learn” or“smart” button. If there is difficulty locatingthe transmitting button, refer to the garagedoor opener Operator’s Manual.

X Step 9: Press the “training” button on thegarage door opener motor head unit.The “training light” is activated.You have 30 seconds to initiate thefollowing two steps.

X Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmlypress, hold for 2 seconds and release theprogrammed signal transmitter button (;,= or ?).

X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds andrelease same signal transmitter button asecond time to complete the trainingprocess.

i Some garage door openers (or otherrolling code equipped devices) may requireyou to press, hold for 2 seconds andrelease the same signal transmitter buttona third time to complete the trainingprocess.

Useful features 173

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 173

Z

X Step 12: Confirm the garage dooroperation by pressing the programmedsignal transmitter button (;, = or ?).

X Step 13: To program the remaining twosignal transmitter buttons, repeat the stepsabove starting with step 3.

Gate operator/Canadian programmingCanadian radio-frequency laws requiretransmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)after several seconds of transmission whichmay not be long enough for the integratedsignal transmitter to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similar to this Canadian law,some U.S. gate operators are designed to“time-out” in the same manner.If you live in Canada or if you are havingdifficulties programming a gate operator(regardless of where you live) by using theprogramming procedures, replace step 4 withthe following:X Step 4: Press and hold the signal

transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do notrelease this button until it has beensuccessfully trained.

X While still holding down the signaltransmitter button (;, = or ?), “cycle”your hand-held remote control button Bas follows: Press and hold button B for2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds,and again press and hold it for 2 seconds.Repeat this sequence on the hand-heldremote control until the frequency signalhas been learned.Upon successful training, indicatorlamp : will flash slowly and then rapidlyafter several seconds.

X Proceed with programming step 5 andstep 6 to complete.

i Upon completion of programming theintegrated remote control, make sure youretain the hand-held remote control thatcame with the garage door opener, gateoperator or other device. You may need itfor use in other vehicles, for futureprogramming of an integrated remote

control, or simply for continued use as ahand-held remote control to operate therespective device in other situations.

Reprogramming a single signal transmitter buttonTo program a device using a signaltransmitter button previously trained, followthese steps:X Switch on the ignition.X Press and hold the desired signal

transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do notrelease the button.Indicator lamp : will begin to flash after20 seconds.

X Without releasing the signal transmitterbutton, proceed with programming startingwith step 3.

Operation of integrated remote controlX Switch on the ignition.X Select and press the appropriate

integrated signal transmitter button (;,= or ?) to activate the remote controlleddevice.The integrated remote control transmittercontinues to send the signal as long as thebutton is pressed – up to 20 seconds.

Erasing the integrated remote control memoryi If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of

all three channels.

X Switch on the ignition.X Simultaneously press and hold outer signal

transmitter buttons ; and ?, forapproximately 20 seconds, until indicatorlamp : flashes rapidly. Do not hold forlonger than 30 seconds.The codes of all three channels are erased.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 174

Programming tipsIf you are having difficulty programming theintegrated remote control, here are somehelpful tips:RCheck the frequency of hand-held remote

control A (typically located on the reverseside of the remote). The integrated remotecontrol is compatible with radio-frequencydevices operating between 280-390 MHz.RPut a new battery in hand-held remote

control A. This will increase the likelihoodof the hand-held remote control sending astronger and more accurate signal to theintegrated remote control.RWhile performing step 3, hold hand-held

remote control A at different lengths andangles from the signal transmitter button(;, = or ?) you are programming.Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the sameangle at varying distances.RIf another hand-held remote control is

available for the same device, try theprogramming steps again using that otherhand-held remote control. Make sure newbatteries are in the hand-held remotecontrol before beginning the procedure.RStraighten the antenna wire from the

garage door opener assembly. This mayhelp improve transmitting and/or receivingsignals.

i Certain types of garage door openers areincompatible with the integrated remotecontrol. If you should experience furtherdifficulties with programming theintegrated remote control, contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or callthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA only) at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372),or the HomeLink® Hotline (USA only) at1-800-355-3515, or the Customer Service(Canada only) at 1-800-387-0100.









Floormats

G Warning!Whenever you are using floormats, make surethere is enough clearance and that thefloormats are securely fastened.Floormats should always be securely fastenedusing the fastening equipment.Before driving off, check that the floormatsare securely in place and adjust them ifnecessary. A loose floormat could slip andhinder proper functioning of the pedals.Do not place several floormats on top of eachother as this may impair pedal movement.

Useful features 175

Cont

rols

in d

etai

l


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 175

Z

X Move the driver’s seat or passenger seat asfar to the rear as possible.

X Removing: Pull floormat off of retainerpins ;.

X Installing: Press floormat eyelets : ontoretainer pins ;.


ntro

ls in

det

ail


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 176

Vehicle equipment ............................ 178The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 178At the gas station ............................. 178Engine compartment ........................ 180Tires and wheels ............................... 186Winter driving ................................... 207Driving instructions .......................... 209Maintenance ...................................... 213Vehicle care ....................................... 215

177

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 177

Vehicle equipment


The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

The more cautiously you treat your vehicleduring the break-in period, the more satisfiedyou will be with its performance later on.RDrive your vehicle during the first

1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying butmoderate vehicle and engine speeds.RDuring this period, avoid heavy loads (full

throttle driving) and excessive enginespeeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpmin each gear).RSelect C as the preferred shift program

(Y page 106) for the first 1 000 miles(1 500 km).RAvoid accelerating by kickdown.RDo not attempt to slow the vehicle down by

shifting to a lower gear using the gearselector lever.RSelect gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 (Y page 106)

only when driving at moderate speeds (forhill driving).

After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you maygradually increase vehicle and engine speedsto the permissible maximum.

! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:RDuring the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km),

do not exceed a speed of 85 mph(140 km/h).RDuring this period, avoid engine speeds

above 4 500 rpm in each gear.RShift gears in a timely manner.

All of the above instructions, as may apply toyour vehicle type, also apply when driving thefirst 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engineor the rear differential has been replaced.

i Always obey applicable speed limits.

At the gas station

Refueling

G Warning!Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.It burns violently and can cause seriouspersonal injury.Never allow sparks, flames or smokingmaterials near gasoline!Turn off the engine before refueling.Whenever you are around gasoline, avoidinhaling fumes and any skin or clothingcontact. Extinguish all smoking materials.Direct skin contact with fuels and theinhalation of fuel vapors are damaging yourhealth.

G Warning!Overfilling of the fuel tank may createpressure in the system which could cause agas discharge. This could cause the gas tospray back out when removing the fuel pumpnozzle, which could cause personal injury.

! Never refuel vehicles with gasoline enginewith diesel fuel. Even small amounts ofdiesel fuel will damage the fuel system andengine. Damage resulting from the use ofnon-approved fuels or fuel additives orresulting from mixing gasoline with dieselfuel is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

! If you have accidentally filled the tankwith incorrect or non-approved fuel, do notswitch on the ignition. Otherwise theincorrect or non-approved fuel will get intothe fuel lines. The fuel system must bedrained completely. Contact an authorized

178 At the gas stationOp

erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 178

Mercedes-Benz Center to have the fuelsystem drained completely.

! To prevent damage to the catalyticconverters, only use premium unleadedgasoline in this vehicle.Any noticeable irregularities in engineoperation should be repaired promptly.Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel mayreach the catalytic converter, causing it tooverheat and potentially start a fire.

i Only use premium unleaded gasoline witha minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91(average of 96 RON/86 MON).Information on gasoline quality cannormally be found on the fuel pump. Pleasecontact gas station personnel in caselabels on the pump cannot be found.For more information on gasoline, see“Premium unleaded gasoline”(Y page 306), see “Fuel requirements”(Y page 307), or contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, or visitwww.mbusa.com (USA only).

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO automaticallylocks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.

i In case the central locking system doesnot release the fuel filler flap, or theopening mechanism is clamping, contactRoadside Assistance or an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

The fuel filler flap is located on the right-handside of the vehicle towards the rear.

X Turn off the engine.

i Leaving the engine running and the fuelfiller cap open can cause the yellow fueltank reserve warning lamp to flash and themalfunction indicator lamp = (USAonly14) or ; (Canada only14) toilluminate.For more information, see also “Practicalhints” (Y page 263).

X Remove the SmartKey from the starterswitch.KEYLESS-GO: Open the driver’s door. Thisputs the starter switch in position 0, sameas with the SmartKey removed from thestarter switch. The driver’s door then canbe closed again.

X Opening: Press fuel filler flap : at thepoint indicated by the arrow.

X Turn fuel filler cap ; counterclockwise.X Take off fuel filler cap ;.

X Place fuel filler cap ; in direction of arrowinto holder =.

X Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel.X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit

cuts out – do not top off or overfill.X Closing: Turn fuel filler cap ; clockwise

until it audibly engages.X Close fuel filler flap :.

14 Depending on vehicle production date, U.S. vehicles may be equipped with the Canada engine malfunctionindicator lamp ;.

At the gas station 179

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 179

Z

Check regularly and before a long tripFor information on quantities andrequirements of operating agents, see “Fuels,coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 303).Check the following:REngine oil level (Y page 181)RTire inflation pressure (Y page 189)RCoolant level (Y page 184)RVehicle lighting (Y page 271)RWasher system and headlamp cleaning

system (Y page 185)RBrake fluid (Y page 185)

Engine compartment

Hood

G Warning!Do not pull the release lever while the vehicleis in motion. Otherwise the hood could beforced open by passing air flow.This could cause the hood to come loose andinjure you and/or others.

Opening

G Warning!Do not open the hood when the engine isoverheated. You could be seriously injured.Observe the coolant temperature gauge todetermine whether the engine may beoverheated. If you see flames or smokecoming from the engine compartment, moveaway from the vehicle. Wait until the enginehas cooled. If necessary, call the firedepartment.

G Warning!You could be injured when the hood is open –even when the engine is turned off.Parts of the engine can become very hot. Toprevent burns, let the engine cool completelybefore touching any components on the

vehicle. Comply with all relevant safetyprecautions.

G Warning!To help prevent personal injury, stay clear ofmoving parts when the hood is open and theengine is running.The radiator fan may continue to run forapproximately 30 seconds or may evenrestart after the engine has been turned off.Stay clear of fan blades.

G Warning!The engine is equipped with a transistorizedignition system. Because of the high voltageit is dangerous to touch any components(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnosticsocket) of the ignition systemRwith the engine runningRwhile starting the engineRwhen the ignition is switched on and the

engine is turned manually

X Pull hood lock release lever :.The hood is unlocked.

! Never open the hood if the wiper arms arefolded forward away from the windshield.Otherwise the windshield wipers or thehood could be damaged.

180 Engine compartmentOp

erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 180

X Push handle ; under the hood upwards.X Pull up on the hood and then release it.

The hood will be held open at shoulderheight by gas-filled struts automatically.

Closing

G Warning!When closing the hood, use extreme cautionnot to catch hands or fingers. Be careful thatyou do not close the hood on anyone.Make sure the hood is securely engagedbefore driving off. Do not continue driving ifthe hood can no longer engage after anaccident, for example. The hood couldotherwise come loose while the vehicle is inmotion and injure you and/or others.

X Let the hood drop from a height ofapproximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check to make sure the hood is fullyclosed.If you can raise the hood at a point abovethe headlamps, then it is not properlyclosed. Open it again and let it drop withsomewhat greater force.

Engine oilThe amount of oil your engine consumes willdepend on a number of factors, includingdriving style. Increased oil consumption canoccur when the vehicle is new or the vehicleis driven frequently at higher engine speeds.

Engine oil consumption checks should onlybe made after the vehicle break-in period.

! Do not use any special lubricant additives,as these may damage the drive assemblies.Using special additives not approved byMercedes-Benz may cause damage notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.For further information contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Notes on checking engine oil levelWhen checking the oil level the vehicle mustbe parked on level ground.SL 550, SL 63 AMG: The vehicle must havebeen stationary for at least 5 minutes with theengine turned off.SL 600, SL 65 AMG: With the engine atoperating temperature, the vehicle must havebeen stationary for at least 5 minutes with theengine turned off.With the engine not at operating temperature,the vehicle must have been stationary for atleast 30 minutes with the engine turned off.

Checking engine oil level with the oil dipstick On the SL 550 and SL 63 AMG you can checkthe engine oil level with the oil dipstick.

i In vehicles without an oil dipstick, theengine oil level is measured with the controlsystem (Y page 182).

X Open the hood (Y page 180).

Engine compartment 181

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 181

Z

X Pull out oil dipstick :.X Wipe oil dipstick : clean.X Slowly insert oil dipstick : fully into the

dipstick guide tube.X Pull out oil dipstick : again after

approximately 3 seconds to obtainaccurate reading.

The oil level is correct when it is betweenlower (min) mark = and upper (max)mark ; of oil dipstick :.

i SL 550 only:The filling quantity between the upper andlower marks on the oil dipstick isapproximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).

i SL 63 AMG only:The filling quantity between the upper andlower marks on the oil dipstick isapproximately 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).

X If necessary, add engine oil.For more information on engine oil, see“Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”(Y page 303).For information on messages in themultifunction display concerning engine oil,see the “Practical hints” section(Y page 247).

Checking engine oil level with the control systemOn the SL 600 and SL 65 AMG you can checkthe engine oil level with the control system.

i In vehicles without engine oil measuringsystem, the engine oil level is measuredwith the oil dipstick (Y page 181).

X Switch on the ignition.The standard display appears in themultifunction display (Y page 116).

X Press button * or & on themultifunction steering wheel repeatedlyuntil the following message appears in themultifunction displays:

X After about 3 seconds, the followingmessage appears in the left multifunctiondisplay: Engine Oil Level Measuring Now.

One of the following messages willsubsequently appear in the rightmultifunction display:REngine Oil LevelOKRAdd 1.0 qtto reach max.oil level.(Canada: 1.0 liter)RAdd 1.5 qtsto reach max.oil level.(Canada: 1.5 liters)RAdd 2.0 qtsto reach max.oil level.(Canada: 2.0 liters)

i If you want to interrupt the checkingprocedure, press button * or & onthe multifunction steering wheel.

X If necessary, add engine oil.For more information on engine oil, see“Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”(Y page 303).

Other display messagesIf the ignition is not switched on, the followingmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay:Turn ignition on to measure engine oil level.X Switch on the ignition.


erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 182

If you see the message:Observe Waiting TimeX If the engine is at operating temperature,

wait 5 minutes before repeating checkprocedure.

X If the engine is not at operatingtemperature yet, you must wait 30 minutesbefore checking oil.

If you see the message:Engine Oil LevelNot With Engine RunningX Turn off the engine.X If the engine is at operating temperature,

wait 5 minutes before checking oil.X If the engine is not at operating

temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutesbefore checking oil.

If there is excess engine oil with the engine atnormal operating temperature, the followingmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay:Engine Oil LevelReduce Oil LevelX Have excess oil siphoned or drained off.

Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

! Excess oil must be siphoned or drainedoff. It could cause damage to the engineand emission control system not coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

For information on messages in themultifunction display concerning engine oil,see the “Practical hints” section(Y page 249).

Adding engine oil ! Only use approved engine oils and oil

filters required for vehicles withMaintenance System. For a listing ofapproved engine oils and oil filters, contact

an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center orvisit www.mbusa.com (USA only).The following will result in engine oremission control system damage notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty:RUsing engine oils and oil filters of

specification other than those expresslyrequired for the Maintenance System.RChanging of oil and oil filter at change

intervals longer than those called for bythe Maintenance System.RUsing any oil additives.

Example illustration: SL 550

Example illustration: SL 63 AMG

X Unscrew filler cap : from filler neck.X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not

to overfill with oil.Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.Avoid environmental damage caused by oilentering the ground or water.


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 183

Z

! Excess oil must be siphoned or drainedoff. It could cause damage to the engineand emission control system not coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

X Screw filler cap : back on filler neck.For more information on engine oil, see the“Technical data” section (Y page 303) and(Y page 305).

Transmission fluid levelThe transmission fluid level does not need tobe checked. If you notice transmission fluidloss or gearshifting malfunctions, have anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center check thetransmission.

Active Body Control (ABC) fluid level Regular fluid level check is not required. If younotice fluid leaks or malfunction messages inthe multifunction display, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center check the ABCsystem.

Coolant levelThe engine coolant is a mixture of water andanticorrosion/antifreeze.When checking the coolant level, the vehiclemust be parked on level ground, and thecoolant temperature must be below 158‡(70†).

G Warning!In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:RUse extreme caution when opening the

hood if there are any signs of steam orcoolant leaking from the cooling system, orif the coolant temperature gauge indicatesthat the coolant is overheated.RDo not remove the cap on the coolant

expansion tank if the coolant temperatureis above 158‡ (70†). Allow the engine to

cool down before removing the cap. Thecoolant expansion tank contains hot fluidand is under pressure.RUsing a rag, slowly open the cap

approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwiseto relieve excess pressure. If openedimmediately, scalding hot fluid and steamwill be blown out under pressure.RDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.

Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol whichmay burn if it comes into contact with hotengine parts.

X Using a rag, slowly open cap approximately1/2 turn counterclockwise to relieve excesspressure.

X Continue turning the cap counterclockwiseand remove it.The coolant level is correct if the levelRfor cold coolant: is up to the upper mark

on the bracing rib of coolant expansiontank : (translucent)Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in

(1.5 cm) higherX Add coolant as required.X Screw cap back on and tighten it.

! SL 600 and SL 65 AMG: Only open the capon the coolant expansion tank. Never openthe cap between the two charge-aircoolers. Otherwise, the engine could bedamaged.


erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 184

For more information on coolant, see the“Technical data” section (Y page 304) and(Y page 307).

Washer system and headlamp cleaning system

G Warning!Washer solvent/antifreeze is highlyflammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it mayignite and burn. You could be seriouslyburned.

! Always use washer solvent/antifreezewhere temperatures may fall belowfreezing point. Failure to do so could resultin damage to the washer system/fluidreservoir.

! Only use washer fluid which is suitable forplastic lenses. Improper washer fluid candamage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not use distilled or deionized water inthe washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, thewasher fluid level sensor could bedamaged.

Fluid for the washer system and the headlampcleaning system is supplied from the washerfluid reservoir.During all seasons, use MB WindshieldWasher Concentrate “MB SummerFit”. Mix itwith water or premixed washer solvent/antifreeze depending on the ambienttemperature (Y page 309).

X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tabof cap : upwards.

X Refill the washer fluid reservoir.X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press

cap : onto filler hole until it engages.For more information, see “Washer systemand headlamp cleaning system”(Y page 305).

Brake fluid level! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake

fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimummark or below, have the brake systemchecked for brake pad thickness and leaksimmediately. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center immediately. Donot add brake fluid as this will not solve theproblem. For more information, see“Practical hints”.

When checking the brake fluid level, thevehicle must be parked on level ground.


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 185

Z

The brake fluid level is correct when it isbetween lower mark (MIN) ; and uppermark (MAX) : of the brake fluid reservoir.

Tires and wheels

Safety notesContact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor information on tested and recommendedrims and tires for summer and winteroperation. They can also offer adviceconcerning tire service and purchase.

G Warning!Replace rims or tires with the samedesignation, manufacturer and type as shownon the original part. For further informationcontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If incorrectly sized rims and tires aremounted, the wheel brakes or suspensioncomponents can be damaged. Also, theoperating clearance of the wheels and thetires may no longer be correct.

G Warning!Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tiretread is worn to minimum tread depth, or ifthe tires have sustained damage, replacethem.When replacing rims, only use genuineMercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for theparticular rim type. Failure to do so can resultin the bolts loosening and possibly anaccident.Retreaded tires are not tested orrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always berecognized on retreads. The operating safetyof the vehicle cannot be assured when suchtires are used.

G Warning!If you feel a sudden significant vibration orride disturbance, or you suspect that possibledamage to your vehicle has occurred, you

should turn on the hazard warning flashers,carefully slow down, and drive with caution toan area which is a safe distance from the road.Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbodyfor possible damage. If the vehicle or tiresappear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to thenearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center ortire dealer for repairs.

G Warning!Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affectsthe ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Youcould lose control of the vehicle. Continueddriving with a flat tire or driving at high speedwith a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

Important guidelinesROnly use sets of tires and rims of the same

type and make.RTires must be of the correct size for the rim.RBreak in new tires for approximately

60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.RRegularly check the tires and rims for

damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tireinflation pressure loss and damage to thetire beads.RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire

inflation pressure and correct as required.RDo not allow your tires to wear down too

far. Adhesion properties on wet roads aresharply reduced at tread depths of lessthan 1/8 in (3 mm).RWhen replacing individual tires, you should

mount new tires on the front wheels first(on vehicles with same-sized wheels allaround).

186 Tires and wheelsOp

erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 186

Recommended tire inflation pressure

G Warning!Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire andLoading Information placard located on thedriver’s door B-pillar (Y page 193).The tire inflation pressure should be checkedregularly. Only adjust the tire inflationpressure on cold tires. The tires can beconsidered cold if the vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours or driven less than1 mile (1.6 km). Depending on the ambienttemperature, the driving speed and the tireload, the tire temperature changes. When thetire temperature changes by 18‡ (10†), thetire inflation pressure will change byapproximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar). Keep this inmind when checking tire inflation pressure onwarm tires and adjust the tire pressure onlyif the tire inflation pressure is too low for thecurrent operating conditions. If you check thetire inflation pressure when the tires arewarm, the reading will be higher than the coldreading. This is normal. Do not let air out tomatch the specified cold tire inflation

pressure. Otherwise, the tire will beunderinflated.Follow recommended cold tire inflationpressures listed on Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver’s doorB-pillar.Keeping the tires properly inflated providesthe best handling, tread life and ridingcomfort.In addition to the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver’s doorB-pillar, also consult the tire inflationpressure label on the inside of the filler flapfor any additional information pertaining tospecial driving situations. For moreinformation, see “Important notes on tireinflation pressure” (Y page 188).

i Data shown on Tire and LoadingInformation placard example are forillustration purposes only. Tire data arespecific to each vehicle and may vary fromdata shown in the following illustration.Refer to Tire and Loading Informationplacard on vehicle for actual data specificto your vehicle.

The Tire and Loading Information placard liststhe recommended cold tire inflationpressures : for maximum loaded vehicleweight. The tire inflation pressures listedapply to the tires installed as originalequipment.

Tires and wheels 187

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 187

Z

Important notes on tire inflation pressure

G Warning!If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly,check the tires for punctures from foreignobjects and/or whether air is leaking from thevalves or from around the rim.

Tire temperature and tire inflation pressureare also increased while driving, dependingon the driving speed and the tire load.If you will be driving your vehicle at highspeeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,where it is legal and conditions allow, consultthe tire inflation pressure label on the insideof the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the coldtire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust thetire inflation pressure, excessive heat canbuild up and result in sudden tire failure.If you are not sure about the proper tireinflation pressure, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

i Driving comfort may be reduced when thetire inflation pressure is adjusted to thevalue for speeds above 100 mph(160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflationpressure label located on the inside of thefuel filler flap.

Make sure to readjust the tire inflationpressure for normal driving speeds.Supplemental tire inflation pressureinformation for different loading conditions ofthe vehicle can be found on the tire inflationpressure label. The tire inflation pressurelabel is located on the inside of the fuel fillerflap.For the tire inflation pressure for sparewheels such as Minispare wheels or sparewheels with collapsible tire refer toRthe yellow label on the spare wheel rimRthe “Technical data” section of this

Operator’s Manual (Y page 303)Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on

the driver’s door B-pillar

Unless specified otherwise, the tire inflationpressures on the tire inflation pressure labelare valid for all approved, factory-equippedtires.

i Data shown on tire inflation pressurelabel examples are for illustration purposesonly. Tire inflation pressure data arespecific to each vehicle and may vary fromdata shown in the following illustrations.Refer to the tire inflation pressure label onvehicle for actual data specific to yourvehicle.

Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for allapproved, factory equipped tires

When a tire size is specified, the tire inflationpressure that follows applies to thatparticular tire size only.

Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures forparticular tire sizes

Some tire inflation pressure labels may onlyshow the rim diameter instead of the entiretire size, e.g. R 18 or 18".The rim diameter is part of the tire size asspecified on the tire sidewall (Y page 201).


erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 188

Example illustration: Tire inflation pressuresspecific to rim diameter

Potential problems associated with underinflated and overinflated tires

Underinflated tiresG Warning!Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.

Underinflated tires canRcause excessive and uneven tire wearRadversely affect fuel economyRlead to tire failure from being overheatedRadversely affect handling characteristics

Overinflated tiresG Warning!Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.

Overinflated tires canRadversely affect handling characteristicsRcause uneven tire wear

Rbe more prone to damage from roadhazardsRadversely affect ride comfortRincrease stopping distance

Checking tire inflation pressure

Safety notes

G Warning!Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

Check the tire inflation pressure at least oncea month.Check and adjust the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold (Y page 187).

Checking tire inflation pressure manuallyFollow the steps below to achieve correct tireinflation pressure:X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.X Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire

gauge and check against therecommended tire inflation pressure on the


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 189

Z

Tire and Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar (Y page 194). Ifnecessary, add air to achieve therecommended tire inflation pressure.

X If you have overfilled the tire, release tireinflation pressure by pushing the metalstem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen.Then recheck the tire inflation pressurewith the tire gauge.

X Install the valve cap.X Repeat this procedure for each tire.

Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced TPMS)Your vehicle is equipped with the AdvancedTire Pressure Monitoring System (AdvancedTPMS). It measures the tire inflation pressurein the vehicle’s tires and issues warnings incase of pressure loss in one or more of thetires.The TPMS is equipped with a combination lowtire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale(USA) or a low tire pressure telltale (Canada)in the instrument cluster. Depending on howthe telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tirepressure condition or a malfunction in theTPMS system itself:RIf the telltale illuminates continuously, one

or more of your tires is significantlyunderinflated. There is no malfunction inthe TPMS.RUSA only: If the telltale flashes for 60

seconds and then stays illuminated, theTPMS system itself is not operatingproperly.

The TPMS only functions on wheels that areequipped with the proper electronic sensors.

G Warning!The TPMS does not indicate a warning forwrongly selected inflation pressures. Alwaysadjust tire inflation pressure according to theTire and Loading Information placard or the

supplemental tire inflation pressureinformation on the inside of the fuel filler flap.The TPMS is not able to issue a warning dueto a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tireblowout caused by a foreign object). In thiscase bring the vehicle to a halt by carefullyapplying the brakes and avoiding abruptsteering maneuvers.

G Warning!Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on theinside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicatedon the Tire and Loading Information placardor the tire inflation pressure label, you shoulddetermine the proper tire inflation pressurefor those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly underinflated tire causes the tireto overheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when


erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 190

the system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale willflash for approximately 1 minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue upon subsequentvehicle start-ups as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

i USA only:If a condition causing the TPMS tomalfunction develops, it may take up to10 minutes for the system to signal amalfunction using the TPMS telltaleflashing and illumination sequence.The telltale extinguishes after a fewminutes driving if the malfunction has beencorrected.

Tire pressure inquiries are made using themultifunction display. The current tireinflation pressure for each tire appears in themultifunction display after a few minutes ofdriving.

i Possible differences between thereadings of a tire pressure gauge of an airhose, e.g. gas station equipment, and thevehicle’s control system can occur. The tirepressure displayed by the control systemapply to sea level. In high-altitudelocations, the reading on a tire pressuregauge will be higher than the reading issuedby the vehicle’s control system. Do not

reduce the tire inflation pressure undersuch circumstances.

X Switch on the ignition.X Press button V or U on the

multifunction steering wheel repeatedlyuntil the standard display appears in themultifunction display (Y page 116).

X Press button & or * until the currentinflation pressure for each tire appears inthe multifunction display.

Example illustration

When the vehicle has been parked for longerthan 20 minutes, the message Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes. appears in themultifunction display.The TPMS recognizes new wheels or sensorsautomatically after the learn-in phase. As longas the tire inflation pressure values cannot beallocated to the individual wheels, themessage Tire Pressure Monitor Active Menu: R-Button appears. Despite thismessage, the tire inflation pressure valuesare monitored already.

i With a spare wheel mounted, the systemmay still indicate the tire inflation pressureof the removed road wheel for someminutes. If this happens, keep in mind thatthe indicated value where the spare wheelis mounted does not reflect the actualspare tire inflation pressure.

i Operating radio transmission equipment(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) inor near the vehicle could cause the TPMSto malfunction.


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 191

Z



interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired.






Tire inflation pressure warningsIf the system detects a significant loss of tireinflation pressure in one or more than onetire, a message appears in the multifunctiondisplay. In addition, an acoustic warningsounds and the low tire pressure telltale in theinstrument cluster comes on.

The respective tire is indicated by a redrectangle.

Restarting Advanced TPMSG Warning!It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tireinflation pressure to the recommended coldtire inflation pressure. Underinflated tiresaffect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.You might lose control over the vehicle.

When you restart the TPMS, the system setsnew reference values for each tire.The TPMS must be restarted when you haveadjusted the tire inflation pressure to a newlevel (e.g. because of different load or drivingconditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated tothe current tire inflation pressures.

i Canada only:The TPMS usually recognizes tire pressureadjustments and sets new reference valuesautomatically. You can, however, restartthe TPMS manually as described.

Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tireinflation pressure to the inflation pressurerecommended for the vehicle operatingcondition. Tire inflation pressure should onlybe adjusted on cold tires. Observe therecommended tire inflation pressure on theTire and Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may havesupplemental tire inflation pressureinformation for driving at high speeds or forvehicle loads less than the maximum loadedvehicle condition. If such information isprovided, it can be found on the inside of thefuel filler flap.X Using the Tire and Loading Information

placard on the driver’s door B-pillar(Y page 194) or the supplemental tireinflation pressure information on the insideof the fuel filler flap, make sure the tireinflation pressure of all four tires is correct.

X Switch on the ignition.X Press button V or U on the

multifunction steering wheel repeatedlyuntil the standard display appears in themultifunction display (Y page 116).


erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 192

X Press button & or * repeatedly untilyou see the current inflation pressures foreach tire appear in the display or thefollowing message appears in themultifunction display: Tire pressuredisplayed afterdriving fora few minutes.

X Press the reset button (Y page 111).The following message will appear in themultifunction display:Restart tirepressure monitor?

X If you wish to confirm: Press buttonW.The following message will appear in themultifunction display:Tire Pressure MonitorRestartedAfter driving a few minutes the systemverifies that the current tire inflationpressures are within the system’s specifiedrange. Afterwards the current tire inflationpressures are accepted as reference valuesand then monitored.

X If you wish to cancel: Press button X.

i When the wheel positions have beenchanged, the inflation pressure of a tiremay be displayed for the wrong positiontemporarily. After driving for a few minutes,the inflation pressure will be shown for thecorrect position.

Maximum tire inflation pressure

G Warning!Never exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure. Follow recommended tire inflationpressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tireswear excessively and/or unevenly, adverselyaffect handling and fuel economy, and aremore likely to fail from being overheated.

Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires canadversely affect handling and ride comfort,wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,and result in sudden deflation (blowout)because they are more likely to becomepunctured or damaged by road debris,potholes etc.

i For illustration purposes only. Actual dataon tires are specific to each vehicle andmay vary from data shown in aboveillustration.

This is the maximum permissible tire inflationpressure : for the tire.Always follow the recommended tire inflationpressure (Y page 187) for proper tireinflation.

Loading the vehicleTwo labels on your vehicle show how muchweight it may properly carry.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

can be found on the driver’s doorB-pillar. This placard tells you importantinformation about the number of peoplethat can be in the vehicle and the totalweight that can be carried in the vehicle.It also contains information on the propersize and recommended tire inflation


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 193

Z

pressures for the original equipment tireson your vehicle.

(2) The certification label, also found on thedriver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about thegross weight capacity of your vehicle,called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants, fuel andcargo. The certification label also tellsyou about the front and rear axle weightcapacity, called the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR).The GAWR is the total allowable weightthat can be carried by a single axle (frontor rear). Never exceed the GVWR orGAWR for either the front axle or rearaxle.

: Driver’s door B-pillar

Following is a discussion on how to work withthe information contained on the Tire andLoading Information placard with regards toloading your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information

G Warning!Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information placard on thedriver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tirescan overheat them, possibly causing ablowout. Overloading the tires can also resultin handling or steering problems, or brakefailure.

Tire and Loading Information placardi Data shown on Tire and Loading

Information placard example are forillustration purposes only. Load limit dataare specific to each vehicle and may varyfrom data shown in the followingillustration. Refer to Tire and LoadingInformation placard on vehicle for actualdata specific to your vehicle.

The Tire and Loading Information placardshowing load limit information : is locatedon the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 194).X Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

The combined weight of all occupants,cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (ifapplicable) should never exceed the weightreferenced in that statement.

Seating capacity i Data shown on Tire and Loading

Information placard example are forillustration purposes only. Seating capacitydata are specific to each vehicle and mayvary from data shown in the followingillustration. Refer to Tire and LoadingInformation placard on vehicle for actualdata specific to your vehicle.


erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 194

The seating capacity gives you importantinformation on the number of occupants thatcan be in the vehicle. The Tire and LoadingInformation placard showing seatingcapacity : is located on the driver’s doorB-pillar (Y page 194).

Steps for determining correct load limit The following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the “National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966”.X Step 1: Locate the statement “The

combined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”on your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kilograms or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the “XXX” amountequals 1 400 lbs and there will be five150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs(1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceed

the available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle willbe towing a trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle. Consultthis manual to determine how this reducesthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity of your vehicle (Y page 196).

The following table shows examples on howto calculate total and cargo load capacitieswith varying seating configurations andnumber and size of occupants. The followingexamples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This is for illustration purposes only. Make sureyou are using the actual load limit for yourvehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire andLoading Information placard (Y page 194).


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 195

Z

Example 1 Example 2

Step 1 Combined weight limit of occupants and cargo from Tire and Loading Information placard

1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs

Step 2 Number of occupants (driver and passengers)

1 2

Occupants weight Occupant 1: 175 lbs Occupant 1: 175 lbsOccupant 2: 195 lbs

Combined weight of all occupants

175 lbs 370 lbs

Step 3 Available cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight (total load limit from Tire and Loading Information placard minus combined weight of all occupants)

1 500 lbs - 175 lbs =1 325 lbs

1 500 lbs - 370 lbs =1 130 lbs

The higher the weight of all occupants, theless cargo and luggage load capacity isavailable.For more information, see “Trailer tongueload” (Y page 196).

Certification labelEven after careful determination of thecombined weight of all occupants, cargo andthe trailer tongue load (if applicable)(Y page 196) as to not exceed thepermissible load limit, you must make sureyour vehicle never exceeds the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for either the front orrear axle. You can obtain the GVWR andGAWR from the certification label. Thecertification label can be found on the driver’sdoor B-pillar, see the “Technical data” section(Y page 294).Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): Thetotal weight of the vehicle, all occupants, allcargo, and the trailer tongue load (ifapplicable) must never exceed the GVWR.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The totalallowable weight that can be carried by asingle axle (front or rear).To assure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible weight limits(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle),have the loaded vehicle (including driver,passengers and all cargo and, if applicable,trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitablecommercial scale.

Trailer tongue loadThe tongue load of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the loadyou can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer istowed, the tongue load must be added to theweight of all occupants riding and any cargoyou are carrying in the vehicle. The tongueload typically is 10% of the trailer weight andeverything loaded in it.Your Mercedes-Benz has been designedprimarily to carry passengers and their cargo.Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailertowing with your vehicle.


erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 196

Maximum tire load



The maximum tire load rating : is themaximum weight the tires are designed tosupport.For more information on tire load rating, see(Y page 202).For information on calculating total and cargoload capacities, see (Y page 195).

Direction of rotationUnidirectional tires offer added advantages,such as better hydroplaning performance. Tobenefit, however, you must make sure thetires rotate in the direction specified.An arrow on the sidewall indicates theintended direction of rotation of the tire.Spare wheels may be mounted against thedirection of rotation (spinning) even with aunidirectional tire for temporary use only until

the regular drive wheel has been repaired orreplaced. Always observe and followapplicable temporary use restrictions andspeed limitations indicated on the sparewheel.

MOExtended systemThe MOExtended system allows you tocontinue driving your vehicle even if there isa total loss of pressure in one or more tires.You may only use the MOExtended system inconjunction with the Advanced TPMS(Y page 190).For information on driving in case of pressureloss in one or more tires (emergency mode),see the “Practical hints” section(Y page 283).

Tire care and maintenance

G Warning!Regularly check the tires for damage.Damaged tires can cause tire inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle.Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tiretread is worn to minimum tread depth, or ifthe tires have sustained damage, replacethem.

Check the tire inflation pressure at least oncea month. For more information on checkingtire inflation pressure, see “Recommendedtire inflation pressure” (Y page 187).


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 197

Z

Tire inspection Every time you check the tire inflationpressure, you should also inspect your tiresfor the following:Rexcessive treadwear (Y page 198)Rcord or fabric showing through the tire’s

rubberRbumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the

tread or side of the tireReplace the tire if you find any of the aboveconditions.Make sure you also inspect the spare tireperiodically for condition and inflation. Sparetires will age and become worn over time evenif never used, and thus should be inspectedand replaced when necessary.

Life of tire

G Warning!Tires and spare tire should be replaced after6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.

The service life of a tire is dependent uponvarying factors including but not limited to:RDriving styleRTire inflation pressureRDistance driven

Tread depth

G Warning!Although the applicable federal motor vehiclesafety laws consider a tire to be worn whenthe treadwear indicators (TWI) become visibleat approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), werecommend that you do not allow your tiresto wear down to that level. As tread depthapproaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesionproperties on a wet road are sharply reduced.Depending upon the weather and/or roadsurface (conditions), the tire traction varieswidely.

Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharplyreduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in(3 mm).Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. These indicators are located in six placeson the tread circumference and becomevisible at a tread depth of approximately1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire isconsidered worn and should be replaced.The recommended minimum tire tread depthfor summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). Therecommended minimum tire tread depth forwinter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm).

Treadwear indicator : appears as a solidband across the tread.

Storing tires ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place

with as little exposure to light as possible.Protect tires from contact with oil, greaseand fuels.

Cleaning tires ! Never use a round nozzle to power wash

tires. The intense jet of water can result indamage to the tire.Always replace a damaged tire.


erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 198

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards

The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S.Government requirement designed to givedrivers consistent and reliable informationregarding tire performance. Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors:treadwear :, traction ;, and temperatureresistance =. Although not a Government ofCanada requirement, all tires made for sale inNorth America have these grades branded onthe sidewall.


Quality grades can be found, whereapplicable, on the tire sidewall between treadshoulder and maximum section width. Forexample:

Treadwear Traction Temperature

200 AA A

All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. Government test course. For example, a

tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half(1 1/2) times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction

G Warning!The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

G Warning!If ice has formed on the road, tire traction willbe substantially reduced. Under such weatherconditions, drive, steer and brake withextreme caution.

The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on a dry road.You should pay particular attention to thecondition of the road whenever the outsidetemperature is close to the freezing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires(Y page 207) with a minimum tread depth ofapproximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheelsfor the winter season to ensure normalbalanced handling characteristics. Onpacked snow, they can reduce your stoppingdistance compared to summer tires.Stopping distance, however, is stillconsiderably greater than when the road is


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 199

Z

not covered with snow or ice. Exerciseappropriate caution.

! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This maycause serious damage to the drivetrainwhich is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

Temperature

G Warning!The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeexcessive heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability todissipate heat when tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoor laboratorytest wheel. Sustained high temperature cancause the material of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

Rotating tires

G Warning!Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tiresare of the same dimension.If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-sizetires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),tire rotation is not possible.

G Warning!Have the tightening torque checked afterchanging a wheel. Wheels could becomeloose if not tightened with a torque of96 lb-ft (130 Nm).Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel boltsspecified for your vehicle’s rims.

Tire rotation can be performed on vehicleswith tires of the same dimension all around.If your vehicle is equipped with tires of thesame dimension all around, tires can berotated, observing a front-to-rear rotationpattern that will maintain the intendedrotation (spinning) direction of the tire(Y page 197).In some cases, such as when your vehicle isequipped with mixed-size tires (different tiredimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is notpossible.If applicable to your vehicle’s tireconfiguration, tires can be rotated accordingto the tire manufacturer’s recommendedintervals in the tire manufacturer’s warrantypamphlet located in your vehicle literatureportfolio. If none is available, tires should berotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, accordingto the degree of tire wear. The same rotation(spinning) direction must be maintained.Rotate tires before the characteristic tirewear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wearon front tires and tread center wear on reartires).Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheelsand brake disks, i.e. the inner side of thewheels/tires, during each rotation. Check forand ensure proper tire inflation pressure.For information on wheel change, see “Flattire” (Y page 276).

Tire labelingBesides tire name (sales designation) andmanufacturer name, a number of markingscan be found on a tire.


erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 200

Following are some explanations for themarkings on your vehicle’s tires:

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards(Y page 199)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 204)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 197)? Maximum tire inflation pressure

(Y page 193)A ManufacturerB Tire ply material (Y page 205)C Tire size designation, load and speed

rating (Y page 201)D Load identification (Y page 204)E Tire name

i For illustration purposes only. Actual dataon tires are specific to each vehicle andmay vary from data shown in aboveillustration.For more information, see “Rims and tires”(Y page 299).

Tire size designation, load and speed rating

: Tire width; Aspect ratio in %= Radial tire code? Rim diameterA Load index B Speed symbol


General: Depending on the design standardsused, the tire size molded into the sidewallmay have no letter or a letter preceding thetire size designation.No letter preceding the size designation (asillustrated above): Passenger car tire basedon European design standards.Letter “P” preceding the size designation:Passenger car tire based on U.S. designstandards.Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:Light Truck tire based on U.S. designstandards.Letter “T” preceding the size designation:Temporary spare tires which are highpressure compact spares designed fortemporary emergency use only.

Tire widthTire width : indicates the nominal tire widthin millimeters.


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 201

Z

Aspect ratioAspect ratio ; is the dimensionalrelationship between tire section height andsection width and is expressed in percentage.The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividingsection height by section width.

Tire codeTire code = indicates the tire constructiontype. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tirewith a speed capability above 149 mph(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the sizedesignation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). Foradditional information, see “Tire speedrating” (Y page 202).

Rim diameterRim diameter ? is the diameter of the beadseat, not the diameter of the rim edge. Therim diameter is indicated in inches (in).

Load indexG Warning!The tire load rating must always be at leasthalf of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise,tire failure may be the result which may causean accident and/or serious injury to you orothers.Always replace rims and tires with the samedesignation, manufacturer and type as shownon the original part.


Load index A is a numerical code associatedwith the maximum load a tire can support.

For example, a load rating of 91 correspondsto a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) thetire is designed to support. See also“Maximum tire load” (Y page 197) where themaximum load associated with the load indexis indicated in kilograms and lbs.For additional information on the load index,see “Load identification” (Y page 204).

Speed symbol G Warning!Even when permitted by law, never operate avehicle at speeds greater than the maximumspeed rating of the tires.Exceeding the maximum speed for which tiresare rated can lead to sudden tire failure,causing loss of vehicle control and possiblyresulting in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury and possible death, for youand for others.

Regardless of the tire speed rating, localspeed limits should be obeyed. Use prudentdriving speeds appropriate to prevailingconditions.Speed symbol B indicates the approvedmaximum speed (tire speed rating) for thetire.Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)


erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 202

Index Speed rating

ZR...(..Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)

RAt the tire manufacturer’s option, any tirewith a speed capability above 149 mph(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the sizedesignation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).To determine the maximum speedcapability of the tire, the servicedescription for the tire must be referred to.The service description is comprised ofload index A and speed symbol B.If your tire includes “ZR” in the sizedesignation and no service description isgiven, the tire manufacturer must beconsulted for the maximum speedcapability.If a service description is given, the speedcapability is limited by the speed symbol inthe service description. Example:245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y”is the service description. The letter “Y”designates the speed rating and the speedcapability of the tire is limited to 186 mph(300 km/h).RAny tire with a speed capability above

186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR”in the size designation AND the servicedescription must be placed in parenthesis.Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)”speed symbol in parenthesis designatesthe maximum speed capability of the tireas being above 186 mph (300 km/h).Consult the tire manufacturer for the actualmaximum permissible speed of the tire.

All-season and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S15 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S15 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

Index Speed rating

H M+S15 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S15 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all M+S rated tires provide specialwinter performance. Make sure the tiresyou use show M+S and the mountain/snowflakeimarking on the tiresidewall. These tires meet specific snowtraction performance requirements of theRubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)and the Rubber Association of Canada(RAC) and have been designed specificallyfor use in snow conditions.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding a speed of:R155 mph (250 km/h):

- SL 550- SL 550 (Sport Package)- SL 600- SL 600 (Sport Package)- SL 63 AMG- SL 65 AMG

R186 mph (300 km/h):- SL 63 AMG (Performance Package)- SL 65 AMG with increased top speed

The factory equipped tires on your vehiclemay have a tire speed rating above themaximum speed permitted by the electronicspeed limiter.Make sure your tires have the required tirespeed rating as specified for your vehicle inthe “Technical data” section (Y page 299),for example when purchasing new tires.If you are uncertain about the correct readingof the information given on a tire’s sidewall,any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will beglad to assist you.

15 or M+Sifor winter tires


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 203

Z

Load identification


In addition to the load index, special loadidentification : may be molded into the tiresidewall following the letter designating thespeed symbol B (Y page 201).RNo specification given: absence of any text

(like in above example) indicates astandard load (SL) tire.RXL or Extra Load: designates an extra load

(or reinforced) tire.RLight Load: designates a light load tire.RC, D, E: designates load range associated

with the maximum load a tire can carry ata specified pressure.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations require each new tiremanufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TINinto or onto a sidewall of each tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identifier. The TINfacilitates efforts by tire manufactures tonotify purchasers in recall situations or othersafety matters concerning tires. It givespurchasers the means to easily identify suchtires.The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’sidentification mark” ;, “Tire size” =, “Tiretype code” ? and “Date of manufacture”A.


DOT (Department of Transportation)Tire branding symbol : denotes that the tiremeets requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.

Manufacturer’s identification markManufacturer’s identification mark ;denotes the tire manufacturer.New tires have a mark with two symbols.Retreaded tires have a mark with foursymbols. For more information on retreadedtires, see (Y page 186).

Tire sizeCode = indicates the tire size.


erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 204

Tire type codeTire type code ? may, at the option of themanufacturer, be used as a descriptive codefor identifying significant characteristics ofthe tire.

Date of manufactureThe date of manufacture A identifies theweek and year of manufacture.The first two figures identify the week,starting with “01” to represent the first fullweek of the calendar year. The second twofigures represent the year.For example, “3208” represents the 32ndweek of 2008.

Tire ply material


This marking tells you about the type of cordand number of plies in the sidewall : andunder the tread ;.

Tire and loading terminology

Accessory weight The combined weight (in excess of thosestandard items which may be replaced) ofautomatic transmission, power steering,power brakes, power windows, power seats,

radio, and heater, to the extent that theseitems are available as factory-installedequipment (whether installed or not).

Air pressure The amount of air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch of the tire. Airpressure is expressed in pounds per squareinch (psi), kilopascal (kPa), or bar.

Aspect ratio Dimensional relationship between tiresection height and section width expressedin percentage.

Bar Metric unit for air pressure. There are14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.

Bead The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped bysteel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Cold tire inflation pressure Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle hasbeen sitting for at least 3 hours or driven nomore than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Curb weight The weight of a motor vehicle with standardequipment including the maximum capacityof fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped,air conditioning and additional optionalequipment, but without passengers andcargo.

DOT (Department of Transportation) A tire branding symbol which denotes the tiremeets requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.


Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 205

Z

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) The GAWR is the maximum permissible axleweight. The gross vehicle weight on each axlemust never exceed the GAWR for the frontand rear axle indicated on the certificationlabel located on the driver’s door B-pillar.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicleincluding fuel, tools, spare wheel, installedaccessories, passengers and cargo and, ifapplicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW mustnever exceed the GVWR indicated on thecertification label located on the driver’s doorB-pillar.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) This is the maximum permissible vehicleweight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight ofthe vehicle including all options, passengers,fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailertongue load). It is indicated on thecertification label located on the driver’s doorB-pillar.

Kilopascal (kPa) Metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPato 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressureis bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to1 bar.

Load index Numerical code associated with themaximum load a tire can support.

Maximum load rating The maximum load in kilograms and poundsthat can be carried by the tire.

Maximum loaded vehicle weight The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,total load limit, and production optionsweight.

Maximum permissible tire inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should ever be put in the tire.

Normal occupant weight The number of occupants the vehicle isdesigned to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lb).

Occupant distribution The distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Production options weight The combined weight of those installedregular production options weighing over5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of thosestandard items which they replace, notpreviously considered in curb weight oraccessory weight, including heavy dutybrakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy dutybattery, and special trim.

PSI (Pounds per square inch) A standard unit of measure for air pressure.

Recommended tire inflation pressure The recommended tire inflation pressure fornormal driving conditions is listed on the Tireand Loading Information placard located onthe driver’s door B-pillar. It provides besthandling, tread life and riding comfort.Supplemental information pertaining tospecial driving situations can be found on thetire inflation pressure label on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap.

Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tubeassembly upon which the tire beads areseated.


erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 206

Sidewall The portion of a tire between the tread andthe bead.

TIN (Tire Identification Number) Unique identifier which facilitates efforts bytire manufacturers to notify purchasers inrecall situations or other safety mattersconcerning tires and gives purchasers themeans to easily identify such tires. The TIN iscomprised of “Manufacturer’s identificationmark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Dateof manufacture”.

Tire ply composition and material used This indicates the number of plies or thenumber of layers of rubber-coated fabric inthe tire tread and sidewall. Tiremanufacturers also must indicate the plymaterials in the tire and sidewall, whichinclude steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

Tire speed rating Part of tire designation (speed symbol);indicates the speed range for which a tire isapproved.

Total load limit Rated cargo and luggage load plus68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’sdesignated seating capacity.

Traction The adhesive friction of a tire on a surface onwhich it moves. The amount of grip provided.

Tread The portion of a tire that comes into contactwith the road.

Treadwear indicators Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars”that show across the tread of a tire when only1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards A tire information system that providesconsumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,temperature and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle maximum load on the tire Load on an individual tire that is determinedby distributing to each axle its share of themaximum loaded vehicle weight and dividingit by two.

Winter driving

General informationHave your vehicle winterized at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Winter tires

G Warning!Winter tires with a tread depth of less than1/6 in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are nolonger suitable for winter operation.

G Warning!If you use your spare wheel when winter tiresare fitted on the other wheels, be aware thatthe difference in tire characteristics may verywell impair turning stability and that overalldriving stability may be reduced. Adapt yourdriving style accordingly.Have the spare wheel replaced by a regularroad wheel with a winter tire at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Winter driving 207

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 207

Z

Always use winter tires at temperaturesbelow 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry roadconditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tiresprovide special winter performance. Makesure the tires you use show the mountain/snowflakeimarking on the tire sidewall.These tires meet specific snow tractionperformance requirements of the RubberManufacturers Association (RMA) and theRubber Association of Canada (RAC) andhave been designed specifically for use insnow conditions. Use of winter tires is theonly way to achieve the maximumeffectiveness of your vehicle’s driving safetysystems such as the ABS and the ESP® inwinter operation.For safe handling, make sure all mountedwinter tires are of the same make and havethe same tread design.For information on winter tires for yourvehicle model, see the “Technical data”section (Y page 299).Always observe the speed rating of the wintertires installed on your vehicle.After installing winter tires:X Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust

it if necessary (Y page 189).X Restart the Advanced Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (Y page 190).

Snow chains! When driving with snow chains, always

select setting 1 of the vehicle level control.Other settings may result in damage to yourvehicle.

! Some tire sizes do not leave adequateclearance for snow chains. To help avoidserious damage to your vehicle or tires,make sure the use of snow chains ispermissible as specified in the “Technicaldata” section of this Operator’s Manual.

Snow chains should only be driven on snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed

30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soonas possible when driving on roads withoutsnow.Observe the following guidelines when usingsnow chains:RUse of snow chains is not permissible with

all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 299).RUse snow chains in pairs and on rear

wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’smounting instructions.

! If snow chains are mounted to the frontwheels, they may scrape against the bodyor axle components. The tires or the vehiclecould be damaged as a result.ROnly use snow chains that are approved by

Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad to advise you onthis subject.RUse of snow chains may be prohibited

depending on location. Always check localand state laws before installing snowchains.RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel.

i When driving with snow chains, you maywish to switch off the ESP® (Y page 56)before setting the vehicle in motion. Thiswill improve the vehicle’s traction.

Winter driving instructions

G Warning!If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, makesure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipeand from around the vehicle with the enginerunning. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide(CO) gases may enter vehicle interiorresulting in unconsciousness and death.To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, opena window slightly on the side of the vehiclenot facing the wind.

208 Winter drivingOp

erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 208

G Warning!The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.


The most important rule for slippery or icyroads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abruptacceleration, braking and steeringmaneuvers. Do not use the cruise controlsystem under such conditions.When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shiftthe automatic transmission to neutralposition N. Try to keep the vehicle undercontrol by corrective steering action.

i For information on driving with snowchains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 208).

Road salts and chemicals can adverselyaffect braking efficiency. Increased pedalforce may become necessary to produce thenormal brake effect.Depressing the brake pedal periodically whentraveling at length on salt-strewn roads canbring road-salt-impaired braking efficiencyback to normal.If the vehicle is parked after being driven onsalt-treated roads, the braking efficiencyshould be tested as soon as possible afterdriving is resumed.

G Warning!Make sure not to endanger any other roadusers when carrying out these brakingmaneuvers.

Driving instructions

Drive sensibly – save fuelTo save fuel you should:RKeep tires at the recommended inflation

pressures.RRemove unnecessary loads.RAllow engine to warm up under low load

use.RAvoid frequent acceleration and

deceleration.RHave all maintenance work performed at

the intervals specified in the MaintenanceBooklet and as required by theMaintenance system. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Fuel consumption is also increased by drivingin cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, onshort trips and in mountainous areas.

Drinking and driving

G Warning!Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment.The possibility of a serious or even fatalaccident are greatly increased when you drinkor take drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking ortaking drugs.

Pedals

G Warning!Make sure absolutely no objects areobstructing the pedals’ range of movement.Keep the driver’s footwell clear of allobstacles. If there are any floormats or

Driving instructions 209

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 209

Z

carpets in the footwell, make sure that thepedals still have sufficient clearance.During sudden driving or braking maneuvers,the objects could get caught between thepedals. You could then no longer brake oraccelerate. This could lead to accidents andinjury.

Power assistance

G Warning!There is no power assistance for the steeringand the brake when the engine is not running.Steering and braking requires significantlymore effort and you could lose control of thevehicle and cause an accident as a result.Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle isin motion.

G Warning!The brake system requires electrical energyfor operation.A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply orelectrical system may impair brake systemoperation and switch it into its emergencyoperation mode. In such a case, the red brakewarning lamp and warning messages in theinstrument cluster come on while driving. Tobrake, the driver must then apply significantlygreater brake pedal pressure and depress thepedal much further to obtain the expectedbrake effect. If necessary, apply full pressureto the brake pedal. Brakes are only applied tothe front wheels. Stopping distance isincreased! If there is a malfunction in theelectro-hydraulic brake system, werecommend that the vehicle be transportedwith all wheels off the ground using flatbed orappropriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.

Brakes

Downhill grades! When driving down long and steep

grades, relieve the load on the brakes byshifting into a lower gear to use theengine’s braking power. This helps preventoverheating of the brakes and reduceswear.When using the engine’s braking power, adrive wheel may not spin for an extendedperiod of time, e.g. on slippery roadsurfaces. This may cause serious damageto the drivetrain which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Continuous or hard braking

G Warning!Resting your foot on the brake pedal willcause excessive and premature wear of thebrake pads.It can also result in the brakes overheating,thereby significantly reducing theireffectiveness. It may not be possible to stopthe vehicle in sufficient time to avoid anaccident.

After hard braking, it is advisable to drive onfor some time, rather than immediately park,so that the air stream will cool down thebrakes faster.

Wet roads

G Warning!After driving in heavy rain for some timewithout applying the brakes or through waterdeep enough to wet brake components, thefirst braking action may be somewhatreduced and increased pedal pressure may benecessary to obtain expected brake effect.Maintain a safe distance from vehicles infront.

To help prevent brake disk corrosion afterdriving on wet or salt-covered roads, it isadvisable to brake the vehicle with

210 Driving instructionsOp

erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 210

considerable force prior to parking. The heatgenerated serves to dry the brakes.

Salt-covered roads

G Warning!A layer of salt on the brake discs and the brakelinings may cause a delay in the brakingeffect, resulting in a significantly increasedbraking distance, which could lead to anaccident.To avoid this danger, you should:Roccasionally brake carefully when you are

driving on salt-covered roads, so that anylayer of salt that may have built up on thebrake discs and the brake linings isremoved without putting other road usersat riskRmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle

ahead and drive with particular careRcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a

trip and immediately after commencing anew trip, so that salt residues are removedfrom the brake disc

Brake service! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may

be too low or the electro-hydraulic brakesystem may be malfunctioning if the brakewarning lamp in the instrument clustercomes on and an acoustic warning soundsalthough the parking brake is released.Observe additional messages in themultifunction display that may appear.Brake pad wear or a leak in the system maybe the reason for low brake fluid in thereservoir.Have the brake system inspectedimmediately. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

All checks and service work on the brakesystem should be carried out by qualifiedtechnicians only. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Only install brake pads and use brake fluidrecommended by Mercedes-Benz.

G Warning!If other than recommended brake pads areinstalled, or other than recommended brakefluid is used, the braking properties of thevehicle can be degraded to an extent that safebraking is substantially impaired. This couldresult in an accident.

! Because the ESP® operatesautomatically, the engine and ignition mustbe shut off (SmartKey in starter switchposition 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton in position 0 or 1) when the parkingbrake is being tested on a brake testdynamometer or when the vehicle is beingtowed with the front axle raised.Active braking action through the ESP®


If your brake system is only subjected tomoderate loads, you should occasionally testthe effectiveness of the brakes by applyingabove-normal braking pressure at higherspeeds. This will also enhance the grip of thebrake pads.

G Warning!Make sure not to endanger any other roadusers when carrying out these brakingmaneuvers.

Refer to the description of the Brake AssistSystem (BAS) (Y page 56).

High-performance brake system The high-performance brake system is onlyavailable on SL 63 AMG and SL 65 AMG.

G Warning!New vehicle brake pads and disks, andreplacement brake pads and disks may takeseveral hundred miles of driving until they

Driving instructions 211

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 211

Z

provide optimum braking efficiency. Until thattime, you may need to use increased brakepedal pressure while braking. Please be awareof this and adjust your driving and brakingaccordingly during this break-in period.Excessive high-demand braking will causecorrespondingly high brake wear. Please beattentive to the brake warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and brake conditionmessages in the multifunction display.Especially for high-performance driving, it isimportant to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

The high-performance brake system isdesigned to operate under the extremely highoperating demands required toaccommodate the performance capabilitiesof the vehicle.The brakes may produce a squeaking-typenoise depending on theRvehicle speedRbrake force appliedRambient conditions, e.g. temperature and

humidityAs with any brake system, the wear ofindividual brake system components such asbrake pads or disks strongly depends on yourdriving style and the conditions under whichyou operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving stylecalling for high-demand braking will causeyour vehicle’s brakes to wear more quickly.

Driving offWarm up the engine smoothly. Do not placefull load on the engine until the operatingtemperature has been reached.

! When driving off on a slippery surface, donot allow a drive wheel to spin for anextended period with the ESP® switchedoff. Doing so may cause serious damage tothe drivetrain which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Simultaneously depressing theaccelerator pedal and applying the brakesreduces engine performance and causespremature brake and drivetrain wear whichis not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

HydroplaningDepending on the depth of the water layer onthe road, hydroplaning may occur, even at lowspeeds and with new tires. In heavy rain orwhen conditions indicate possiblehydroplaning:X Reduce vehicle speed.X Avoid track grooves in the road.X Apply brakes cautiously.

Standing water! Do not drive through flooded areas.

Before driving through water, determine itsdepth.If you must drive through standing water,drive slowly to prevent water from enteringthe passenger compartment or the enginecompartment. Water in these areas couldcause damage to electrical components orwiring of the engine or transmission, orcould result in water being ingested by theengine through the air intake causingsevere internal engine damage. Any suchdamage is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Driving abroadIf you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S.or Canada, you should request dealernetwork information for your destination fromany authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

212 Driving instructionsOp

erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 212

Control and operation of radio transmitter

Safety notes

G Warning!Please do not forget that your primaryresponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’sattention to the road must always be his/herprimary focus when driving. For your safetyand the safety of others, we recommend thatyou pull over to a safe location and stopbefore placing or taking a telephone call.If you choose to use the telephone16 whiledriving, please use the hands-free device andonly use the telephone when road, weatherand traffic conditions permit. Somejurisdictions prohibit the driver from using amobile telephone while driving a vehicle.Only operate the COMAND16 (CockpitManagement and Data System) if road,weather and traffic conditions permit.Otherwise, you may not be able to observetraffic conditions and could endanger yourselfand others.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle iscovering a distance of 44 feet (approximately14 m) every second.

Emission controlCertain systems of the engine serve to keepthe toxic components of the exhaust gaseswithin permissible limits required by law.These systems will function properly onlywhen maintained strictly according to factoryspecifications. Any adjustments on theengine should, therefore, be carried out onlyby qualified Mercedes-Benz Centerauthorized technicians.Engine adjustments should not be altered inany way. Moreover, the specified serviceprocedures must be carried out regularly

according to Mercedes-Benz servicingrequirements. For details refer to theMaintenance Booklet.

G Warning!Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to yourhealth. All exhaust gas contains carbonmonoxide (CO), and inhaling it can causeunconsciousness and possible death.Do not run the engine in confined areas (suchas a garage) which are not properly ventilated.If you think that exhaust gas fumes areentering the vehicle while driving, have thecause determined and correctedimmediately. If you must drive under theseconditions, drive only with at least onewindow fully open at all times.

Maintenance

NotesThe Maintenance System in your vehicletracks the distance driven and the timeelapsed since the last maintenance service.It calculates other maintenance service workrequired, and calls for the next maintenanceservice accordingly.We strongly recommend that you have yourvehicle serviced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Have it serviced in accordancewith the Maintenance Booklet at the timescalled for by the maintenance serviceindicator.

i Failure to have the vehicle maintained inaccordance with the Maintenance Bookletand maintenance service indicator at thedesignated times/mileage will result invehicle damage not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

16 Observe all legal requirements.

Maintenance 213

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 213

Z

Maintenance service indicator message

Information on maintenance work andmaintenance intervals are specified in theMaintenance Booklet. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, or visitwww.mbusa.com (USA only) for additionalinformation.The maintenance service indicator messagewill notify you when the next maintenanceservice is required.Starting approximately 1 month before thenext maintenance service is required, one ofthe following messages will appear in theright multifunction display. The messages willappear while you are driving or when youswitch on the ignition (example service A):Service A In XXXXX Miles (km)Service A In XX DaysService A Due Now

Clearing the maintenance service indicator messageThe maintenance service indicator messageis cleared automatically after approximately30 seconds when you switch on the ignitionor when reaching the service threshold whiledriving.

X Clearing the maintenance service indicator message manually: Press resetbutton : on the instrument cluster.The standard display appears in themultifunction display.

Maintenance service term exceeded If you have exceeded the suggestedmaintenance service term, you will see thefollowing message in the right multifunctiondisplay:Service A Exceeded By XXXX Miles (km)Service A Exceeded By XXX DaysIn addition, a signal sounds when themessage appears.Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreset the maintenance service indicatorfollowing a completed maintenance service.

Calling up the maintenance service indicator display

i The menu overview can be found on(Y page 115).

You can call up the maintenance serviceindicator display at any time to check whenthe next maintenance service is required.X Switch on the ignition.X Press button V or U on the

multifunction steering wheel repeatedly

214 MaintenanceOp

erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 214

until the standard display (Y page 116)appears in the multifunction display.

X Press button * or & on themultifunction steering wheel until themaintenance service indicator display withthe service symbol ¯ or ± appearsin the left multifunction display and themaintenance service deadline appears inthe right multifunction display.

i If the battery was disconnected, the daysof disconnection will not be included in thecount shown by the maintenance serviceindicator. To arrive at the true maintenanceservice deadline, you will need to subtractthese days from the days shown in themaintenance service indicator message ormaintenance service indicator display.Do not confuse the maintenance serviceindicator with the engine oil level indicator4.

Resetting the maintenance service indicator

In the event that the maintenance service onyour vehicle is not carried out at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, you can have themaintenance service indicator reset.The automotive maintenance facility carryingout the maintenance service will find theinformation for resetting the maintenanceservice indicator in the maintenance-relevantliterature for your vehicle.Such literature is available at any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or directly fromMercedes-Benz.

! If the maintenance service indicator wasreset inadvertently, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center correct it.Only reset the maintenance serviceindicator if the proper maintenance servicehas been performed. Not following theproper maintenance service as describedin the Maintenance Booklet will result inengine damage and/or other vehicle

damage not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

Vehicle care

Cleaning and care of the vehicle

NotesRegular and proper care will help to maintainthe value of your vehicle.

G Warning!Many cleaning products can be hazardous.Some are poisonous, others are flammable.Always follow the instructions on theparticular container. Always open yourvehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning theinside.Never use fluids or solvents that are notdesigned for cleaning your vehicle.Always lock away cleaning products and keepthem out of reach of children.

! When cleaning the vehicle, do not usescouring agents. Never apply strong forceand only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge.Otherwise you may scratch or damage thesurface to be cleaned.

While in operation, even while parked, yourvehicle is subjected to varying externalinfluences which, if gone unchecked, canattack the paintwork as well as the vehicleunderbody and cause lasting damage.Such damage is caused not only by extremeand varying climatic conditions, but also by:RAir pollutionRRoad saltRTarRGravel and stone chippingTo avoid paint damage, you shouldimmediately remove:RGrease and oilRFuel

Vehicle care 215

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 215

Z

RCoolantRBrake fluidRBird droppingsRInsectsRTree resins etc.Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminatesthe aggressiveness and potency of the aboveadverse influences.More frequent washings are necessary todeal with unfavorable conditions:Rnear the oceanRin industrial areas (smoke, exhaust

emissions)Rduring winter operationYou should check your vehicle from time totime for stone chipping or other damage. Anydamage should be repaired as soon aspossible to prevent corrosion.In doing so, do not neglect the underbody ofthe vehicle. A prerequisite for a thoroughcheck is a washing of the underbody followedby a thorough inspection. Damaged areasneed to be re-undercoated.Your vehicle has been treated at the factorywith a wax-base rustproofing in the bodycavities which will last for the lifetime of thevehicle. Post-production treatment is neithernecessary nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility ofincompatibility between materials used in theproduction process and others applied later.We have selected vehicle-care products andcompiled recommendations which arespecially matched to our vehicles and whichalways reflect the latest technology. You canobtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-careproducts at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion ordamage due to negligent or incorrect carecannot always be removed or repaired withthe vehicle-care products recommended

here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The following topics deal with the cleaningand care of your vehicle and give important“how-to” information as well as references toMercedes-Benz approved vehicle-careproducts.

Power washer! Follow the instructions provided by the

power washer manufacturer onmaintaining a distance between the vehicleand the nozzle of the power washer.Never use a round nozzle to power-washtires. The intense jet of water can result indamage to the tire.Always replace a damaged tire.Always keep the jet of water moving acrossthe surface. Do not aim directly at electricalparts, electrical connectors, seals, or otherrubber parts.

i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:If a door handle is hit by a strong jet ofwater, and a SmartKey is withinapproximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, itcould be inadvertently locked or unlocked.

Tar stainsQuickly remove tar stains before they dry andbecome more difficult to remove. A tarremover is recommended.

Paintwork, painted body components! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape

or similar materials to painted bodycomponents may damage the paintwork.

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care shouldbe applied when water drops on the paintsurface do not “bead up”. This shouldnormally be done every 3 to 5 months,depending on the climate and washingdetergent used.

216 Vehicle careOp

erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 216

Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleanershould be applied if the paint surface showssigns of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).Do not apply any of these products or wax ifyour vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hoodis still hot.X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for

quick and provisional repairs of minor paintdamage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicledoors, etc.).

Vehicles with mat paintYour vehicle is painted with mat clear-coatpaint. Observe the following notes to avoidpaint damage caused by improper treatment.

i Only use insect remover and car shampooapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

! Do not polish the vehicle. Polishing willbrighten the paintwork.Do not use paintwork cleaning agents,abrasives, polishing compounds, or wax forpaintwork care. Such products areintended for use on high-polish surfaces.Using such products on mat paint causessevere damage, such as bright, spottedareas on the respective surface.Have paintwork repairs performed at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Have stone chipping repairs as soon aspossible.Remove the following immediately if possible.Do not apply strong force.RSoak insect remains with insect remover

and rinse them of with water afterwards.Use a soft bristle toothbrush for remainsthat have not come off.RSoak bird droppings with water and rinse

them of with water afterwards. Use a softbristle toothbrush for remains that have notcome off.RRemove tree resins, grease, oil, and

gasoline with silicone remover.

RDab off wax with silicone remover.RDab off tar splashes or tar stains with tar

remover.

Engine cleaningPrior to cleaning the engine compartment,make sure to protect electrical componentsand connectors from contact with water andcleaning agents.Corrosion protection, such as MBAnticorrosion Wax should be applied to theengine compartment after every enginecleaning. Before applying, all control linkagebushings and joints should be lubricated. Thepoly-V-belt and all pulleys should beprotected from any wax.

Vehicle washingIn the winter, thoroughly remove all traces ofroad salt as soon as possible.When washing the vehicle underbody, do notforget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.

i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:If a door handle is hit by a strong jet ofwater, and a SmartKey is withinapproximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, itcould be inadvertently locked or unlocked.

Hand-washX Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle

in direct sunlight.X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to

clean the vehicle.X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent,

such as Mercedes-Benz approved CarShampoo.

X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with adiffused jet of water.

X Do not spray directly towards theventilation intake.

X Use plenty of water and rinse the spongeand chamois frequently.

X Rinse with clean water and dry with achamois thoroughly.

Vehicle care 217

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 217

Z

Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on thefinish.

Automatic car washYou can have your vehicle washed in anautomatic car wash from the start. Brushlesscar washes are preferable.X To protect the filter system, activate the air

recirculation mode using button g onthe climate control panel.

! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatictouchless car wash which uses causticspray. Caustic spray will damage the paintor ornamental moldings.

If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it beforerunning it through the automatic car wash.

! Make sure the combination switch is setto wiper setting 0. Otherwise, the rainsensor could activate and cause the wipersto move unintentionally. This may lead tovehicle damage.Due to the width of the vehicle, fold inexterior rear view mirrors prior to runningthe vehicle through an automatic car washto prevent damage to the mirrors.

X When taking the vehicle through an automatic conveyor-type car wash:Make sure the automatic transmissionremains in neutral position N.

When leaving the automatic car wash, makesure the mirrors are folded out.After running the vehicle through anautomatic car wash, wipe any wax off of thewindshield and the wiper blade inserts. Thiswill prevent smears and reduce wiping noisewhich can be caused by residual wax on thewindshield.

Ornamental moldingsX For regular cleaning and care of ornamental

moldings, use a damp cloth.

! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamentalmoldings. Although ornamental moldings

may have chrome appearance, they couldbe made of anodized aluminum that will bedamaged when cleaned with chromecleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to cleanthose ornamental moldings.For very dirty ornamental moldings ofwhich you are sure are chrome-plated, usea chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether anornamental molding is chrome-plated,contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps, side markers, turn signal lensesX Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as

Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,with plenty of water.

! Only use window cleaning solutions thatare suitable for plastic lamp lenses.Window cleaning solutions which are notsuitable may damage the plastic lamplenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do notuse abrasives, solvents or cleaners thatcontain solvents.

Cleaning the driving systems sensors

X Switch off the ignition.X Clean Distronic system sensor cover : by

hand.

218 Vehicle careOp

erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 218

To clean Distronic system sensor cover :and the bumper area near sensors ; observethe following:RUse a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as

Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,with plenty of water.RUse a soft, non-scratching cloth.

! If you use a power washer to clean thesensor covers, observe the following:RFollow the instructions provided by the

power washer manufacturer.RMaintain a distance between the sensor

covers and the nozzle of the powerwasher.

Cleaning the windows and the wiper blades! The windshield wipers must be in a

vertical position before folding them awayfrom the windshield. They could otherwisedamage the hood.Never open the hood when the wiper armsare folded forward.

X Make sure the hood is fully closed.X Switch on the ignition.X Turn combination switch to wiper setting

II (Y page 95).X With wiper arms in vertical position, switch

off the ignition.

G Warning!For safety reasons, switch off wipers andremove SmartKey from starter switch beforecleaning the windshield and/or the wiperblades. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Makesure the vehicle’s on-board electronics havestatus 0. Otherwise, the wiper motor couldsuddenly turn on and cause injury.

! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.They could tear.

X Fold the wiper arms forward until they snapinto place.

X Clean the windshield and the wiper bladeinserts with a clean cloth and milddetergent solution.

X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild windowcleaning solution on all outside and insideglass surfaces.An automotive glass cleaner isrecommended.

! Fold the windshield wiper arms back ontothe windshield before turning the SmartKeyin the starter switch or pressing theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button.Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiperarm back. If released, the force of theimpact from the tensioning spring couldcrack the windshield.

! To clean the window interior, do not usea dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents. Do not touch theinside of the windows with hard objectssuch as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so maydamage the windows.

Rear window cleaningClean the rear window with the hardtop fullyraised and closed.

G Warning!Do not clean the rear window with the hardtopin a position other than the fully raised andclosed position. Otherwise, the hardtop maymove unexpectedly which may result inpersonal injury to you or others.

X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild windowcleaning solution on all outside and insideglass surfaces.An automotive glass cleaner isrecommended.

Vehicle care 219

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 219

Z

Light alloy wheelsIf possible, clean wheels once a week.X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,

a soft bristle brush and a strong spray ofwater for cleaning the light alloy wheels.

! Only use acid-free cleaning materials.Acid may cause corrosion or damage theclear coat.

! The vehicle should not be parked for anextended period of time immediately afterit has been cleaned. This applies especiallyafter the wheel rims have been cleanedwith wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleanerscan lead to increased corrosion of thebrake disks and brake pads. Non-approvedwheel cleaners may also damage the wheelpaint if the vehicle is not driven aftercleaning.Therefore, the vehicle’s brake systemshould always be warmed-up before it isparked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle forseveral minutes to allow the brakes to dry.When applying Mercedes-Benz approvedTire Care and Mercedes-Benz approvedWheel Care products, take care not tospray them on the brake disks.

Plastic and rubber partsX Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild

detergent for delicate fabrics as a washingsolution.

X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarmsolution.The surface may temporarily change color.If this is the case, wait for it to dry.

G Warning!Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprayscontaining solvents to clean the cockpit or thesteering wheel. Cleaners containing solventswill make the surface porous and vehicleoccupants could suffer serious injuries fromplastic parts coming loose in the event of airbag deployment.

! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.Otherwise you may scratch or damage thesurface.

Hard plastic trim items X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care

on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with lightpressure.

COMAND display! You must switch off the COMAND display

and allow it to cool prior to cleaning.

! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents.These can damage or even destroy theCOMAND display screen.

X Use a standard microfiber cloth and applywith light pressure.

Steering wheel and gear selector leverX Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly

or clean with Mercedes-Benz approvedLeather Care.

CarpetsX Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and

Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.

HeadlinerX Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo

cleaner in case of excessive dirt.

Seat beltsX Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.

! The seat belts must not be treated withchemical cleaning agents. Do not dry theseat belts at temperatures above 176‡(80†) or in direct sunlight.

220 Vehicle careOp

erat

ion


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 220

G Warning!Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.

UpholsteryUsing aftermarket seat covers or wearingclothing that have the tendency to give offcoloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause theupholstery to become permanentlydiscolored. By lining the seats with a properintermediate cover, contact-discoloration willbe prevented.

Leather upholsteryPlease note that leather upholstery is anatural product and is therefore subject to anatural aging process. Leather upholsterymay also react to certain ambient influencessuch as high humidity or high temperature byshowing wrinkles for example.X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth

and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.

! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:RWipe with light pressure only.RDo not clean with abrasive cleaning

agents such as scouring milk or powder.RDo not soak the leather upholstery.

As leather is a natural product, it couldotherwise harden or become porous.RExercise particular care when cleaning

perforated leather as its undersideshould not become wet.

Wood trimsX Only use water and a damp cloth to clean

wood trims in your vehicle.

! Do not use solvents like tar remover orwheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes asthese may be abrasive.

Chrome-plated exhaust tipRegular cleaning and care of chrome-platedexhaust tips will help to maintain their shineand the classy appearance.X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome

Polishing Paste each time the vehicle hasbeen washed, especially during the winter.

! Do not use alkaline cleaners such aswheel cleaners as they could causecorrosion.

Vehicle care 221

Oper

atio

n


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 221

Z

222


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 222

Vehicle equipment ............................ 224Where will I find ...? .......................... 224Vehicle status messages in themultifunction display ....................... 226What to do if … .................................. 254Unlocking/locking manually ........... 267Replacing SmartKey batteries ......... 269Replacing bulbs ................................. 271Replacing wiper blades .................... 275Flat tire .............................................. 276Battery ............................................... 283Jump starting .................................... 285Towing the vehicle ............................ 287Fuses .................................................. 291

223

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 223

Vehicle equipment


Where will I find ...?

First aid kit! Always keep the storage compartment

under the passenger seat closed while thevehicle is in motion.

i Check expiration dates and contents forcompleteness at least once a year andreplace missing/expired items.

The first aid kit is located in the storagecompartment under the passenger seat.

X Pull handle : upward.X Fold lid ; down.X Remove the first aid kit.

Vehicle tool kitThe vehicle tool kit is located in the spaceunderneath the trunk floor.

i Vehicles without spare wheel are notfactory-equipped with the tools required for

a wheel change such as a jack or a wheelwrench. Some tools required for a wheelchange are specific to your vehicle.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter to obtain the tools approved foryour vehicle.

The vehicle tool kit includes:R2 open-end wrenches17

RAlignment bolt 17

RElectric air pumpRFuse chartRHex-socket wrenchRInterchangeable slot/Phillips screwdriverRJack17

RPair of universal pliersRProtective wrapRTowing eye boltRWheel wrenchRWheel wrench17

X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 73).X Lift the trunk floor.

: Electric air pump; Tool bag= Storage well casing? Protective wrap

i For transporting the damaged road wheel,use protective wrap ? (if so equipped).

17 Vehicles with spare wheel only.

224 Where will I find ...?Pr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 224

X To access jack and wheel wrench:Remove storage well casing =.

X Remove the spare wheel (Y page 225).

A JackB Wheel wrench

Jack

G Warning!Only use the jack supplied with your vehicleto lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. Ifyou use the jack for any other purpose, you orothers could be injured, as the jack isdesigned only for the purpose of changing awheel.When using the jack, observe the safety notesin the “Mounting the spare wheel” section andthe notes on the jack.

Spare wheel

G Observe Safety notes, see page 276.The spare wheel is located in the spaceunderneath the trunk floor.X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 73).X Lift the trunk floor.X Remove the storage well casing

(Y page 224).

: Spare wheel; Tensioning strap18

= Retaining screw? Storage well casing base

X Remove storage well casing base ?.X Remove retaining screw = by turning it

counterclockwise.X Remove spare wheel :.For information on mounting the spare wheel,see “Flat tire” (Y page 276).

Storing the spare wheel after useIf you wish to store the spare wheel after use,carry out the following steps. Otherwise, thespare wheel may not fit into the spare wheelwell.

! Make sure the spare wheel is dry beforestoring it.

X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of thecollapsible tire.

X Unscrew the valve insert from the valveusing the valve extractor integrated in thevalve cap.

X Allow the air to escape.

i It may take a few minutes for thecollapsible tire to deflate completely.

X Use the valve extractor integrated in thevalve cap to screw the valve insert back intothe valve.

18 Vehicles with 19" spare wheel only.

Where will I find ...? 225

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 225

Z

X Screw the valve cap back onto the valve.

i Vehicles with 19" spare wheel only:Before placing the spare wheel in the sparewheel well fasten tensioning straps, see“Compressing the collapsible tire”(Y page 226).

X Place the spare wheel into the spare wheelwell.

X Secure the spare wheel by turning retainingscrew = clockwise.

Compressing the collapsible tireThis description applies to vehicles with19" spare wheel only.The collapsible tire on a 19" spare wheel mustbe compressed with two tensioning strapsbefore you can store it in the spare wheel well.

X Extend the tensioning strap by pulling theslider.

X Place tensioning strap around the sparewheel rim and collapsible tire with thebuckle facing the inside of the rim.

X Close the buckle.X Pull the loose end of the tensioning strap.

The tensioning strap must be pulled as tightas possible.

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display

NotesWarning and malfunction messages appear inthe multifunction display located in theinstrument cluster.Certain warning and malfunction messagesare accompanied by an audible signal.Address these messages accordingly andfollow the additional instructions given in thisOperator’s Manual.Selecting the Vehicle status message memory menu in the control system(Y page 120) displays both cleared anduncleared messages.High-priority messages appear in themultifunction display in red color.Certain messages of high priority cannot becleared from the multifunction display usingthe reset button (Y page 112) or button&, *, U or V on themultifunction steering wheel.Other messages of high priority andmessages of less immediate priority can becleared from the multifunction display usingthe reset button or button &, *,U or V on the multifunction steeringwheel. They are then stored in the Vehicle status message memory menu(Y page 120). Remember that clearing amessage will only make the messagedisappear. Clearing a message will notcorrect the condition that caused themessage to appear.

G Warning!All categories of messages contain importantinformation which should be taken note ofand, where a malfunction is indicated,addressed as soon as possible at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Failure to repair the condition noted maycause damage not covered by the Mercedes-

226 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction displayPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 226

Benz Limited Warranty, or result in propertydamage or personal injury.

G Warning!No messages will be displayed if either theinstrument cluster or the multifunctiondisplay is inoperative.As a result, you will not be able to seeinformation about your driving conditions,such asRspeedRoutside temperatureRwarning/indicator lamps

Rmalfunction/warning messagesRfailure of any systems

Driving characteristics may be impaired.If you must continue to drive, do so with addedcaution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

On the pages that follow, you will find acompilation of the most important warningand malfunction messages that may appear.For your convenience the messages aredivided into text messages (Y page 227) andsymbol messages (Y page 237).

Text messages

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ABS ABS, ESP InoperativeSee Oper. Manual.

The electro-hydraulic brake system is still functioningnormally but due to a malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, theESP®, and the hill-start assist system (SL 63 AMG only) areunavailable.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock

during hard braking, reducing steering capability.X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center as soon as possible.Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of anaccident.

ABS ABS, ESP UnavailableSee Oper. Manual

The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehiclespeed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 227

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 227

Z


ABS ABS, ESP Unavailable See Oper. Manual

The electro-hydraulic brake system is still functioningnormally but due to a malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, theESP®, and the hill-start assist system (SL 63 AMG only) areunavailable.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock



ESP ESP Inoperative See Oper. Manual

The electro-hydraulic brake system is still functioningnormally but due to a malfunction the ESP®, and the hill-startassist system (SL 63 AMG only) are unavailable.The ABS may not be operational.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock



ESP ESP Unavailable See Oper. Manual

The electro-hydraulic brake system still functions normallybut due to insufficient power supply the ESP® and the hill-start assist system (SL 63 AMG only) are unavailable.X Synchronize the ESP®. With the vehicle stationary, turn the

steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right.

! When synchronizing the ESP®, make sure you can turn thesteering wheel in both directions as far as it will go withoutthe wheels hitting any objects, e.g. a road curb.

If the message in the multifunction display does notdisappear:X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock




actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 228


Front Passeng. Airbag

Enabled See Oper. Manual

The passenger front air bag is activated while driving eventhough a child, small individual, or object below the system’sweight threshold is on the passenger seat, or the passengerseat is empty. Objects on the seat or forces acting on the seatmay make the system sense supplemental weight.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.X Engage the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition.X Open the passenger door.X Remove child and child restraint from passenger seat.X Make sure no objects which apply supplemental weight to

the seat are present. The system may recognize suchsupplemental weight and sense that an occupant on thepassenger seat is of a greater weight than actually present.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

Monitor the 45 indicator lamp (Y page 45) and themultifunction display in the instrument cluster (Y page 30) forthe following:With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,Rthe 45 indicator lamp in the center console should

illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS(Y page 43) has deactivated the passenger front air bag.Rthe message Front Passeng. Airbag Enabled See Oper. Manual or the message Front Passeng. Airbag Disabled See Oper. Manual should not appear in themultifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied.Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete thenecessary check cycles and to make sure neither messageappears in the multifunction display.

If above conditions are met, you can occupy the passengerseat again. Depending on the passenger classification sensedby the OCS, the 45 indicator lamp will remainilluminated or go out.If above conditions are not met, the system is not workingproperly. Have the system checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 229

Z

G Warning!If the 45 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective steps,do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the passengerseat until the system has been repaired.


Front Passeng. Airbag

Disabled See Oper. Manual

The passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving eventhough an adult or someone larger than a small individual isoccupying the passenger seat. Forces acting on the seat maymake the system sense a decrease in weight.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.X Engage the parking brake.X Switch off the ignition.X Have the passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the passenger door and

switch on the ignition.Monitor the 45 indicator lamp (Y page 45) and themultifunction display in the instrument cluster (Y page 30) forthe following:With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,Rthe 45 indicator lamp should illuminate and remain

illuminated, indicating that the OCS (Y page 43) hasdeactivated the passenger front air bag.Rthe message Front Passeng. Airbag Enabled See Oper. Manual or the message Front Passeng. Airbag Disabled See Oper. Manual should not appear in themultifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied.Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to complete thenecessary check cycles and to make sure neither messageappears in the multifunction display.

If above conditions are met, you can occupy the passengerseat again. Depending on the passenger classification sensedby the OCS, the 45 indicator lamp will remainilluminated or go out.If above conditions are not met, the system is not workingproperly. Have the system checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

G Warning!If the 45 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the passengerseat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use thepassenger seat until the system has been repaired.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 230

Driving systems


ABC Malfunction Stop Car

You have started driving although the vehicle level is still toolow.The vehicle is being raised. The ABC message goes out aftera few seconds.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe

to do so.X Wait until the message disappears from the multifunction

display.You may then drive off.


The vehicle is losing oil.The ABC message appears continuously.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe

to do so.X Engage the parking brake.X Call Roadside Assistance.orX Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.


The ABC is malfunctioning.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location and press the vehicle

level control button to select a higher vehicle level(Y page 142).

If the vehicle does not raise, observe the following when youcontinue to drive:X Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid damaging the

front fenders.X Listen for scraping noises.X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

ABC Malfunction

The capability of the ABC system is restricted. This can impairhandling.X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 231

Z


ABC Vehicle Rising Please Wait

The vehicle’s level is too low while at a standstill. The vehiclewill be raised.X Do not drive off.X Wait until the message disappears from the multifunction

display.You may then drive off.

Cruise Control And SPEEDTRONIC

Inoperative

The cruise control is malfunctioning.X Have the cruise control checked at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

- - - MPH Cruise Control

One of the activation conditions for the cruise control has notbeen fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below20 mph (30 km/h).X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows

and set the speed.X Check the activation conditions for cruise control

(Y page 131).

DTR - - - MPH

One of the activation conditions for Distronic has not beenfulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below20 mph (30 km/h).X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows

and set the speed.X Check the activation conditions for Distronic

(Y page 136).

DISTRONIC Inoperative

The Distronic or the display are malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

DTR Override You have accelerated. The Distronic has switched off.X Stop accelerating.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 232


DISTRONIC Currently Unavailable. See Oper. Manual

Distronic is deactivated because:RThe Distronic cover in the radiator grille is dirty.RThe functionality is impaired by heavy precipitation or fog.RThe system is overheated.X If necessary, clean the Distronic cover in the area of the

radiator grille (Y page 218).X If necessary, wait until the system has cooled down.X Restart the vehicle.Distronic becomes operational again without the engine beingrestarted whenRdirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while driving (e.g.

slush or snow)Rthe system recognizes full sensor availability (due to

lessening rain or the road surface drying)Rthe message in the multifunction display disappearsYou can then operate Distronic as usual again.

DISTRONIC Currently Unavailable. See Oper. Manual

Distronic is deactivated because the functionality is impairedby external interferences, e.g. high-frequency sources suchas toll stations, speed measuring systems etc.X Leave the area of the external interference.X Activate Distronic again (Y page 136) when the message in

the multifunction display disappears.

Distronic is deactivated because the Distronic sensor has notsensed any other vehicles or objects, e.g. road sign or such,for a long time.X Activate Distronic again (Y page 136) when the message in

the multifunction display disappears.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 233

Z

Vehicle


P Gear Selector Lever To P

You have attempted to start the engine with the KEYLESS-GOstart/stop button while the automatic transmission was notin park position P.X Shift the automatic transmission into park position P.

You have attempted to turn off the engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button while the automatic transmission wasnot in park position P.X Shift the automatic transmission into park position P.

Close Rear Side Windows

You are getting out of the vehicle and a rear side window isstill open.X Close the rear side window (Y page 97).

Tires


Tire pressure

displayed after driving for a few minutes.

The tire inflation pressure is being checked by the AdvancedTPMS.X Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.

Tire Pressure Monitor

Inoperative

The Advanced TPMS is malfunctioning.X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized



Inoperative No Wheel Sensors

There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted(e.g. winter tires).X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed at an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 234


Tire Pressure Monitor Wheel Sensor Missing

At least one sensor is defect (e.g. battery is empty).The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tireinflation pressure in the multifunction display.X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized


At least one wheel without appropriate wheel sensors ismounted (e.g. spare wheel).The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tireinflation pressure in the multifunction display.X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized



Currently Unavailable

The Advanced TPMS cannot monitor the tire inflation pressuredue to a nearby radio interference source or insufficientpower supply.As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been rectified,the Advanced TPMS becomes active again automatically aftera few minutes of driving.

Please correct the tire pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.orThe tire inflation pressures of the individual tires differ fromeach other significantly.The tire inflation pressure values are shown in themultifunction display.X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required

(Y page 189).X Restart the Advanced TPMS (Y page 192).

Caution Tire defect

At least one tire is deflating.The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt

steering and braking maneuvers.X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 276).


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 235

Z


Check Tires

The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantlybelow the reference value.The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt

steering and braking maneuvers.X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 276).

G Warning!Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You maylose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire.

G Warning!Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affecthandling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wearunevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they aremore likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 236

Symbol messages

Brake


# Reduced Brake Effect Depress brake pedal fully.

The electro-hydraulic brake system is in emergency operationmode. Considerably greater brake pedal force is required andthe brake pedal travel is longer. The stopping distance isincreased.The maximum speed is limited to 55 mph (90 km/h).X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe

to do so.X Engage the parking brake.X Do not drive any further.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the

wheels with wheel chocks or other sizeable objects.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call

Roadside Assistance.

$(USA only)J(Canadaonly)

Reduced Brake Effect Service Required

The electro-hydraulic brake system is in emergency operationmode. Considerably greater brake pedal force is required andthe brake pedal travel is longer. The stopping distance isincreased.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe

to do so.X Engage the parking brake.X Do not drive any further.X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by blocking the

wheels with wheel chocks or other sizeable objects.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call

Roadside Assistance.

G Warning!Driving while one of the previous messages isdisplayed can result in an accident. Have yourbrake system checked immediately.If the electro-hydraulic brake system entersits emergency operation mode, the drivermust apply significantly greater brake pedalpressure and depress the pedal much furtherthan normal to obtain braking effect.

If necessary, apply full pressure to the brakepedal. Brakes are only applied to the frontwheels. Stopping distance is increased!If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend thatthe vehicle be transported with all wheels offthe ground using flatbed or appropriate wheellift/dolly equipment.A tow bar must be used if circumstances donot permit the use of the recommended


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 237

Z

towing methods and the vehicle requirestowing with all four wheels on the ground.Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on theground is only permissible for distances up to

30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to exceed30 mph (50 km/h). For more information, see“Towing the vehicle”.



Reduced Brake Effect Start Engine

The battery has insufficient voltage and cannot supplysufficient power to the electro-hydraulic brake system.X Start the engine.

The message disappears when sufficient voltage isavailable.

G Warning!Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to yourhealth. All exhaust gas contains carbonmonoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause

unconsciousness and lead to death. Do notrun the engine in confined areas (such as agarage) which are not properly ventilated.


# Brake Wear The brake pads have reached their wear limit.X Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible.

! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervalsspecified in the Maintenance Booklet.

G Warning!Have brake pad replacement and other workon the electro-hydraulic brake system carriedout by qualified technicians only. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for furtherinformation.The electro-hydraulic brake system must bedeactivated prior to working on the system.High pressure is intermittently built up in thesystem as part of its automatic self-test.In addition, the system is automaticallyactivated when the vehicle is unlocked by

remote control, when the driver or passengerdoor is opened, when the SmartKey in thestarter switch is turned to position 1 or theKEYLESS-GO start/stop button is pressedonce, when the brake pedal is depressed orwhen the parking brake is released. Failure todeactivate the system prior to maintenancewill cause brake pistons to extend and brakefluid to leak, which may result in injuries(contusions and acid burns). Extended brakepistons may also cause injury.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 238



Check Brake Fluid Level

There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.Risk of accident!X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe

to do so.X Do not drive any further.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call

Roadside Assistance.Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

G Warning!Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in anaccident. Have your brake system checkedimmediately.Do not add brake fluid before checking thebrake system. Overfilling the brake fluid

reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid onhot engine parts and the brake fluid catchingfire. You can be seriously burned.

! If you find that the brake fluid in the brakefluid reservoir has fallen to the minimummark or below, have the brake systemchecked for brake pad thickness and leaks.



Brake Service Required

There are malfunctions, but the electro-hydraulic brakesystem is operating normally.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.


Brakes Overheated Drive on, but with even greater care.

The brake system is overheated due to an excessive load onthe brakes.Relieve the load on the brake system:X Drive more smoothly and think ahead to avoid unnecessary

braking.X When driving down steep grades, shift into a lower gear to

use the engine’s braking power (Y page 108).X Cautiously continue driving so that the air stream will cool

down the brakes.

$(USA only)!(Canadaonly)

Release Parking Brake

You are driving with the parking brake engaged.X Release the parking brake.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 239

Z

Safety systems


I Raise Roll-over Bar

The roll bar is malfunctioning.For safety reasons, always have the roll bar raised whendriving with the retractable hardtop open.X Attempt to raise the roll bar using the roll bar button

(Y page 51).X Have the roll bar checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

I Raise Roll-over Bar

The roll bar was raised automatically and you have attemptedto open or close the retractable hardtop.X Raise the roll bar manually until you hear the roll bar lock

into place (Y page 51).X Open or close the retractable hardtop.

G Tele Aid Inoperative

One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system aremalfunctioning.X Have the Tele Aid system checked at an authorized


+ Restraint System MalfunctionService Required

There is a malfunction in the Supplemental Restraint System(SRS). The air bags or the Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in anaccident.X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checkedimmediately.

G Warning!In the event a malfunction of the SRS isindicated as outlined above, the SRS may notbe operational.For your safety, we strongly recommend thatyou contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center immediately to have the systemchecked. Otherwise the SRS may not beactivated when needed in an accident, whichcould result in serious or fatal injury, or itmight deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarilywhich could also result in injury.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 240

Vehicle


N The trunk is open.X Close the trunk (Y page 75).

L You are driving with the hood open.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to

do so.X Close the hood (Y page 181).There is otherwise danger of an accident.

O You are driving with the hood and the trunk open.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to

do so.X Close the hood (Y page 181) or the trunk (Y page 75).There is otherwise danger of an accident.

C You are driving with at least one door open.X Close all doors.

C Check Doors

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:You are pressing the lock button on the door handle and atleast one door is open.X Close all doors.

K Retract. Roof Oper.Please WaitSee Oper. Manual

The on-board voltage is too low.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.X Start the engine.

The hardtop drive system was shut down for safety reasonsafter multiple, consecutive attempts to raise or lower thehardtop.After about 10 minutes you can open or close the retractablehardtop.X Switch on the ignition.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.X If the retractable hardtop still does not open or close

properly, have the hardtop system checked at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

K Retractable Roof Lowering

The retractable hardtop is not completely opened or closed.The roof hydraulics will start to lose pressure.X Make sure the retractable hardtop is completely opened or

closed (Y page 155).


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 241

Z


K Retractable Roof Operation Only At Standstill

You have attempted to open the retractable hardtop whiledriving.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location and try to open the

hardtop again.

K Retractable Roof Not Opened/Closed Completely

You are driving with the retractable hardtop not properlylocked.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location. Observe the traffic

situation around you.X Pull or push on the retractable hardtop switch until the

retractable hardtop is completely open or closed(Y page 155).

X If the retractable hardtop still does lock properly, have thehardtop system checked at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

J Trunk Partition Open

You are trying to open or close the retractable hardtop eventhough the luggage cover in the trunk is not closed and/orproperly engaged.X Close the luggage cover and engage it into the side holders

(Y page 158).

+ Key Detected In Vehicle

A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the vehicle wasrecognized while trying to lock the vehicle from the outside.X Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.

+ Remove Key You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.

+ Replace Key

The SmartKey is malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

+ Change Key Batteries

The batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO aredischarged.X Replace the batteries (Y page 269).

+ Key Not Detected(messageappears inred)

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while theengine is running because the SmartKey is not in the vehicle.X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.X Engage the parking brake.X Search for the SmartKey.

The vehicle cannot be locked centrally nor can the enginebe started again after the engine is stopped.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 242


+ Key Not Detected(messageappears inred)

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while theengine is running because there is strong radio-frequencyinterference.X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.X Engage the parking brake.X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.

+ Key Not Detected(messageappears inwhite)

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is momentarily not detected.X Change the position of the SmartKey in the vehicle.X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch

if necessary.

~ Bluetooth Ready

The telephone has not yet been connected to the COMANDsystem via Bluetooth®.X Connect the telephone to the COMAND system via

Bluetooth®.

¥ Top Up Washer Fluid

The washer fluid in the washer fluid reservoir has fallen belowthe minimum level.X Add washer fluid (Y page 185).

Y Entry PositionDo Not Drive

The steering wheel has not yet moved into its stored drivingposition.X Wait until the steering wheel has moved to its driving

position.The message disappears.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 243

Z

Engine


=or;

Engine Service

There may be a malfunction inRthe fuel management systemRthe ignition systemRthe exhaust systemRthe fuel systemX Have the engine checkedas soon as possible at an


; Service Required

Certain electronic systems are unable to relay information tothe control system. The coolant temperature display or thetachometer may have failed.X Have the electronic systems checked at an authorized


+ Top Up Coolant See Oper. Manual

The coolant level is too low.X Add coolant (Y page 184).X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling

system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G Warning!Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burnif it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.

! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the messageand symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine willoverheat causing major engine damage.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 244


? Coolant Stop car, switch engine off.

The coolant is too hot.X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.X Turn off the engine immediately.X Engage the parking brake.X Only start the engine again after the message disappears.

You could otherwise damage the engine.X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument

cluster.X If the temperature rises again: Contact an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go citytraffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248‡(120†).

G Warning!Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into theengine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening theengine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†).Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 245

Z


? Coolant Stop car, switch engine off.

The poly-V-belt could be broken.X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.X Turn off the engine immediately.X Check the poly-V-belt.X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the

engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pumpwhich may result in damage to the engine. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the vehicle with thismessage displayed. Doing so could result in serious enginedamage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrumentcluster.

X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately.

? The radiator cooling fan is malfunctioning.X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument

cluster.If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you maycontinue driving to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g. by drivinguphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.

X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 246


# The battery is no longer charging.Possible causes:Ralternator malfunctioningRbroken poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronic systemDo not forget that the brake system requires electrical energyand may be operating with restricted capability. Considerablygreater brake pedal force is required and the stoppingdistance is increased.X Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon as it is safe

to do so and check the poly-V-belt.X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the

engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pumpwhich may result in damage to the engine. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Adjust driving to be consistentwith reduced braking responsiveness.

# Battery/AlternatorStop Car

The battery is defective.The electro-hydraulic brake system requires electrical energyand therefore has only limited operation. Considerablygreater brake pedal force is required and the stoppingdistance is increased.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe

to do so.X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking

responsiveness.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

4 Engine Oil Level Check Level

Vehicles with oil dipstick only:The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.X Check the engine oil level (Y page 181) and add engine oil

as required (Y page 183).X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine

checked for possible leaks.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 247

Z


4 Add 1 qt engine oil at next refueling.(USA only)Add 1 liter engine oil at next refueling.(Canadaonly)

Vehicles with engine oil measuring system only:The engine oil level is too low.X Add engine oil (Y page 183) and check the engine oil level

(Y page 181).X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine

checked for possible leaks.

If the message Add 1 qt (Canada: 1 liter)engine oil at next refueling orEngine Oil Level Check Level appearswhile the engine is running and at operatingtemperature, the engine oil level has droppedto approximately the minimum level.The message will be stored in the vehiclestatus message memory after you havecleared it from the multifunction display.Visually check for oil leaks. If there are noobvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service

station to refill your engine oil to the requiredlevel.For information on approved engine oilscontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeror visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).

! Engine oil level warnings should not beignored. Extended driving with the symboldisplayed could result in serious enginedamage that is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.


4 Engine Oil Level Cannot measure eng. oil level.

Vehicles with engine oil measuring system only:The measuring system is malfunctioning.X Have the measuring system checked at an authorized


4 Engine Oil Level Reduce Oil Level

Vehicles with engine oil measuring system only:You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk ofdamaging the engine or the catalytic converter.X Have oil siphoned or drained off. Observe all legal

requirements with respect to its disposal.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 248


4 Engine Oil Level Stop car, switch engine off.

The engine oil level is too low. There is a danger of enginedamage.X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe

to do so.X Turn off the engine.X Engage the parking brake.X Add engine oil (Y page 183) and check the engine oil level

(Y page 181).

C The fuel level is low.X Refuel at the next gas station.

8 Reserve Fuel

The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.X Refuel at the next gas station.

8 Fuel Cap Open

A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. Thefuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system maybe leaking.X Check the fuel cap (Y page 178).X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked at

an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Lamps


b Active Headlamps Inoperative

The active Bi-Xenon headlamp system is malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

b Reverse Lamp LeftorReverse Lamp Right

The left or right backup lamp is malfunctioning.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 271).


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 249

Z


b Brake Lamp Left Auxiliary Bulb OnorBrake Lamp Right Auxiliary Bulb On

The left or right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A substitutebulb is being used.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

b 3rd Brake Lamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. Thismessage will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

b Front Foglamp LeftorFront Foglamp Right

The left or right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

b Marker Lamp Front LeftorMarker Lamp Front Right

The front left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

b Marker Lamp Rear LeftorMarker Lamp Rear Right

The rear left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 250


b Parking Lamp Front Left Auxiliary Bulb OnorParking Lamp Front Right Auxiliary Bulb On

The left or right front parking lamp is malfunctioning. Asubstitute bulb is being used.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 271).

b High Beam LeftorHigh Beam Right

The left or right high-beam lamp is malfunctioning.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 271).

b License Plate Lamp - LeftorLicense Plate Lamp - Right

The left or right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 271).

b AUTO Light Inoperative

The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps come onautomatically.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):X In the control system, set daytime running lamp mode to

manual (Y page 124).X Switch off the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch

(Y page 89).

b Low Beam LeftorLow Beam Right

The left or right low-beam lamp is malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 251

Z


b Rear Foglamp Left

The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

b Lights Are still On

You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch,opened the driver’s door and left the headlamps on orremoved the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO from the vehicleand left the headlamps on.X Turn the exterior lamp switch to $ or Ã

(Y page 89).orX With the rear fog lamp switched on: Push in the exterior

lamp switch to its stop.

b Tail Lamp Left Auxiliary Bulb OnorTail Lamp Right Auxiliary Bulb On

The left or right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulbis being used.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

b Cornering Lamp LeftorCornering Lamp Right

The left or right corner-illuminating lamp is malfunctioning.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 271).

b Turn Signal Rear Left Auxiliary Bulb OnorTurn Signal Rear Right Auxiliary Bulb On

The left or right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. Asubstitute bulb is being used.X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 271).


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 252


b Turn Signal Front Left Auxiliary Bulb OnorTurn Signal Front Right Auxiliary Bulb On

The left or right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. Asubstitute bulb is being used.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

b Turn Signal Left MirrororTurn Signal Right Mirror

The turn signal in the left or right exterior rear view mirror ismalfunctioning. This message will only appear if all LEDs havestopped working.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

possible.

Tires


h Please correct the tire pressure.

The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.orThe tire inflation pressure of the individual tires differ fromeach other significantly.X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required

(Y page 189).

h Tire Pressure Caution Tire Defect

At least one tire is deflating.X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt

steering and braking maneuvers.X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 276).


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 253

Z


h Tire Pressure Check Tires

The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantlybelow the reference value.X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt

steering and braking maneuvers.X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 276).

G Warning!Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You maylose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire.

G Warning!Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affecthandling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wearunevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they aremore likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.

What to do if …

Lamps in instrument cluster

NotesIf any of the following lamps in the instrumentcluster fails to come on during the bulb self-check when switching on the ignition, havethe respective bulb checked and replaced ifnecessary.

When you switch on the ignition, all lamps inthe instrument cluster come on. The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp and turnsignal indicator lamps will only come on ifactivated. If a lamp in the instrument clusterfails to come on when the ignition is switchedon, have it checked and replaced if necessary.

254 What to do if …Pr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 254

Brake

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! The yellow ABSindicator lampcomes on whilethe engine isrunning.

The ABS has detected a malfunction and switched off. The BAS,the ESP®, and the hill-start assist system (SL 63 AMG only) arealso switched off.The electro-hydraulic brake system is still functioning normally butwithout the systems specified above available.If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such asthe navigation system or the automatic transmission may also bemalfunctioning.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during

hard braking, reducing steering capability.X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking

responsiveness.X Read and observe messages that may appear in the

multifunction display (Y page 226).X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz


! The yellow ABSindicator lampcomes on whilethe engine isrunning.

The ABS has switched off due to insufficient power supply.The battery might not be charged sufficiently.When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS isoperational again. The ABS indicator lamp should go out.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during

hard braking, reducing steering capability.X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking

responsiveness.X Read and observe messages that may appear in the

multifunction display (Y page 226).X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator

and the battery checked.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake warninglamp comes on whiledriving and an acousticwarning sounds.

You are driving with the parking brake engaged.X Release the parking brake.

What to do if … 255

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 255

Z


$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake warninglamp comes on whilethe engine is runningand an acousticwarning sounds.

There is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system.There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.Risk of accident!X Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as

soon as it is safe to do so.X Engage the parking brake.X Read and observe messages that may appear in the

multifunction display (Y page 226).X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.

G Warning!Driving with the brake warning lampilluminated can result in an accident. Haveyour brake system checked immediately if thebrake warning lamp stays on. Do not addbrake fluid before checking the brake system.Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can resultin spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and

the brake fluid catching fire. You can beseriously burned.

! If you find that the brake fluid in the brakefluid reservoir has fallen to the minimummark or below, have the brake systemchecked for brake pad thickness and leaks.

Safety systems


7 The red seat belttelltale comeson for amaximum of6 seconds afterstarting theengine.

The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passenger to fastenyour seat belts before driving off.X Fasten your seat belts.Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seatbelt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds afterstarting the engine.

7 The red seat belttelltale comeson. In additionyou hear awarning chimefor a maximumof 6 secondsafter starting theengine.

You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt.

The warning chime stops sounding.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 256


7 The red seat belttelltale comeson while thevehicle isstanding stilland the engine isrunning or whiledriving.

You and/or your passenger have forgotten to fasten your seatbelts.X Fasten your seat belts.

The seat belt telltale goes out.

There are items placed on the passenger seat and therefore thesystem senses the passenger seat as being occupied.X Remove the items from the passenger seat and put them in a

safe place.The seat belt telltale goes out.

7 The red seat belttelltale flasheswhile driving. Inaddition, anintermittentwarning chimesounds withincreasingintensity.

The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and youand/or your passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat belts.X Fasten your seat belts.

The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stopssounding.

There are items placed on the passenger seat and therefore thesystem senses the passenger seat as being occupied.X Remove the items from the passenger seat and put them in a

safe place.The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stopssounding.

i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and theseat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, thedriver and passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a door isopened.


+ The red SRSindicator lampcomes on whiledriving.

There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags orEmergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedlyor fail to activate in an accident.X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.

G Warning!In the event a malfunction of the SRS isindicated as outlined above, the SRS may notbe operational.For your safety, we strongly recommend thatyou contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center immediately to have the systemchecked. Otherwise the SRS may not beactivated when needed in an accident, whichcould result in serious or fatal injury, or itmight deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarilywhich could also result in injury.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 257

Z


I The yellow rollbar warninglamp comes onwhen the engineis running.

The roll bar system is malfunctioning.For safety reasons, always have the roll bar raised when drivingwith the retractable hardtop open.X Attempt to raise the roll bar manually (Y page 51).X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center as soon as possible.

G Warning!If the yellow roll bar warning lamp I in theinstrument cluster does not go out afterstarting the engine, or if it comes on whiledriving, the roll bar system is not operatingproperly and may not activate in an accident.At the same time, the message Raise Roll-

over Bar appears in the multifunctiondisplay. In this case, raise the roll barmanually before continuing to drive.For safety reasons, drive only with the roll barraised until the malfunction is repaired. Haveyour vehicle checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Version 1Depending on vehicle production date, the indicator and warning lamps in the instrumentcluster differ. This section describes version 1 of the instrument cluster. Refer to the“Instrument cluster” section (Y page 30) to determine which version your vehicle is equippedwith.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 258


å The yellow ESP®

OFF warninglamp comes onwhile the engineis running.

The ESP® has been switched off.Risk of accident!When the ESP® is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if thesystem recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheelis spinning.X Switch the ESP® back on.

Exceptions: (Y page 57).X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving

to the prevailing road and weather conditions.X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system

checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon aspossible.

SL 63 AMGonly:The yellowSPORThandling modewarning lampcomes onwhile theengine isrunning.

The SPORT handling mode is switched onRisk of accident!When the SPORT handling mode is switched on, it will only stabilizethe vehicle to a limited extent if the system recognizes that thevehicle starts to skid or that a wheel is spinning.X Switch the SPORT handling mode off (Y page 58).

÷å

The yellow ESP®

warning lampand the yellowESP OFFwarning lampcome on whilethe engine isrunning.

The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunction.Risk of accident!X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the

multifunction display.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during

hard braking, reducing steering capability.X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather

conditions.X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz



Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 259

Z


÷ The yellow ABS/ESP® warninglamp flasheswhile driving.

The ABS, the ESP®, or the Electronic Traction System (ETS) hascome into operation because of detected traction loss in at leastone tire.X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather

conditions.X Do not switch off the ESP®.

Exceptions: (Y page 57).Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of anaccident.

Version 2Depending on vehicle production date, the indicator and warning lamps in the instrumentcluster differ. This section describes version 2 of the instrument cluster. Refer to the“Instrument cluster” section (Y page 30) to determine which version your vehicle is equippedwith.


d All models,exceptSL 63 AMG:The yellow ABS/ESP® warninglamp comes onwhile the engineis running.





d SL 63 AMG only:The yellow ABS/ESP® warninglamp comes onwhile the engineis running.

The SPORT handling mode is switched on.Risk of accident!When the SPORT handling mode is switched on, it will only stabilizethe vehicle to a limited extent if the system recognizes that thevehicle starts to skid or that a wheel is spinning.X Switch the the SPORT handling mode off (Y page 58).

The message ESP-ON appears in the multifunction display.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 260


d%

SL 63 AMG only:The yellow ABS/ESP® warninglamp and theyellow ESP OFFwarning lampcome on whilethe engine isrunning.





d The yellow ABS/ESP® warninglamp comes onwhile the engineis running.

The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunction.Risk of accident!X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the

multifunction display.X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during

hard braking, reducing steering capability.X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather

conditions.X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz


d The yellow ESP®

warning lampflashes whiledriving.The yellow ABS/ESP® warninglamp flasheswhile driving.

The ABS, the ESP®, or the Electronic Traction System (ETS) hascome into operation because of detected traction loss in at leastone tire.X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather

conditions.X Do not deactivate the ESP®.

Exceptions: (Y page 57).Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of anaccident.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 261

Z

Driving systems


Ò The whiteDistronicindicator lampcomes on whiledriving.

The Distronic distance sensor has recognized a preceding vehicle.

Ò The red distancewarning lampcomes on whiledriving and anacousticwarning sounds.

You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle ahead of you or thedistance warning system has recognized a stationary obstacle onyour probable line of travel.X Apply the brakes immediately.X Carefully observe the traffic situation. You may need to brake

or maneuver to avoid hitting an obstacle.

Vehicle


8 The yellow fueltank reservewarning lampcomes on whenthe engine isrunning.

The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.X Refuel at the next gas station.

8 The yellow fueltank reservewarning lampcomes on whenthe engine isrunning.

The fuel cap is not closed properly.X Close the fuel cap.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 262

Engine


= (USA only19); (Canada only19)The yellow enginemalfunction indicatorlamp comes on whenthe engine is running.

There may be a malfunction inRthe fuel management systemRthe ignition systemRthe emission control systemRsystems which affect emissionsSuch malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values andmay switch the engine to limp-home (emergency operation) mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized


i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop assoon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Checklocal requirements.

= (USA only19); (Canada only19)The yellow enginemalfunction indicatorlamp comes on whenthe engine is running.

A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuelcap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.X Check the fuel cap (Y page 178).X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an


? The red coolanttemperaturewarning lampcomes on whenthe engine isrunning.

There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir.If this warning lamp comes on frequently, there is a leak in thecooling system.If the coolant level is correct, the electric radiator fan may bebroken.X Immediately add coolant to prevent engine from overheating

(Y page 184).X Have the cooling system checked.X If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you can

continue driving to the nearest authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

X Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving uphill) and stop-and-godriving.

19 Depending on vehicle production date, U.S. vehicles may be equipped with the Canada engine malfunctionindicator lamp ;.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 263

Z


? The red coolanttemperaturewarning lampcomes on whenthe engine isrunning and anacousticwarning sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248‡ (120†).X Stop in a safe location as soon as possible and allow the engine

and coolant to cool down.

G Warning!Driving when your engine is overheated cancause some fluids which may have leaked intothe engine compartment to catch fire. Youcould be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can causeserious burns which can occur just by openingthe engine hood. Stay away from the engineif you see or hear steam coming from it.

Stop the vehicle in a safe location away fromother traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

! The engine should not be operated withthe coolant temperature above 248‡(120†). Doing so may cause seriousdamage which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 264

Tires


h USA only:Combinationlow tire pressuretelltale/TPMSmalfunctiontelltale for theAdvanced TPMSilluminatescontinuously.Canada only:Low tirepressure telltalefor theAdvanced TPMSilluminatescontinuously.

The Advanced TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and

braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display

(Y page 226).If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) beencorrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunctiontelltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.

h USA only:Combinationlow tire pressuretelltale/TPMSmalfunctiontelltale for theAdvanced TPMSflashes 60seconds andthen staysilluminated.

There is a malfunction in the Advanced TPMS.X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display

(Y page 226).X Have the TPMS checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tirepressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutesof driving.

G Warning!Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on theinside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicatedon the Tire and Loading Information placardor the tire inflation pressure label, you should

determine the proper tire inflation pressurefor those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly underinflated tire causes the tireto overheat and can lead to tire failure.


Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 265

Z

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’shandling and stopping ability. Please note thatthe TPMS is not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate whenthe system is not operating properly. TheTPMS malfunction indicator is combined withthe low tire pressure telltale. When thesystem detects a malfunction, the telltale willflash for approximately 1 minute and then

remain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will continue upon subsequentvehicle start-ups as long as the malfunctionexists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able todetect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

Lamp in center console


45

The passenger front airbag off indicator lampilluminates andremains illuminatedwith the weight of atypical adult orsomeone larger than asmall individual on thepassenger seat.

The system is malfunctioning.X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and

follow corrective steps (Y page 226).

G Warning!If the 45 indicator lamp illuminatesand remains illuminated with the weight of atypical adult or someone larger than a small

individual on the passenger seat, do not haveany passenger use the passenger seat untilthe system has been repaired.


actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 266


45

The passenger front airbag off indicator lampdoes not illuminateand/or does notremain illuminated withthe weight of a typical12-month-old child in astandard child restraintor less on thepassenger seat.

The system is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat

and check installation of the child seat.X Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the

seat are present.X If the passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out,

have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on thepassenger seat until the system has been repaired.

X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display andfollow corrective steps (Y page 226).

G Warning!If the 45 indicator lamp does notilluminate or remains out with the weight of atypical 12-month-old child in a standard childrestraint or less on the passenger seat, do nottransport a child on the passenger seat untilthe system has been repaired.

Unlocking/locking manually

Unlocking the vehicleIf you cannot unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, unlock thedriver’s door and the trunk using themechanical key.The anti-theft alarm system will trigger whenyouRunlock the driver’s door or the trunk with

the mechanical keyandRopen the driver’s door or the trunkTo cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey intothe starter switch.

Removing the mechanical key

SmartKey

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO

X Move locking tab : in the direction ofarrow.

X Slide mechanical key ; out of the housing.

Unlocking/locking manually 267

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 267

Z

Unlocking the driver’s door

X Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’sdoor lock.

X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwiseto position 1 until the locking knob movesup.The driver’s door is unlocked.

X Pull the door handle to open the driver’sdoor.

X Turn mechanical key ; back and removeit from the driver’s door lock.

Unlocking the trunk A minimum height clearance of 6.2 ft (1.89 m)is required to open the trunk lid.

X Insert mechanical key = into the trunk lidlock.

X Turn mechanical key = counterclockwiseto position 2.

X Pull handle : and lift the trunk lid.

! When you open the trunk, the trunk lidswings open upwards. Always make surethere is sufficient overhead clearance.

X Turn mechanical key = back and removeit from the trunk lid lock.

Unlocking the glove boxLockable storage areas in the passengercompartment include:Rthe glove boxRthe storage compartment under the

armrestRthe rear storage compartmentsIf these cannot be unlocked by means of theSmartKey, use the mechanical key to unlockthe glove box.

i To unlock the remaining storagecompartments, the cause for themalfunction of the SmartKey must bedetermined and corrected, see(Y page 68).

X Insert mechanical key : into the glove boxlock.

X Turn mechanical key : counterclockwiseto position 2.You can now open the glove box.

i Unlocking the glove box with themechanical key will trigger the anti-theftalarm system.To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey inthe starter switch.

268 Unlocking/locking manuallyPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 268

Locking the vehicleIf you cannot lock the vehicle with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, lock it asfollows:X Open the driver’s door.X Close the passenger door and the trunk.X Press the central locking switch

(Y page 73).X Check to see whether the locking knob on

the passenger door has moved down.X If necessary, push it down manually.X Exit the vehicle and close the driver’s door.X Remove the mechanical key from the

SmartKey (Y page 267).X Check whether the trunk is locked.X If it is not locked, lock it with the

mechanical key (Y page 77).Except for the driver’s door, the vehicleshould now be locked.

X Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’sdoor lock.

X Turn mechanical key ; clockwise toposition 1.The driver’s door is locked.

X Turn mechanical key ; back and removeit from the driver’s door lock.

i This procedure does not arm the anti-theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuelfiller flap and the storage compartments.The storage compartments can be lockedseparately (Y page 161).

Lowering the load assist manuallyIf the load assist feature does not fully lowerthe retractable hardtop into the trunkcompartment and you are unable to close thetrunk lid, follow the instructions below.

X Open the trunk (Y page 73).X Remove the trunk floor from the trunk.X Have a second person lift and hold the

retracted hardtop.X Take the hex-socket wrench from the

vehicle tool kit (Y page 224).X Using hex-socket wrench :, carefully turn

locking screw ; approximately onequarter of a turn counterclockwise.

X Hook luggage cover into holders(Y page 159).

X Let go of the hardtop.It should gradually lower into the trunk.

X When hardtop is completely lowered,return locking screw ; clockwise to itsoriginal position.

! Do not overtighten the screw.

X Replace the trunk floor.X Close the trunk.X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz


Replacing SmartKey batteries

If the batteries in the SmartKey aredischarged, the vehicle can no longer be

Replacing SmartKey batteries 269

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 269

Z

locked or unlocked. It is recommended tohave the batteries replaced at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

G Warning!Batteries contain poisonous and corrosivesubstances. Therefore, keep the batteries outof reach of children.If a battery is swallowed, seek medical helpimmediately.

G Warning!SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Check withyour local government’s disposal guidelines.California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Batteries contain materials that can harm theenvironment if disposed of improperly.Recycling of batteries is the preferred methodof disposal. Many states (USA only) orprovinces (Canada only) require sellers ofbatteries to accept old batteries for recycling.When inserting the batteries, make sure theyare clean and free of lint.When replacing batteries, always replaceboth batteries.

i The required replacement batteries areavailable at any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Replacement batteries: Lithium, typeCR 2025 or equivalent.X Remove the mechanical key from the

SmartKey (Y page 267).

SmartKey

X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKeyopening until battery compartmentcover : opens. Do not keep the covershut.

X Remove the battery compartment cover.X Pat the SmartKey against the palm of your

hand until battery = falls out.X Insert the new battery with the positive

terminal (+) facing up. Use a lint-free cloth.X Insert the tabs of the battery compartment

cover into the housing and press the coverclosed.

X Slide mechanical key : back into theSmartKey.

X Check the operation of the SmartKey.

270 Replacing SmartKey batteriesPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 270

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO

X Insert mechanical key : into opening.X Press mechanical key : in direction of

arrow.Battery compartment ; is unlatched.

X Pull battery compartment ; out of theSmartKey housing.

X Pull out batteries =.X Insert new batteries = under contact

springs ? with the positive terminal (+)side facing up.

X Return battery compartment ; intoSmartKey housing until it locks into place.

X Slide mechanical key : back into theSmartKey.

X Check the operation of the SmartKey aswell as the KEYLESS-GO function.

Replacing bulbs

Safety notesSafe vehicle operation depends on properexterior lighting and signaling to a largedegree.Correct headlamp adjustment is extremelyimportant. Have headlamps checked andreadjusted at regular intervals and when abulb has been replaced. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center forheadlamp adjustment.

G Warning!Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allowthe lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.Keep bulbs out of reach of children.Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. Abulb can explode if youRtouch or move it when hotRdrop the bulbRscratch the bulb

Wear eye and hand protection.Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it isdangerous to replace the bulb or repair thelamp and its components. We recommendthat you have such work done by a qualifiedtechnician.

i Since replacing bulbs is a technicallyhighly demanding process, we recommendto have them replaced at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

i If the headlamps or front fog lamps arefogged up on the inside as a result of highhumidity, driving the vehicle a distance withthe lights on should clear up the fogging.

Replacing bulbs 271

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 271

Z

BulbsYou can replace the following bulbs yourself:

Bi-Xenon headlamps Type: High-beam flasher lamp: H7 55 W; Corner-illuminating lamp: H7 55 W= Parking and standing lamp: W 5 W

Rear lamps Type: Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W; Backup lamp: P 21 W

License plate lamps Type: License plate lamps: C 5 W

Notes on bulb replacement! Do not replace LEDs or bulbs not

described in this section. You couldotherwise damage the LEDs, the bulbs orparts of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs and

bulbs replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

272 Replacing bulbsPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 272

G Observe Safety notes, see page 271.ROnly use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and

with the specified watt rating.RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb

to prevent short circuits.RAlways use a clean lint-free cloth when

handling bulbs.RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and

grease.RIf the newly installed bulb does not come

on, contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

i Mercedes-Benz recommends usingLonglife (LL) bulbs.

Replacing bulbs for front lamps

G Warning!Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenonheadlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenonlamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb orrepair the lamp and its components. It isrecommended to have such work done by aqualified technician.

Before you start to replace a bulb for a frontlamp, do the following:X Switch off the ignition.X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position$.

X Open the hood (Y page 180).

: Housing cover for high-beam headlamp,parking and standing lamp, corner-illuminating lamp

; Bulb socket for parking and standing lampbulb

= Bulb socket for high-beam bulb? Cable outlet for high-beam bulbA Bulb socket for corner-illuminating lamp

bulb

High-beam and high-beam flasher bulbX Turn housing cover : counterclockwise

and remove it.X Pull out bulb socket ;.X Turn bulb socket = with the bulb

counterclockwise and remove it.X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket =.X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket=.

X Insert bulb socket = into the guide in theheadlamp.

Replacing bulbs 273

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 273

Z

X Turn bulb socket = clockwise until itengages.Driver’s side headlamp: Cable outlet ?of bulb socket = must point towards thelower right.Passenger-side headlamp: Cableoutlet ? of bulb socket = must pointtowards the lower left.

X Place bulb socket ; back into the housing.X Align housing cover : and turn it

clockwise until it engages.

Parking and standing lamp bulbX Turn housing cover : counterclockwise

and remove it.X Pull out bulb socket ;.X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket ;.X Gently press the new bulb into bulb

socket ;.X Place bulb socket ; back into the housing.X Align housing cover : and turn it

clockwise until it engages.

Corner-illuminating lamp bulbsX Turn housing cover : counterclockwise

and remove it.X Turn bulb socket A counterclockwise and

remove it.X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket A.X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socketA.

X Insert bulb socket A into the guide in theheadlamp.

X Turn bulb socket A clockwise until itengages.The handle of the bulb socket must bevertical.

X Align housing cover : and turn itclockwise until it engages.

Replacing bulbs for rear lampsBefore you start to replace a bulb for a rearlamp, do the following:X Switch off the ignition.X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position$.

X Open the trunk.

Tail lamp unit

Opening the driver’s side trim panel

X Turn lock : counterclockwise by 90°.X Remove cover ;.

Opening the passenger-side trim panel

X Move lock : in direction of the arrow andremove cover ;.

274 Replacing bulbsPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 274

Replacing bulbs

Example illustration: Bulb socket passenger side: Turn signal lamp; Backup lamp

i The lamps on the driver’s side aremirrored.

X Depending on which bulb needs to bereplaced, turn the respective bulb socketcounterclockwise and remove it.

X Gently press onto the bulb and turn itclockwise out of its bulb socket.

X Gently press the new bulb into its bulbsocket and turn it counterclockwise until itengages.

X Align the respective bulb socket and pressit into the tail lamp unit until it audiblyengages.

X Reinstall the trim.

License plate lamps

X Loosen screws : of lamp cover to beremoved.

X Remove lamp cover ;.X Replace the bulb.X Reinstall lamp cover ;.X Retighten screws :.

Replacing wiper blades

Safety notes

G Warning!For safety reasons, switch off the wipers andremove the SmartKey from the starter switch(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure thevehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0)before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, thewiper motor could suddenly turn on and causeinjury.

G Warning!Wiper blades are components that are subjectto wear and tear. Replace the wiper bladestwice a year, preferably in the spring and fall.Otherwise the windshield will not be wipedproperly. As a result, you may not be able toobserve surrounding traffic conditions andcould cause an accident.

! To avoid damage to the hood, the wiperarms should only be folded forward whenin the vertical position.

! Never open the hood when a wiper arm isfolded forward.Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiperarm back. If released, the force of theimpact from the tensioning spring couldcrack the windshield.Do not allow a wiper arm to contact thewindshield glass without a wiper bladeinserted.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethis work carried out at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Replacing wiper blades 275

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 275

Z

Placing wiper arms in vertical position

Wiper arms in vertical position

X Make sure the hood is fully closed.

Vehicles with SmartKeyX Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to

position 1.X Turn the combination switch to wiper

setting II.X With wiper arms in vertical position, turn

the SmartKey in the starter switch toposition 0.


Vehicles with KEYLESS-GOX Turn off the engine.

With the driver’s door closed, the starterswitch is now in position 1.

X Turn the combination switch to wipersetting II.

X With wiper arms in vertical position, openthe driver’s door.The starter switch is set to position 0, sameas the SmartKey removed from the starterswitch.

X Turn the combination switch to wipersetting 0.

Removing wiper blades! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.

They could tear.

X Fold the wiper arm forward until it snapsinto place.

X Turn the wiper blade at a right angle towiper arm.

X Slide the wiper blade sideways out of theretainer.

Installing wiper bladesX Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm in

opposite direction of arrow (Y page 276).X Rotate the wiper blade into a position

parallel to the wiper arm.X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the

windshield.Make sure you hold on to the wiper whenfolding the wiper arm back.

! Make sure the wiper blades are installedproperly. Improperly installed wiper bladesmay cause windshield damage.

Flat tire

Safety notes

G Warning!The dimensions of the spare wheel aredifferent from those of the road wheels. As aresult, the vehicle handling characteristics

276 Flat tirePr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 276

change when driving with a spare wheelmounted. Adapt your driving styleaccordingly.The spare wheel is for temporary use only.When driving with a spare wheel mounted,ensure proper tire inflation pressure and donot exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible to have thespare wheel replaced with a regular roadwheel.Never operate the vehicle with more than onespare wheel mounted.Do not switch off the ESP® when a sparewheel is mounted.

Preparing the vehicleX Whenever possible, park the vehicle in a

safe distance from moving traffic on a hard,flat surface.

X Turn on the hazard warning flasher.X Turn the steering wheel so that the front

wheels are in a straight-ahead position.X Engage the parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission into park

position P.X Turn off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the starter

switch.orX Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the

driver’s door (this puts the starter switch inposition 0, same as with the SmartKeyremoved from the starter switch). Thedriver’s door can then be closed again.Open doors only when conditions are safeto do so.

X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at asafe distance from the roadway. Opendoors only when conditions are safe to doso.

Mounting the spare wheel

IntroductionX Prepare the vehicle as described

(Y page 277).X Take the following out of the vehicle:Rspare wheelRjackRvehicle tool kitRwheel wrenchRelectric air pump

For information on where to find therespective items, see “Where will I find ...?”(Y page 224) and (Y page 225).

i Vehicles without spare wheel are notfactory-equipped with the tools required fora wheel change such as a jack or a wheelwrench. Some tools required for a wheelchange are specific to your vehicle.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter to obtain the tools approved foryour vehicle. This section describes thewheel change using the tools approved andrecommended for your vehicle.

Removing tensioning straps from spare wheelThis description applies to vehicles with 19"spare wheel with collapsible tire only.A 19" spare wheel with collapsible tire hastwo tensioning straps on it that must beremoved before mounting the spare wheel.

Flat tire 277

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 277

Z

X Press on both clips ; simultaneously torelease buckle :.

X Store the tensioning straps in a safe place.You will need them to store the spare wheelin the trunk after use (Y page 225).

Lifting the vehicle

G Warning!When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jackwhich has been specifically approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle.The jack is designed exclusively for jacking upthe vehicle at the jack tubes built into bothsides of the vehicle. Make sure the jack armis fully inserted in the jack tube. The jack mustalways be vertical when in use, especially oninclines or declines.The jack is intended only for lifting the vehiclebriefly for wheel changes. It is not suited forperforming maintenance work under thevehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use thejack only to lift the vehicle during a wheelchange.Never get beneath the vehicle while it issupported by the jack. Keep hands and feetaway from the area under the lifted vehicle.Always lower the vehicle onto sufficientcapacity jackstands before working under thevehicle.Always engage the parking brake firmly andblock the wheels with wheel chocks or othersizeable objects before raising the vehiclewith the jack. Do not disengage the parkingbrake while the vehicle is raised.Make sure that the ground on which thevehicle is standing and where you place thejack is solid, level and not slippery. Ifnecessary, use a large underlay. On slipperysurfaces, such as tiled floors, you should usea non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.Do not use wooden blocks or similar objectsto support the jack. Otherwise the jack maynot be able to achieve its load-bearingcapacity if it is not at its full height.

Never start the engine when the vehicle israised.Also observe the notes on the jack.

X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byblocking wheels with wheel chocks (notincluded) or other sizeable objects.

When changing a wheel on a level surface:X Place a wheel chock or other sizeable

object in front of and another wheel chockor other sizeable object behind the wheelthat is diagonally opposite to the wheelbeing changed.

Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack ona level surface. However, shouldcircumstances require you to do so on a hill:X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable

objects on the downhill side in front of bothwheels on the side opposite to the side onwhich the wheel is to be changed.

G Warning!Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or onslight inclines/declines. Otherwise, thevehicle could fall off the jack and injure you orothers.

X On the wheel to be changed, loosen but donot yet remove the wheel bolts(approximately one full turn with wheelwrench :).

The jack support tubes are located directlybehind the front wheel housings and in frontof the rear wheel housings.

278 Flat tirePr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 278

G Warning!When turning the wheel wrench to loosen thewheel bolts, make sure you position yourhands on the wrench in such a way that youavoid injury to yourself, such as scraping yourhands against the wheel. Make sure turningthe wheel wrench will not scratch or damagethe wheel rim.

! Do not position the jack on the body ofthe vehicle, as this may cause damage tothe vehicle.

Jack support tube cover (except SL 63 AMG,SL 65 AMG, and vehicles with Sport Package)

Jack support tube cover (SL 63 AMG, SL 65 AMG,and vehicles with Sport Package only)

X Open cover ; by pressing at pointindicated by arrow.

orX Insert a flat blade screwdriver in the

opening of cover ; and pry it out.

X Remove cover ;, taking care not todamage the locking tabs.

X Insert jack arm ? fully into jack supporttube hole A up to the stop.

G Warning!Insert the jack fully into the jack support tubehole up to the stop. Otherwise, the vehiclemay fall from the jack and cause personalinjury or damage to the vehicle.

X Keeping jack in this position, turn crank= clockwise until the jack base meets theground. Make sure the jack is vertical.

X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is amaximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

Removing the wheel

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt andremove it.

X Replace this wheel bolt with alignmentbolt :.

X Remove the remaining bolts.

Flat tire 279

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 279

Z

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.This could result in damage to the wheelbolts and wheel hub threads.

X Remove the wheel.

Attaching the spare wheel

G Warning!Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel isproperly attached.Inflate the collapsible tire using the electricair pump before lowering the vehicle.

G Warning!Always replace wheel bolts that are damagedor rusted.Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.Damaged wheel hub threads should berepaired immediately. Do not continue todrive under these circumstances! Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or callRoadside Assistance.Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightenedwheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.This could cause an accident. Make sure touse the correct wheel bolts.

G Warning!Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts.Other wheel bolts may come loose.Do not tighten the wheel bolts when thevehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle couldfall off the jack.

X Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheelhub.

! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flatagainst hub and hold it there whileinstalling first wheel bolt.

X Guide the spare wheel onto the alignmentbolt and push it on.

X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten themslightly.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Install the last wheel bolt and tighten it

slightly.X Inflate the collapsible tire (Y page 280).

Inflating the collapsible tire


G Warning!Observe safety instructions on air pump label.

! Do not lower the vehicle before inflatingthe collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim maybe damaged.

Your vehicle may be equipped with either oftwo versions of the electric air pump:RVersion 1: The air hose with pressure

gauge and the electrical plug are locatedbehind a flap.RVersion 2: The pressure gauge is located

in the pump housing. The air hose andelectrical plug are located at the bottom ofthe pump housing.

280 Flat tirePr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 280

The following description applies to bothversions. Differences in usage are expresslydeclared.

Version 1

Version 2

X Version 1 only: Open flap : on electricair pump.

X Version 1 only: Pull out electrical plug= and air hose with pressure gauge andvent screw ?.

X Version 2 only: Pull electrical plug = andthe air hose out of the pump housingbottom.

X Version 1 only: Close vent screw on airhose ?.

X Remove the valve cap from the collapsibletire valve.

X Screw union nut A onto the collapsible tirevalve.

X Make sure air pump switch ; is set to 0.X Insert electrical plug = into the cigarette

lighter socket (Y page 166) or a poweroutlet (Y page 166).

X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch toposition 1.

orX Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. Donot depress the brake pedal.

X Press I on electric air pump switch ;.The electric air pump switches on andinflates the collapsible tire.

X Inflate the collapsible tire to therecommended tire inflation pressure asspecified for your vehicle (Y page 303).This should take approximately 5 minutes.

G Warning!The air hose and the union nut can becomehot during inflation. Exercise proper cautionto avoid burning yourself when using theequipment.

! Do not operate the electric air pumplonger than 8 minutes without interruption.Otherwise it may overheat.You may operate the air pump again afterit has cooled off.

! Compare the recommended tire inflationpressure for your vehicle with the tireinflation pressure on the yellow labellocated on the spare wheel rim.If the tire inflation pressure on the yellowlabel on the spare wheel rim differs fromthe values given in this Operator’s Manual,inflate the tire to the recommended tireinflation pressure given on the yellow labelon the spare wheel rim.

X Press 0 on electric air pump switch ;.X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to

position 0.orX Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the

KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice. Donot depress the brake pedal.

X Version 1 only: If the tire inflation pressureis above the recommended tire inflation

Flat tire 281

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 281

Z

pressure as specified for your vehicle(Y page 303), decrease tire pressure usingthe vent screw on air hose ?.

X Version 2 only: If the tire inflation pressureis above the recommended tire inflationpressure as specified for your vehicle(Y page 303), decrease tire pressure usingdeflate button B.

G Observe Safety notes, see page 189.X Detach the electric air pump.X Reinstall collapsible tire valve cap.X Version 1 only: Store electrical plug =

and air hose ? behind flap :.X Version 2 only: Store electrical plug =

and the air hose back into the pumphousing bottom.

X Place the electric air pump back in itsdesignated storage space.

X Lower the vehicle.

Lowering the vehicle


X Lower the vehicle by turning the crankcounterclockwise until the vehicle isresting fully on its own weight.

X Pull the jack out of the jack support tube.

X Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,following the diagonal sequence illustrated(: to A), until all bolts are tight. Observea tightening torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

G Warning!Have the tightening torque checked afterchanging a wheel. The wheels could comeloose if they are not tightened to a torque of96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

G Warning!When turning the wheel wrench to tighten thewheel bolts, make sure you position yourhands on the wrench in such a way that youavoid injury to yourself, such as scraping yourhands against the wheel. Make sure turningthe wheel wrench will not scratch or damagethe wheel rim.

X Before storing the jack in the trunk, crankback to storage position and fold in the jackarm.

X Store the jack and the other vehicle toolsin the designated storage space.

For information on storing the spare wheelafter it has been replaced by a regular roadwheel, see (Y page 225).

i The flat tire may be transported in thetrunk when the retractable hardtop isclosed. If available use a protective wrap onthe spare wheel.

i Do not restart the tire inflation pressuremonitor until a full size wheel/tire withfunctioning sensor has been placed backinto service on the vehicle.

X Do not exceed the maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

Replacing jack support tube coverX Slide tongue of cover under the upper edge

of the tube opening.X Applying even pressure, press cover until it

snaps into place.

282 Flat tirePr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 282

Be careful not to damage the locking tabsor clamp the plastic retaining strap.

MOExtended systemThe MOExtended system allows you tocontinue driving your vehicle even if there isa total loss of pressure in one or more tires.You may only use the MOExtended system inconjunction with the Advanced TPMS(Y page 190).The maximum distance in emergency modedepends on the vehicle’s load. It is 50 miles(80 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and18 miles (30 km) if the vehicle is fully loaded.The point at which the maximum drivingdistance in emergency mode begins is whenthe warning message appears in themultifunction display indicating that there isa loss of tire inflation pressure.X Do not exceed the maximum speed of

50 mph (80 km/h).

G Warning!In emergency mode, your vehicle’s drivingcharacteristics are diminished in suchsituations as:Rdriving around curvesRwhile brakingRwhile accelerating rapidly

Therefore, your driving style must be adaptedaccordingly. Avoid abrupt steering and drivingmaneuvers, as well as driving over obstacles(road curbs, potholes, or off-road areas). Thisis especially important if the vehicle is heavilyloaded.The emergency driving distance that can beachieved greatly depends on the demandsplaced on the vehicle. Depending on speed,load, driving maneuvers, road conditions,outside temperature, etc., the distance can besignificantly shorter or, if the vehicle is drivencautiously, somewhat longer.

Do not continue driving in emergency mode ifRyou notice knocking soundsRthe vehicle starts to shakeRsmoke develops and you smell rubberRESP® is intervening continuouslyRyou notice tears on the tire sidewalls

After driving in emergency mode, you musthave the rims inspected by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to check if they aresuitable for further use. The failed tire mustbe replaced in any case.

When replacing individual or all tires on thevehicle, make sure only tires marked with“MOExtended” are mounted in the sizespecified for your vehicle (Y page 299).

Battery

Safety notesThese batteries should always be sufficientlycharged in order to achieve their rated servicelife. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for batterymaintenance intervals.If you use your vehicle mostly for short-distance trips, you will need to have thebattery charge checked more frequently.When replacing a battery, always use abattery approved by Mercedes-Benz.If you do not intend to operate your vehiclefor an extended period of time, contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center aboutsteps you need to observe.

G Warning!Observe all safety instructions andprecautions when handling automotivebatteries.

Battery 283

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 283

Z

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames andsmoking are prohibitedwhen handling batteries.Avoid creating sparks.Battery acid is caustic. Donot allow it to come intocontact with skin, eyes orclothing.Wear suitable protectiveclothing, especially gloves,apron and faceguard.Wear eye protection.Rinse any acid spillsimmediately with clearwater. Contact a physicianif necessary.Keep children away.

Follow the instructions inthis Operator’s Manual.

A battery contains materials that can harmthe environment if disposed of improperly. Alarge 12 V storage battery contains lead.Recycling of the battery is the preferredmethod of disposal. Many states (USA only)or provinces (Canada only) require sellers ofbatteries to accept the old battery forrecycling.

G Warning!Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injury or death.Never lean over batteries while connecting.You might get injured.Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do notallow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately

flush affected area with water and seekmedical help if necessary.A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,which is flammable and explosive. Keepflames or sparks away from battery, avoidimproper connection of jumper cables,smoking etc.

G Warning!Do not place metal objects on the battery asthis could result in a short circuit.Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the riskof acid burns in the event of an accident.Take care that you do not become staticallycharged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing orrubbing against textiles. For this reason, youalso should not pull or push the battery overcarpets or other synthetic materials.Never touch the battery first. First touch theoutside body of the vehicle in order to releaseany possible electrostatic charges.Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. Thebattery could explode if touched due toelectrostatic charge or due to sparkformation.

! The battery is a Valve-Regulated LeadAcid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as“fleece” battery.Such batteries do not require topping-up ofthe electrolyte level. VRLA batteriestherefore do not have cell caps and thebattery cover is non-removable. Do notattempt to open the battery as otherwisethe battery will be damaged.VRLA batteries do not require topping-up ofthe electrolyte level. They cannot beopened to check the electrolyte level.However, the battery condition must bechecked periodically by performing abattery conductance test. Refer toMaintenance Booklet for battery conditiontesting intervals.

284 BatteryPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 284

The factory-equipped battery may only bereplaced with a battery thatRhas the same security featuresRis of identical sizeRis of identical voltageRis of identical capacity

! As any other battery, the battery maydischarge if you do not operate the vehiclefor an extended period of time. Have thebattery disconnected at a qualifiedworkshop or an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter in such a case. You may alsoconnect an accessory battery charge unitexpressly approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle model to maintain the batterycharge. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further information.The battery, the battery ventilation hoseand the lateral plug must always besecurely installed when the vehicle is inoperation.

! Never loosen or detach battery terminalclamps while the engine is running or theSmartKey is in the starter switch orKEYLESS-GO button is in position 1.Otherwise the alternator and otherelectronic components could be severelydamaged.Have the battery checked regularly at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Refer to Maintenance Booklet formaintenance intervals or contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center forfurther information.

i After battery power was interrupted, dothe following:RSynchronize the ESP® (Y page 228).RSynchronize the power windows

(Y page 98).

Charging the battery

G Warning!Never charge a battery while still installed inthe vehicle unless the accessory batterycharge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz isbeing used. Gases may escape duringcharging and could cause an explosion thatmay result in personal injury, paint damage orcorrosion.An accessory battery charge unit speciallyadapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles andtested and approved by Mercedes-Benz isavailable. It permits the charging of thebattery in its installed position. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center forinformation and availability.Charge battery in accordance with theseparate instructions for the accessorybattery charger.

Have the battery charged at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. If you charge thebattery yourself, follow the operatinginstructions for your charging device.Only use a battery charge unit with amaximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.X Charge battery in accordance with the

instructions of the battery chargermanufacturer.

Jump starting

G Warning!Failure to follow these directions will causedamage to the electronic components, andcan lead to a battery explosion and severeinjury or death.Never lean over batteries while connecting orjump starting. You might get injured.Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do notallow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately

Jump starting 285

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 285

Z

flush affected area with water, and seekmedical help if necessary.A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,which is flammable and explosive. Keepflames or sparks away from battery, avoidimproper connection of jumper cables,smoking, etc.Attempting to jump start a frozen battery canresult in it exploding, causing personal injury.Read all instructions before proceeding.

! Do not tow-start the vehicle. You couldotherwise seriously damage the automatictransmission which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

! Jump starting should only be performedon the starter battery installed in the enginecompartment.Avoid repeated and lengthy startingattempts.Do not attempt to start the engine using abattery quick-charge unit.If the engine does not run after severalunsuccessful starting attempts, have itchecked at the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.Excessive unburned fuel generated byrepeated failed starting attempts maydamage the catalytic converter and maypresent a fire risk.Make sure the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation.Make sure the cable clamps do not touchany other metal part while the other end isstill attached to a battery.

If the starter battery is discharged, the enginecan be started with jumper cables and thefully charged battery of another vehicle or anequivalent starter pack. Observe thefollowing:RAccess to the battery is not possible on all

vehicles. If you cannot access the battery

of the other vehicle, provide jump startpower by an external battery or starterpack.RJump starting should only be performed

when the engine and catalytic converterare cold.RDo not jump start the engine or charge the

battery if the battery is frozen. Let thebattery thaw out first.ROnly jump start from batteries with the

same voltage rating (12 V). Jump startingwith a more powerful battery could damagethe vehicle’s electrical system, which is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.ROnly use jumper cables with sufficient

cross-section and insulated terminalclamps.RAlways make sure the jumper cables are

not on or near pulleys, fans or other partsthat move when an engine is started orrunning.RShould the battery be drained completely,

let the donating power source charge thevehicle for several minutes beforereattempting the starting process.

Jump starting should only be performed onthe starter battery. The starter battery islocated in the engine compartment on thepassenger side.X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Engage the parking brake.X Make sure the automatic transmission is in

park position P.X Open the hood (Y page 180).

286 Jump startingPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 286

Position A represents the charged battery ofanother vehicle or an equivalent starter pack.X Remove cover from battery positive

terminal ;.

! Never invert the terminal connections!

X Connect positive terminal : of chargedbattery A with positive terminal ; with ajumper cable. Clamp the cable to positiveterminal : of charged battery A first.

X Start engine of the vehicle with chargedbattery A and run at idle speed.

X Connect negative terminal = of chargedbattery A with negative terminal ? witha jumper cable. Clamp the cable tonegative terminal = of charged batteryA first.

X Start engine of the vehicle with thedischarged battery and run at idle speed.You can now turn on the electricalconsumers. Do not switch on theheadlamps under any circumstances.

X Remove the jumper cables from negativeterminals = and ? first.

X Remove the jumper cables from positiveterminals : and ;.You can now switch on the headlamps.

X Have the battery checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Towing the vehicle

Safety notesMercedes-Benz recommends that the vehiclebe transported with all wheels off the groundusing flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dollyequipment. This method is preferable to othertypes of towing.

! To prevent damage during transport, donot tie down vehicle by its chassis orsuspension parts.

G Warning!The electro-hydraulic brake system requireselectrical power to operate.A malfunction in the vehicle’s power supply orelectrical system may impair brake systemoperation and switch it into its emergencyoperation mode. In such a case, the red brake

Towing the vehicle 287

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 287

Z

warning lamp comes on and warningmessages appear in the multifunction displaywhile driving. To brake, the driver must thenapply significantly greater brake pedalpressure and depress the pedal much furtherto obtain the expected braking effect. Ifnecessary, apply full pressure to the brakepedal. Brakes are only applied to the frontwheels. Stopping distance is increased! Formore information, see “Electro-hydraulicbrake system” in this in this Operator’sManual.If there is a malfunction in the electro-hydraulic brake system, we recommend thatthe vehicle be transported with all wheels offthe ground using flatbed or appropriate wheellift/dolly equipment.

If circumstances do not permit therecommended towing methods, the vehiclemay be towed with all wheels on the groundor one axle raised only so far as necessary tohave the vehicle moved to a safe locationwhere the recommended towing methodscan be employed.X Switch off the tow-away alarm before

towing the vehicle with all wheels on theground or one axle raised (Y page 64).

! Before towing the vehicle observe thefollowing instructions:RDo not tow-start the vehicle. You could

otherwise seriously damage theautomatic transmission which is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.RDo not tow with sling-type equipment.

Towing with sling-type equipment overbumpy roads will damage radiator andsupports.RTowing of the vehicle should only be

done using the properly installed towingeye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, towrope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis,frame or suspension parts.


! Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly ordiagonally, since it could result in damageto the chassis alignment.

! Do not use the towing eye bolt forrecovery, as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

i If the battery is disconnected ordischargedRthe SmartKey will not turn in the starter

switchRthe automatic transmission will remain in

park position PFor more information see “Battery”(Y page 283) or “Jump starting”(Y page 285).

Installing towing eye boltDepending on whether you are towing avehicle or you are being towed, the towing eyebolt can be screwed into threaded holeswhich are located behind covers on eachbumper.The towing eye bolt is supplied with thevehicle tool kit, located in the compartmentunderneath the trunk floor (Y page 224).X Take the vehicle tool kit out of the trunk.

Removing cover in front bumperX Press mark on cover : as indicated by the

arrow.X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole

for the towing eye bolt.

288 Towing the vehiclePr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 288

USA only

X Press mark on cover : as indicated by thearrow.

X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded holefor the towing eye bolt.

Canada only

X Press mark on cover : as indicated by thearrow and pull on lower edgesimultaneously.

X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded holefor the towing eye bolt.

Removing cover in rear bumper

G Warning!In order to avoid possible serious burns orinjury, use extreme caution when removingthe rear cover, because the rear exhaust pipeis extremely hot.

Example illustration USA, bumper in Canada differsslightly

X Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into upperleft or right recess of cover :.

X Loosen cover : using the lever.X Fold cover : down in direction of arrow to

reveal the threaded hole for the towing eyebolt.

Fixing towing eye bolt

Example illustration front bumper

X Take the towing eye bolt and, if soequipped, the wheel wrench from thevehicle tool kit (Y page 224).

X Screw towing eye bolt ; clockwise intothreaded hole to its stop.

X Insert wheel wrench into towing eye andtighten towing eye bolt ; by turning itclockwise.

orX If your vehicle is not equipped with a wheel

wrench, use a suitable object to turn thetowing eye bolt.

Towing the vehicle 289

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 289

Z

Removing towing eye boltX Loosen towing eye bolt ; by turning it

counterclockwise.X Unscrew towing eye bolt ;.

X Reinstalling front cover: Fit locking tabsof cover : (Y page 288) under the loweredge of the opening in the bumper.

X Apply even pressure on the upper part ofthe cover until it snaps into place.

X Reinstalling rear cover: Fit cover :(Y page 288) and snap it into place.

X Store the towing eye bolt ; and wheelwrench back into the vehicle tool kit.

Towing with front axle raised! The vehicle may be towed only for

distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at aspeed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).

X Make sure the ignition is switched on.X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the

brake pedal and keep it pressed.X Shift the automatic transmission into

neutral position N.X Release the brake pedal.X If engaged, release the parking brake.X Switch off the automatic central locking

(Y page 126).X Switch off the ignition and leave the

SmartKey in the starter switch.X Switch on the hazard warning flasher

(Y page 92).

! Because the ESP® operatesautomatically, the engine and ignition mustbe shut off (SmartKey in starter switchposition 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stopbutton in position 0 or 1) when the vehicleis being towed with the front axle raised.Active braking action through the ESP®


Towing with all wheels on the ground

G Warning!If circumstances require towing the vehiclewith all wheels on the ground, always tow witha tow bar if:Rthe engine will not runRthere is a malfunction in the electro-

hydraulic brake systemRthere is a malfunction in the power supply

or in the vehicle’s electrical system

This is necessary to adequately control thetowed vehicle.Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels onthe ground, make sure the SmartKey is instarter switch position 2.


X Make sure the ignition is switched on.X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the

brake pedal and keep it pressed.X Shift the automatic transmission into

neutral position N.X Release the brake pedal.X If engaged, release the parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning flasher

(Y page 92).

! The vehicle may be towed only fordistances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at aspeed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).

i While being towed with the hazardwarning flasher in use, use the combinationswitch in the usual manner to signal turns.Only the selected turn signal will operate.Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazardwarning flasher will operate again.

290 Towing the vehiclePr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 290

Fuses

IntroductionThe electrical fuses in your vehicle serve toswitch off malfunctioning power circuits.If a fuse is blown, the components andsystems secured by that fuse will stopoperating.

G Warning!Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benzwith the specified amperage for the system inquestion and do not attempt to repair orbridge a blown fuse. Using other thanapproved fuses or using repaired or bridgedfuses may cause an overload leading to a fire,and/or cause damage to electricalcomponents and/or systems. Have the causedetermined and remedied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

A blown fuse must be replaced by anappropriate spare fuse (recognizable by itscolor or the fuse rating given on the fuse) ofthe amperage recommended in the fusechart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be gladto advise you on this subject.

i In case of a blown fuse contact RoadsideAssistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have thecause determined and rectified by anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The fuse chart is located in the trunk with thevehicle tool kit (Y page 224). The fuse chartexplains the fuse allocation and fuseamperages.

Before replacing fusesX Engage the parking brake.X Make sure the automatic transmission is in

park position P.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn off the engine.


X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open thedriver’s door (this puts the starter switch inposition 0, same as with the SmartKeyremoved from the starter switch). Thedriver’s door then can be closed again.

Fuse box in passenger compartmentThe fuse box is located under the rearpassenger-side storage compartment.

X Open the passenger door.X Opening: Open the rear passenger-side

storage compartment (Y page 163).X Lift both clips :.X Remove storage compartment floor ; in

direction of arrow.X Closing: To reinstall storage compartment

floor ; after checking or replacing fuses,follow the procedure in reverse order.

! The fuse box cover must be properlypositioned as described. Otherwise,moisture or dirt could enter the fuse boxand possibly impair fuse operation.

Fuse box in trunkThe fuse in the trunk is located on the right-hand side of the trunk.X Lift up the trunk floor cover.

Fuses 291

Prac

tical

hin

ts


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 291

Z

Fuse box in engine compartmentThe fuse boxes are located on the driver’s andpassenger side in front of the bulkhead (wallseparating the engine and passengercompartment).X Open the hood.

Fuse box on driver’s side

Fuse box on passenger side

X With a dry cloth, remove any moisture fromfuse box cover :.

X Move slide to position = and lift fuse boxcover :.

X Closing: Make sure the sealing rubber ispositioned properly.

X Hook fuse box cover : onto tabs and closeit.

X Move slide to position ;.

! The fuse box cover must be properlypositioned with the slide at the &symbol to prevent moisture and/or dirtfrom entering the fuse box and possiblyimpairing fuse operation.

X Close the hood after checking or replacingfuses.

Emergency engine shut-downIf the engine cannot be turned off asdescribed (Y page 102), you may use thefollowing emergency procedure.X Take the fuse chart from the vehicle tool kit

(Y page 224).X Find row “Engine emergency stop” in the

fuse chart table to identify the fuses thathave to be removed as well as theirlocations.

X Remove the respective fuses.

292 FusesPr

actic

al h

ints


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 292

Vehicle equipment ............................ 294Parts service ..................................... 294Warranty coverage ........................... 294Identification labels .......................... 294Vehicle specification SL 550(230.471) ........................................... 296Vehicle specification SL 600(230.477) ........................................... 296Vehicle specification SL 63 AMG(230.470) ........................................... 297Vehicle specification SL 65 AMG(230.479) ........................................... 298Rims and tires ................................... 299Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ...... 303

293

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 293

Vehicle equipment


Parts service

All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersmaintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-BenzParts required for maintenance and repairwork. In addition, strategically located partsdistribution centers provide quick andreliable parts service.More than 300 000 different parts forMercedes-Benz models are available.Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjectedto stringent quality inspections. Each part hasbeen specifically developed, manufactured orselected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benzvehicles.Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Partsshould be installed.

! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benzparts and accessories not authorized byMercedes-Benz. Doing so could damagethe vehicle, which is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, itcould compromise the vehicle’s durabilityor safety.

Warranty coverage

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:

RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island, and Vermont EmissionControl Systems WarrantyRState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon

Laws)Replacement parts and accessories arecovered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts andAccessories warranties, copies of which areavailable at any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Loss of Service and Warranty Information booklet

Should you lose your Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center arrange for areplacement. It will be mailed to you.

Identification labels

294 Identification labelsTe

chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 294

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) canbe foundRon certification label : on the driver’s door

B-pillarRembossed underneath a trim below the

passenger-side rear storage compartmentlid (Y page 295)Ron the lower edge of the windshield

(Y page 295)

Example certification label (U.S. vehicles); VIN= Paintwork code

Example certification label (Canada vehicles); VIN= Paintwork code

i Data shown on certification label are forillustration purposes only. These data are

specific to each vehicle and may vary fromdata shown in the illustration. Refer tocertification label on vehicle for actual dataspecific to your vehicle.

Passenger-side rear storage compartment

X Open compartment lid ?.X Remove compartment trim A.

VIN B is now visible.

C Engine number (engraved on engine) D VIN (on lower edge of windshield)E Emission control information label,

includes both federal and Californiacertification exhaust emission standards

i When ordering parts, please specifyvehicle identification and engine number.

Identification labels 295

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 295

Z

Vehicle specification SL 550 (230.471)

The quoted data apply only to the standardvehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the corresponding data of allspecial bodies and special equipment.

Engine SL 550

Engine, type 273

Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,gasoline injection

No. of cylinders 8

Bore 3.86 in (98.00 mm)

Stroke 3.56 in (90.50 mm)

Total piston displacement

333.2 cu in(5 461 cm3)

Compression ratio

10.7:1

Output acc. to SAE J 134920

382 hp/6 000 rpm(285 kW/6 000 rpm)

Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349

391 lb-ft/2 800 - 4 800 rpm

(530 Nm/2 800 - 4 800 rpm)

Maximum engine speed

6 500 rpm

Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8

Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm

Electrical system SL 550

Alternator 14 V/180 A

Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW

Starter battery 12 V/35 Ah


Battery for electrical consumers

12 V/70 Ah

Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33

Spark plugs, electrode gap

0.031 in (0.8 mm)

Spark plugs, tightening torque

15 - 18 lb-ft(20 - 25 Nm)

Main dimensions SL 550

Overall vehicle length

179.8 in (4 568 mm)

185.6 in(4 713 mm)21

Overall vehicle width22

81.5 in (2 069 mm)

Overall vehicle height

51.0 in (1 295 mm)

65.9 in (1 674 mm)21

Wheelbase 100.8 in (2 560 mm)

Track, front 61.4 in (1 559 mm)

Track, rear 60.5 in (1 537 mm)

Turning circle 36.2 ft (11.04 m)

Weights SL 550

Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)

Vehicle specification SL 600 (230.477)


20 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.21 When opening/closing hardtop.22 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.

296 Vehicle specification SL 600 (230.477)Te

chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 296

Engine SL 600

Engine, type 275


No. of cylinders 12

Bore 3.23 in (82.00 mm)



336.4 cu in(5 513 cm3)

Compression ratio

9.0:1


510 hp/5 000 rpm(380 kW/5 000 rpm)


612 lb-ft/1 900 - 3 500 rpm

(830 Nm/1 900 - 3 500 rpm)


5 950 rpm

Firing order 1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9







12 V/70 Ah

Spark plugs, type NGK IFR 6Q-G



0.028 in (0.7 mm)


15 - 22 lb-ft(20 - 30 Nm)

Main dimensions SL 600


179.8 in (4 568 mm)

185.6 in(4 713 mm)24


81.5 in (2 069 mm)


51.0 in (1 295 mm)

65.9 in (1 674 mm)24





Weights SL 600


Vehicle specification SL 63 AMG (230.470)



Vehicle specification SL 63 AMG (230.470) 297

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 297

Z

Engine SL 63 AMG

Engine, type 156


No. of cylinders 8

Bore 4.02 in (102.20 mm)



378.8 cu in(6 208 cm3)

Compression ratio

11.3:1


518 hp/6 800 rpm(386 kW/6 800 rpm)


465 lb-ft/5 200 rpm(630 Nm/5 200 rpm)


7 000 rpm

Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8


Electrical system SL 63 AMG





12 V/70 Ah

Spark plugs, type NGK ILZKAR 7A10


0.039 in (1.0 mm)


15 - 18 lb-ft(20 - 25 Nm)

Main dimensions SL 63 AMG


181.0 in (4 598 mm)

187.9 in(4 772 mm)27


81.5 in (2 069 mm)


51.1 in (1 298 mm)

66.1 in (1 680 mm)27





SL 63 AMG


Vehicle specification SL 65 AMG (230.479)


Engine SL 65 AMG

Engine, type 275


No. of cylinders 12

Bore 3.25 in (82.60 mm)



364.9 cu in(5 980 cm3)


298 Vehicle specification SL 65 AMG (230.479)Te

chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 298

Engine SL 65 AMG

Compression ratio

9.0:1


603 hp/4 800 - 5 100 rpm

(450 kW/4 800 - 5 100 rpm)


738 lb-ft/2 000 - 4 000 rpm

(1 000 Nm/2 000 - 4 000 rpm)


5 950 rpm

Firing order 1-12-5-8-3-10-6-7-2-11-4-9


Electrical system SL 65 AMG





12 V/70 Ah

Spark plugs, type NGK IFR 6Q-G


0.028 in (0.7 mm)


18 - 22 lb-ft(25 - 30 Nm)



181.0 in (4 598 mm)

187.9 in(4 772 mm)30



81.5 in (2 069 mm)


51.1 in (1 298 mm)

66.1 in (1 680 mm)30





SL 65 AMG


Rims and tires

Notes! Only use tires which have been tested and

approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tiresapproved by Mercedes-Benz are developedto provide best possible performance inconjunction with the driving safety systemson your vehicle such as the ABS or theESP®. Tires specially developed for yourvehicle and tested and approved byMercedes-Benz can be identified by findingthe following on the tire’s sidewall:RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original

equipment tiresRMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original

equipment tires (applicable to selectedtire sizes only)RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended

(tires with limited run-flatcharacteristics) original equipment tires


Rims and tires 299

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 299

Z

Using tires other than those approved byMercedes-Benz may result in damage thatis not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.

For information on driving with MOExtendedtires, see the “Practical hints” section(Y page 283).

! Using tires other than those approved byMercedes-Benz can have detrimentaleffects, such asRpoor handling characteristicsRincreased noiseRincreased fuel consumptionMoreover, tires and rims not approved byMercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibitdimensional variations and different tiredeformation characteristics that couldcause them to come into contact with thevehicle body or axle parts. Damage to thetires or the vehicle may be the result.

i Further information on tires and rims isavailable at any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. The Tire and Loading Informationplacard with the recommended tireinflation pressures for cold tires is locatedon the driver’s door B-pillar. Supplementaltire inflation pressure information fordriving at high speeds or for vehicle loadsless than the maximum loaded vehiclecondition can be found on the tire inflationpressure label. The tire inflation pressurelabel is located on the inside of the fuel filler

flap. The tire inflation pressure should bechecked regularly and should only beadjusted on cold tires. Follow tiremanufacturer’s maintenancerecommendation included with the vehicle.

For information on recommended tireinflation pressure and supplemental tireinflation pressure information for specialdriving situations, see (Y page 187).

i Please keep in mind that the vehicle mustbe equippedRwith wheels of identical dimensions on

each axle (left and right)Rwith tires of identical characteristics all

around, i.e. summer tires, winter tires,all-season tires, or MOExtended tires etc.

i The following pages also list the approvedrim and tire sizes for equipping your vehiclewith winter tires. Winter tires are notavailable as standard or optional factoryequipment, but can be purchased from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Equipping your vehicle with winter tiresapproved for your vehicle model mayrequire the purchase of rims of therecommended size for use with thesewinter tires. This depends on vehicle modeland the standard or optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire configuration onyour vehicle. For more information contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

300 Rims and tiresTe

chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 300

Same size tires

SL 550SL 550 (Sport Package)SL 600SL 600 (Sport Package)

SL 63 AMG

18" wheels Rims (light alloy)Wheel offset

8.5 J x 18 H21.38 in (35 mm)

—

AMG rims (light alloy)Wheel offset

— 8.5 J x 18 H21.18 in (30 mm)

Winter tires32,33 255/40 R18 95V M+Sior255/40 R18 95V M+SiMOExtended34

255/40 R18 95VM+Si

SL 63 AMGSL 63 AMG (Performance Package)SL 65 AMG

19" wheels AMG rims (light alloy)Wheel offset

8.5 J x 19 H21.18 in (30 mm)

Winter tires32,33 255/35 R19 96V XL (Extra Load) M+Si

32 Radial-ply tires.33 Not available as factory equipment.34 Must be used in conjunction with Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System only.

Rims and tires 301

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 301

Z

Mixed size tires

SL 55035 SL 60035

18" wheels Front axle Rims (light alloy)Wheel offset

8.5 J x 18 H21.38 in (35 mm)

8.5 J x 18 H21.38 in (35 mm)

Summer tires36 255/40 R18 95Wor255/40 R18 95YMOExtended37

255/40 R18 95Yor255/40 R18 95YMOExtended37

Rear axle Rims (light alloy)Wheel offset

9.5 J x 18 H21.57 in (40 mm)

9.5 J x 18 H21.57 in (40 mm)

Summer tires36,38 285/35 R18 97Wor285/35 R18 97YMOExtended37

285/35 R18 97Yor285/35 R18 97YMOExtended37

SL 550 39

SL 550 (Sport Package)35

SL 60039

SL 600 (Sport Package)35

SL 63 AMGSL 63 AMG (Performance Package)SL 65 AMG

19" wheels Front axle AMG rims (light alloy)Wheel offset

8.5 J x 19 H21.18 in (30 mm)

Summer tires36 255/35 ZR19 96Y XL (Extra Load)MO1

Rear axle AMG rims (light alloy)Wheel offset

9.5 J x 19 H21.22 in (31 mm)

Summer tires36,38 285/30 ZR19 98Y XL (Extra Load)MO1

35 USA only.36 Radial-ply tires.37 Must be used in conjunction with Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System only.38 Must not be used with snow chains.39 Canada only.

302 Rims and tiresTe

chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 302

Spare wheel

! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflationpressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim.If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the valuesgiven in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pressuregiven on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.

i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflationpressure of the road tires.

SL 550SL 550 (Sport Package)

SL 600SL 600 (Sport Package)SL 63 AMG

Rim 6 B x 17 H2 6 B x 18 H2

Wheel offset 0.98 in (25 mm) 0.98 in (25 mm)

Collapsible tire40 185/60-17 93P 175/55-18 95P


41 psi (2.8 bar) 51 psi (3.5 bar)

SL 63 AMG (Performance Package)SL 65 AMG

Rim 6.5 B x 19 H2

Wheel offset 0.55 in (14 mm)

Collapsible tire40 175/50-19 97P


51 psi (3.5 bar)

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

CapacitiesVehicle components and their respectivelubricants must match. Therefore only useproducts tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.For information on tested and approvedproducts, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USAonly).

G Warning!Comply with all valid regulations with respectto handling, storing, and disposing of servicefluids. Otherwise you could endanger personsor the environment.Keep service fluids out of the reach ofchildren.For health reasons, you should preventservice fluids from coming into direct contactwith your skin or clothing.

40 Must not be used with snow chains.

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 303

Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 303

Z

If a service fluid is swallowed, contact aphysician immediately.

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Engine with oil filter

SL 550SL 65 AMG

9.0 US qt (8.5 l) Approved engineoils

SL 600SL 63 AMG

8.5 US qt (8.0 l)


SL 550 9.8 US qt (9.3 l) MB AutomaticTransmission Fluid

SL 63 AMG 9.3 US qt (8.8 l)

SL 600SL 65 AMG

8.0 US qt (7.5 l)

Rear axle SL 550SL 600

1.3 US qt (1.2 l) MB Hypoid Gear Oil(SAE 85W-90)

SL 63 AMG Fuchs TitanEG 5010 D

SL 63 AMG41

SL 65 AMGCastrol SAF-XJ(SAE 75W-140)

Hydraulic system for active body control (ABC)

All models 3.7 US qt (3.5 l) MB ABC Fluid

Power steering All models approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power SteeringFluid (ChevronTexaco PSF 9109)

Brake system All models 0.53 US qt (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid(DOT 4+)

Cooling system SL 550 approx. 12.3 US qt (11.6 l) MB 325.0Anticorrosion/AntifreezeSL 600 approx. 15.9 US qt (15.0 l)

SL 63 AMG approx. 11.9 US qt (11.3 l)


Low temperature cooling system

SL 600 approx. 2.2 US qt (2.1 l)


41 With Performance Package.

304 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.Te

chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 304

Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Fuel tank All models 21.1 US gal (80.0 l) Premium unleadedgasoline (MinimumPosted Octane 91[Avg. of96 RON/86 MON])

Fuel tank reserve

SL 550SL 600

approx. 2.6 US gal (10.0 l)

SL 63 AMGSL 65 AMG

approx. 3.7 US gal (14.0 l)

Air conditioning system

All models — R134a refrigerantand specialPAG lubricant oil(never R 12)

Hydraulic system for retractable hardtop

All models 0.42 US qt (0.4 l) MB Hydraulic Oil


All models 7.4 US qt (7.0 l) MB WindshieldWasherConcentrate42

(Y page 309)Washer fluid mixingratio (Y page 309)

Approved engine oilsEngine oils are specifically tested for theirsuitability in our engines and durability for ourservice intervals. Therefore, only useapproved engine oils and oil filters requiredfor vehicles with the Maintenance System.For a listing of approved engine oils and oilfilters, contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).

! Using engine oils and oil filters of aspecification other than those expresslyrequired for the Maintenance System, orchanging of oil and oil filter at changeintervals longer than those called for by theMaintenance System will result in engine oremission control system damage not

covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.Please follow Maintenance Systemrecommendations for scheduled oilchanges. Failure to do so will result inengine or emission control system damagenot covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty.

Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.Use the table below to determine theMB sheet number.

Model Engine,type

MB sheetnumber

SL 550 273 229.5

SL 600 275 229.5

42 Mixed with water or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze.


Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 305

Z

Model Engine,type

MB sheetnumber

SL 63 AMG 156 229.543

SL 65 AMG 275 229.5

i MB sheet numbers are printed on theoutside of oil containers.

Viscosity grades for engine oilsUsing the chart below, select oil viscosityaccording to the lowest air temperatureexpected before the next oil change.

Engine oil additives! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.

They may damage the engine. Damage ormalfunctions resulting from blending oiladditives are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Air conditioning refrigerantR134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAGlubricating oil are used in the air conditioningsystem.

! Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-basedlubricating oil. Otherwise damage to thesystem will occur.

Brake fluid

G Warning!During vehicle operation, the boiling point ofthe brake fluid is continuously reducedthrough the absorption of moisture from theatmosphere.Under extremely strenuous operatingconditions, this moisture content can lead tothe formation of bubbles in the system, thusreducing the system’s efficiency.Therefore, the brake fluid must be replacedregularly. Refer to your vehicle’s MaintenanceBooklet for replacement interval.

Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benzis recommended. Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will provide you with additionalinformation.

Premium unleaded gasoline

G Warning!Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.It burns violently and can cause seriouspersonal injury.Never allow sparks, flames or smokingmaterials near gasoline!Turn off the engine before refueling.Whenever you are around gasoline, avoidinhaling fumes and any skin or clothingcontact. Extinguish all smoking materials.Direct skin contact with fuels and theinhalation of fuel vapors are damaging yourhealth.

! To maintain the engine’s durability andperformance, premium unleaded gasolinemust be used.If premium unleaded gasoline is notavailable and low octane gasoline is used,follow these precautions:RHave the fuel tank only partially filled

with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up

43 Restriction: Only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used.


chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 306

with premium unleaded gasoline as soonas possible.RAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt

acceleration.RDo not exceed an engine speed of

3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with alight load such as two persons and noluggage.RDo not exceed 2/3 of maximum

accelerator pedal position if the vehicleis fully loaded or operating inmountainous terrain.

Fuel requirementsOnly use premium unleaded gasoline. Theoctane number (posted at the pump) must be91 min. It is an average of both the ResearchOctane Number (RON) and the Motor OctaneNumber (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is alsoknown as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/orunleaded gasoline containing oxygenatessuch as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, andTBA can be used provided the ratio of any oneof these oxygenates to gasoline does notexceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.The ratio of methanol to gasoline must notexceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is notallowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can beused.These blends must also meet all other fuelrequirements, such as resistance to sparkknock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.

Gasoline additivesA major concern among enginemanufacturers is carbon build-up caused bygasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends onlythe use of quality gasoline containing

additives that prevent the build-up of carbondeposits.After an extended period of using fuelswithout such additives carbon deposits canbuild up, especially on the intake valves andin the combustion area, leading to engineperformance problems such as:RWarm-up hesitationRUnstable idleRKnocking/pingingRMisfireRPower lossIn areas where carbon deposits may beencountered due to lack of availability ofgasoline which contains these additives, theuse of Mercedes-Benz approved additives isrecommended.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeror visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for alisting of approved products. Followdirections on the product label.Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.This only results in unnecessary cost and maybe harmful to the engine operation.

! Damage or malfunction resulting frompoor fuel quality or from blending additionalfuel additives other than those tested andapproved by us for use on Mercedes-Benzvehicles are not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre-ownedor Extended Limited Warranties.

CoolantsThe engine coolant is a mixture of water andanticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:RCorrosion protectionRFreeze protectionRBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling

point)The cooling system was filled at the factorywith a coolant providing freeze protection to


Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 307

Z

approximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosionprotection.

! Add premixed coolant solution only.Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze separately from each other,could cause engine damage not covered bythe Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡(-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in thepressurized cooling system is reached atapproximately 266‡ (130†).The coolant solution must be used year roundto provide the necessary corrosion protectionand increase boil-over protection. Refer tothe Maintenance Booklet for replacementinterval.Coolant system design and coolant useddetermine the replacement interval. Thereplacement interval published in theMaintenance Booklet is only applicable ifMB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solutionor other Mercedes-Benz approved productsof equal specification are used to renew thecoolant concentration or bring it back up tothe proper level.For information on other Mercedes-Benzapproved products of equal specification,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeror visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).To provide important corrosion protection,the solution must be at least 50%anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent tofreeze protection to approximately -35‡[-37†]).If you use a solution that is more than 55%anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protectionto approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the enginetemperature will increase due to the lowerheat transfer capability of the solution.Therefore, do not use more than this amountof anticorrosion/antifreeze.If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used tobring it up to the proper level (have coolingsystem checked for signs of leakage). Please

make sure the mixture is in accordance withlabel instructions.The water in the cooling system must meetminimum requirements, which are usuallysatisfied by normal drinking water.If you are not sure about the water quality,contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Anticorrosion/antifreeze Your vehicle contains a number of aluminumparts. The use of aluminum components inmotor vehicle engines necessitates thatanticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used insuch engines be specifically formulated toprotect the aluminum parts. Failure to usesuch anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant willresult in a significantly shortened service life.Therefore, the following product is stronglyrecommended for use in your vehicle:MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.Before the start of the winter season (or oncea year in hot southern regions), you shouldhave the anticorrosion/antifreezeconcentration checked.The coolant is also regularly checked eachtime you bring your vehicle to an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for service.


chni

cal d

ata


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 308

Model Approximate freeze protection

-35‡ (-37†) -49‡ (-45†)

Cooling system SL 550 6.1 US qt (5.8 l) 6.8 US qt (6.4 l)

SL 600 7.9 US qt (7.5 l) 8.7 US qt (8.3 l)

SL 63 AMG 6.0 US qt (5.65 l) 6.6 US qt (6.2 l)


Low temperature cooling system

SL 600 1.1 US qt (1.05 l) 1.3 US qt (1.2 l)



G Warning!Washer solvent/antifreeze is highlyflammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it mayignite and burn. You could be seriouslyburned.

X Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate“MB SummerFit”.

X Mix with water for temperatures abovefreezing point.

X Mix with commercially available premixedwasher solvent/antifreeze fortemperatures below freezing point.

Washer fluid mixing ratio For temperatures above the freezing point:1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal[4.0 l] water)For temperatures below freezing point:1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal[4.0 l] solvent)


Tech

nica

l dat

a


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 309

Z

310


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 310

311


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 311

312


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 312

Service and LiteratureYour authorized Mercedes-Benz Center hastrained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.For expert advice and quality service, contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If you are interested in obtaining serviceliterature for your vehicle, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.We consider this the best way for you toobtain accurate information for your vehicle.For further information you can find us on theMercedes-Benz web site www.mbusa.com(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca(Canada only).

G Warning!To help avoid personal injury, be extremelycareful when performing any service work orrepairs. Improper or incomplete service or theuse of incorrect or inappropriate parts ormaterials may damage the vehicle or itsequipment, which may in turn result inpersonal injury.If you have any questions about carrying outany type of service, turn to the advice of anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

We reserve the right to make changes indesign and equipment.Therefore, information, illustrations anddescriptions in this Operator’s Manual mightdiffer from your vehicle.Reprinting, translation and copying, even ofexcerpts, is not permitted without our priorauthorization in writing.Press time July 30, 2009GSP/OISPrinted in U. S. A.


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 313

Order no. 6515 3100 13 Part no. 230 584 93 96 Edition A 2011

É2305849396dËÍ2305849396


2009-07-28T18:49:58+02:00 - Seite 314

sl - mercedes-benz usa · convenience ..... 127 instrument cluster ..... 122 lighting ... race...

Documents